JP6926170B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine can accept a gaming area in which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in the gaming area, and a gaming medium in the gaming area. It is equipped with entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and the game medium can be accepted at the entrance. The player can be entertained by giving the player a privilege (such as paying out the game medium, opening / closing the variable winning opening, or the like, which is advantageous for the player). In addition, the gaming machine is provided with an effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an effect image in the center of the front view in the game area, and displays an effect image according to the progress of the game (game state). This makes it difficult for the player to get bored by entertaining the player with the directed image.

In this type of gaming machine, a launch ball storage unit in which a game medium for driving into the game area is stored below the game area in front view, and a launch ball storage unit located below the launch ball storage unit to store the game medium. It is provided with a reserve storage unit (for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, in a gaming machine provided with a reserve storage unit for storing such a game medium, a more suitable one is required to realize a function as a reserve storage unit.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-104390

The present invention proposes a more suitable configuration of a reserve storage unit in a gaming machine.

The present invention
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
The main body frame on which the game board is mounted and
A door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame
A ball launcher that launches a game medium for playing a game in the game area, and a ball launcher.
A launch ball storage unit provided on the door frame and storing a game medium for driving into the game area by the ball launch device.
A reserve storage unit having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a vertical wall portion having a predetermined height, into which the game medium flows in from a predetermined supply port, and
A bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view,
With
The storage area includes a first storage area facing the front of the gaming machine and a second storage area not facing the front of the gaming machine.
It is provided with a cover portion that is provided so as to be connected to the preliminary storage portion regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame and does not allow the passage of the game ball.
The cover portion has a ceiling portion of the second storage area.
The cover portion is composed of a member separate from the preliminary storage portion, and the preliminary storage portion and the cover portion are configured to be disassembleable.
The cover portion is formed in a surface shape without a through hole so that the player cannot reach the surface of the cover portion opposite to the storage region side during the game from the second storage region side.
Even when the door frame is in the open state, the gaming medium located in the second storage area is configured so as not to flow out to the outside of the gaming machine without passing through the first storage area.
The cover portion is characterized in that it is blocked by the bulging portion so that it is difficult for the player to see from the front of the gaming machine during the game.
In addition, a game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
The main body frame on which the game board is mounted and
A door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame
A ball launcher that launches a game medium for playing a game in the game area, and a ball launcher.
A launch ball storage unit provided on the door frame and storing a game medium for driving into the game area by the ball launch device.
A reserve storage unit having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a game medium flowing in from a predetermined supply port that opens in the front-rear direction.
A bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view,
With
The storage area includes a first storage area facing the front of the gaming machine and a second storage area not facing the front of the gaming machine.
It is provided with a cover portion that is provided so as to form a ceiling portion of the second storage area regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame and does not allow the passage of game balls.
The cover portion has a cover standing wall portion and has a cover vertical wall portion.
The cover standing wall portion functions as a standing wall portion forming the second storage area, and serves as a standing wall portion.
The cover portion is formed in a surface shape without a through hole so that the player cannot reach the surface of the cover portion opposite to the storage region side during the game from the second storage region side.
Even when the door frame is in the open state, the gaming medium located in the second storage area is configured so as not to flow out to the outside of the gaming machine without passing through the first storage area.
The cover portion is characterized in that it is blocked by the bulging portion so that it is difficult for the player to see from the front of the gaming machine during the game.
again,
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
The main body frame on which the game board is mounted and
A door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame
A ball launcher that launches a game medium for playing a game in the game area, and a ball launcher.
A launch ball storage unit provided on the door frame and storing a game medium for driving into the game area by the ball launch device.
A reserve storage unit having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a game medium flowing in from a predetermined supply port that opens in the front-rear direction.
A bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view,
With
The storage area includes a first storage area facing the front of the gaming machine and a second storage area not facing the front of the gaming machine.
It is provided with a cover portion that is provided so as to form a ceiling portion of the second storage area regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame and does not allow the passage of game balls.
A standing wall portion having a predetermined height is provided along the edge portion of the second storage region so that the game medium does not flow out from the storage region even when the cover portion is removed.
The cover portion is formed in a surface shape without a through hole so that the player cannot reach the surface of the cover portion opposite to the storage region side during the game from the second storage region side.
Even when the door frame is in the open state, the gaming medium located in the second storage area is configured so as not to flow out to the outside of the gaming machine without passing through the first storage area.
The cover portion is characterized in that it is blocked by the bulging portion so that it is difficult for the player to see from the front of the gaming machine during the game.
In addition, the means of another invention disclosed separately from the present invention are shown below.
Means 1: In a gaming machine
"The game area where the game is played and
A main effect display means that is arranged in the center of the game area in front view and can display an effect image, and
The front side of the main effect display means is arranged in the game area in front view, and the outer circumference is a circular shape having a diameter larger than that of the main effect display means and a diameter smaller than that of the game area centering on the main effect display means. And a swivel table that is formed so that the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front.
It is arranged between the swivel table and the main effect display means, and the main effect display means is formed so as to be visible from the front. With a unit base that rotatably supports around the axis that extends to
A swivel driving means that is attached to the unit base and rotates the swivel table according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area.
The main effect display means is opposed to each other with the rotation center of the swivel table in between, and is located at an approach position close to the rotation center and located in front of the main effect display means and away from the rotation center. A pair of shutters mounted on the front surface of the swivel table so that each can move independently from the detached position located on the outside,
The pair of shutters are moved between the approaching position and the separating position according to the gaming state, and the opening / closing driving means attached to the swivel table.
It is provided with a three-dimensionally formed decorative body body and shaft portions coaxially projecting outward from the back-facing portion of the decorative body main body, and the shaft portions are adjacent to each other. A plurality of decorative bodies, each of which is rotatably attached to the front surface of each of the pair of shutters, in a state of being arranged in a non-linear manner as described above.
In each of the pair of shutters, a universal shaft joint that connects the adjacent shafts of a plurality of the decorative bodies arranged in a row so as to be rotatable and transmitable.
Rotational drive means, which are attached to each of the pair of shutters and rotate the shaft portion of at least one of the decorations in each of the pair of shutters according to the gaming state.
A protruding position located in front of the main effect display means, approaching the rotation center of the swivel table in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position where the pair of shutters move. Is mounted on the front surface of the swivel table so as to be movable between and a retracted position located outside the main effect display means away from the center of rotation, and the display screen is smaller than the main effect display means. Sub-effect display means that can display images and
The sub-effect display means is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position according to the gaming state, and is provided with a haunting driving means attached to the swivel table. " It is a feature.

Here, as the "game", "a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium is driven to the specific entrance. When the special lottery result in which an advantageous game state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific reception for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game medium, so that the game medium is aimed at the specific reception. "Game to drive", "Game to drive the game medium aiming at the entrance where the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given", "Multiple symbols with multiple symbols after the game medium is put in" After rotating the rotating body, a game in which the rotation of each rotating body is stopped so as to be a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of the game medium is given ", and the like can be mentioned.

In addition, as the "game area" where the game is performed, there are a plurality of entrances where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player and a privilege including the payout of the game medium is given according to the acceptance of the game medium. Each has multiple symbols, and each is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the input of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stop operation. An area in which a plurality of rotating fuselage bodies are arranged to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given according to the above, and the like can be mentioned.

The "main effect display means" and "sub effect display means" include "liquid crystal display (LCD)", "cathode ray tube (cathode ray tube) display device (CRT)", "plasma display", and "laser display". Examples thereof include an "LED display device", an "organic EL display device", and an "electronic paper display device".

Further, as the effect images displayed on the main effect display means and the sub effect display means, "an effect image in which a character according to the concept of the game machine is displayed" and "an item according to the concept of the game machine are displayed". "Direction image", "Direction image displaying a logo according to the concept of the game machine", "Direction image displaying lines according to the concept of the game machine", "Assisting the game (for example," right-handed ", "Aiming at the navel", "Operation timing of the stop button", etc.) "Direction image that suggests the game situation such as the number of holds and the number of rounds", "A sequence of symbols consisting of multiple symbols , A production image that suggests the result of the special lottery that was drawn by accepting the game medium to the start port by combining the symbols that were stopped and displayed after displaying multiple variations. ”,“ One When the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed except for the above satisfies the combination of symbols that causes an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous, the remaining symbols are stopped and displayed. "Image (reach production image)", "production image that encourages the player to participate in the player participation type production", and the like.

Further, the "swivel table" may be one that can rotate only within a predetermined rotation angle range, or one that can rotate many times around. In addition, the "swivel table" includes "a table that has a through-hole that is larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrates back and forth so that the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front through the through-hole" and "transparent". It is made of members, and the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front through a transparent part. " Further, the position of the rotation center in the game area of the swivel table may be a position where the main effect display means is arranged inside the outer circumference of the main effect display means and inside the outer circumference of the disk-shaped swivel table in front view. "The center position of the main effect display means", "the center position of the game area inside the outer circumference of the main effect display means", "arbitrary position inside the outer circumference of the main effect display means", etc. Be done.

The "unit base" includes "a swivel table that is rotatably mounted by mounting a plurality of guide rollers that abut on the outer circumference of the swivel table on the front surface" and "a shaft portion that protrudes rearward from the swivel table". The swivel table is rotatably attached by supporting the shaft portion of the swivel table with bearings. " In addition, as the unit base, "a unit that has an opening that is larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrates back and forth so that the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front through the opening" and "a transparent member. It is formed so that the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front through a transparent part. "

Further, "according to the game state" means "a game to a reception port (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a character winning opening, a V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area). "According to the acceptance of the medium", "According to the game medium circulating in the game area passing through a specific area (for example, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.)", "Reception arranged in the game area" According to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium to the entrance (for example, the starting port) ", the lottery is performed by accepting the game medium to the receiving entrance (for example, the starting port) arranged in the game area. Depending on the type of effect (for example, reach effect, jackpot effect, loss effect, etc.) for suggesting the result of the special lottery, "a plurality of symbols are provided for each with the introduction of the game medium. "According to the rotation of the rotating fuselage", "In response to the combination of the symbols of the stopped rotating fuselage, the plurality of rotating fuselage bodies each provided with a plurality of symbols are rotated and then stopped in sequence. , "According to the amount of the game medium driven into the game area", "Depending on the length of the driving blank of the game medium driven into the game area", and the like.

Further, as the "swivel drive means", "open / close drive means", "rotation drive means", and "appearance drive means", "drive motor", "rotary solenoid", "solenoid", "piston & cylinder", etc. Can be mentioned.

Further, the "shutter" includes "a length formed so that the length in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position straddles the display screen of the main effect display means" and "approaching". The length in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the position and the separation position is formed so that it fits in the display screen of the main effect display means. " Occasionally, the main effect display means can be partially seen from the front side, "the main effect display means cannot be seen from the front side when the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching positions, and the like." Further, the "shutter" may not be decorated on the front surface, or may be decorated on the front surface. Further, the pair of shutters may face each other in the left-right direction, face each other in the vertical direction, or face each other in the oblique direction.

In addition, as "decorative bodies", "items that imitate the concept of the gaming machine", "things that have a logo that conforms to the concept of the gaming machine", and "characters that imitate the concept of the gaming machine" "What was done", etc. Further, the decorative body may or may not have translucency.

Further, examples of the "non-linear shape" include "arc shape", "C shape", "U shape", "V shape", "zigzag shape", and the like. Further, as the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, "the axes of the respective shafts in the plurality of decorative bodies are on the same plane parallel to the plane of the game area" and "plurality of decorations". The axis of each shaft in the body is on the same plane with respect to the surface extending in a direction different from the surface of the game area. "," The axis of each shaft in a plurality of decorative bodies is , Those that are not on the same plane ", etc.

Further, as a "universal shaft joint", "a pair of arm portions protruding from the end portion of the shaft portion and an arm portion of the other shaft portion inserted between the arm portions are inserted between the arm portions. A cross-shaped spider with a protruding transmission part, and a pair of arm parts protruding from the ends of each shaft part, and a cross rotatably attached to each arm part. Examples thereof include a spider having a shape (so-called universal joint), a constant velocity shaft joint, a rubber tube joint, a spring joint, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the game machine is arranged in the game area where the game is performed, the center of the game area in the front view, and the main effect display means capable of displaying the effect image, and the main effect display means. It is arranged in the game area in front view on the front side, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having a larger diameter than the main effect display means and a smaller diameter than the game area centering on the main effect display means, and the main from the front. The swivel table is formed so that the effect display means can be visually recognized, and the swivel table and the main effect display means are arranged so that the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front. A unit base that is rotatably supported around an axis that extends forward and backward with the center of the outer circumference of the circle as the center of rotation, and a swivel table that is attached to the unit base and is played in the game area. The swivel drive means that rotates according to the changing game state and the swivel drive means that face each other with the rotation center of the swivel table in between, and the approach position and the rotation center that are close to the rotation center and located in front of the main effect display means. A pair of shutters mounted on the front of the swivel table and a pair of shutters can be moved independently from the main effect display means and to the detached position located outside the main effect display means, depending on the playing state. The opening / closing driving means attached to the swivel table, the three-dimensionally formed decorative body body, and the back-facing portion of the decorative body body are moved between the approaching position and the separating position. Each of the shafts is provided with shafts that project outward on the same axis from the above, and each shaft is rotatable in a non-linear row so that the shafts are adjacent to each other. A universal shaft joint that rotatably connects the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surface of each of the adjacent shafts of the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in rows in each of the pair of shutters so as to be rotatable. And, which are attached to each of the pair of shutters, a rotation driving means for rotating the shaft portion of at least one decorative body in each of the pair of shutters according to the gaming state, and an approaching position where the pair of shutters move. It is located outside the main effect display means away from the center of rotation and the protruding position located in front of the center of rotation of the swivel table in a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement connecting the separated positions. It is mounted on the front of the swivel table so that it can be moved to and from the retracted position, and the display screen is smaller than the main effect display means. A sub-effect display means capable of displaying an image and a haunting drive means attached to a swivel table by moving the sub-effect display means between a protruding position and a retreating position according to a gaming state. It is intended to be prepared.

As a result, in the front view game area, the pair of shutters attached to the front surface of the swivel table are set to the separated positions, and the sub-effect display means is set to the retracted position. The display screen of the main effect display means arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the unit base and the swivel table between the pair of shutters, and is determined by the main effect display means. The player can be entertained by the production image. In this state, since the sub-effect display means is located adjacent to the main effect display means in the front view, the effect image in which the main effect display means and the sub-effect display means form one screen. By displaying, a large effect image that combines the main effect display means and the sub effect display means can be shown to the player, and the player can be surprised and entertained by the powerful effect image. Further, since the pair of shutters are located on both outer sides of the main effect display means, it is possible to decorate both outer sides of the main effect display means with a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front of each of the pair of shutters. It is possible to improve the appearance in the gaming area and make it a gaming machine that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

In this state, when the pair of shutters is moved from the separation position to the approaching position by the opening / closing drive means according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area, the pair of shutters are the main effect display means, respectively. It is located in front of the display screen of the main effect display means to block the effect image, and a plurality of decorative objects move to the center side of the front view game area to change the position, so that the player's interest is paired. It can be strongly attracted to the shutter and multiple decorations attached to each shutter, making the player think that there is something good and raising expectations for the game. can. Further, even if the pair of shutters is moved to the approaching position, the display screen of the sub-effect display means adjacent to the main effect display means is not blocked by the pair of shutters, so that the sub-effect display is displayed to the player. It is possible to show the effect image of the means, and to entertain the effect image by the sub effect display means.

Further, according to the game state, when the shaft portion of one of the plurality of decorative bodies rotatably attached to the front surface of each shutter is rotated by the rotation driving means via the shaft portion, The main body of the decorative body having the protruding shaft portion rotates about the axis of the shaft portion, and at the same time, the decorative body whose shaft portion is rotated by the rotation driving means is adjacent to the decorative body adjacent to the decorative body. Since the shafts are connected by a universal shaft joint so that the shafts can rotate, the rotation of the shafts can be transmitted even if the shafts extend in different directions, and the adjacent decorative bodies can also be transmitted. It will rotate. From this, similarly, other decorative bodies whose shafts are connected to each other by the universal shaft joint also rotate in sequence, so that it is possible to rotate a plurality of decorative bodies having different shaft core extending directions at the same time. can. Therefore, when a plurality of ornaments having different axes extending in different directions are rotated at the same time, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the plurality of ornaments are moving differently. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position by the haunting drive means according to the game state, the sub-effect display means is located in front of the display screen of the main effect display means and the main effect display means Since the effect image is blocked, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect image of the sub effect display means, and the effect image of the sub effect display means can be enjoyed. Further, when the effect image that constitutes one screen by the main effect display means and the sub effect display means is displayed, if the sub effect display means is moved from the backward position to the protruding position, the display screen becomes smaller. The effect can be shown to the player, and when the sub-effect display means is moved from the protruding position to the backward position, the player can see the effect that the display screen becomes large.

Further, according to the game state, when the swivel table rotatably supported around the axis extending back and forth on the front side of the unit base is rotated by the swivel drive means, a pair of shutters attached to the swivel table. And the sub-effect display means and the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front of each of the pair of shutters are around the axis extending back and forth around the center of the swivel table, that is, near the center of the main effect display means. The whole is swiveled, and a pair of shutters, a sub-effect display means, and a plurality of decorative objects can be swirled around the main effect display means. Therefore, it is possible to change the position in which a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row in the game area in various ways, such as on the left side or right side, on the upper side or lower side, or on the diagonally upper side or diagonally lower side. The decoration (appearance) in the game area can be changed, and the machine can be a game machine that can strongly attract the attention of the player. Further, by rotating the swivel table, the moving direction of the pair of shutters that move between the approaching position and the separating position can be freely changed to the left-right direction, the up-down direction, the diagonal direction, or the like. Therefore, the main effect display means can be opened and closed from various directions by the pair of shutters, and the player can be less likely to get bored. Further, by rotating the swivel table, the position where the sub-effect display means is arranged with respect to the main effect display means can be moved to the left or right side of the main effect display means, above or below, or diagonally above or diagonally below. It can be changed in various ways, such as on the side.

In this way, the rotation driving means rotates the plurality of decorative bodies, the opening / closing driving means opens and closes the pair of shutters together with the plurality of decorative bodies, the haunting driving means moves the sub-effect display means, and the rotation is performed. Since a plurality of decorative objects can be rotated together with the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters by the driving means, these movements are appropriately combined with the effect images displayed on the main effect display means and the sub-effect display means. By doing so, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, by sequentially performing these movements and effect images, the player can be shown a multi-stage effect. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

The production by these will be described in detail. For example, when the movement direction of the pair of shutters (the direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position) is set to the horizontal direction by rotating the swivel table, the player is shown an effect of opening and closing the main effect display means from the left and right directions. be able to. Further, in this state, the sub-effect display means that moves between the retracted position and the protruding position moves up and down, such as between the upper side and the front side of the main effect display means, or between the lower side and the front side. When an effect that moves in a direction can be shown and an effect image that constitutes one screen by the main effect display means and the sub effect display means is displayed, the sub effect display means is used to display the main effect display means. It is possible to show the player an effect that the image spreads upward or downward.

Further, in a state where the swivel table is rotated so that the moving direction of the pair of shutters is the vertical direction, the player can be shown the effect of opening and closing the main effect display means from the vertical direction. Further, in this state, the sub-effect display means can show an effect of moving in the left-right direction, such as between the left side and the front side of the main effect display means, or between the right side and the front side. When the main effect display means and the sub effect display means display an effect image that constitutes one screen, the player creates an effect in which the main effect display means expands to the left or right side by the sub effect display means. Can be shown to.

Further, in a state where the swivel table is rotated so that the moving direction of the pair of shutters extends to the upper left or the upper right, the player can be shown the effect of opening and closing the main effect display means from an oblique direction. Further, in this state, the sub-effect display means may show an effect of moving in an oblique direction, such as between the diagonally upper side and the front side of the main effect display means, or between the diagonally lower side and the front side. In addition, when the main effect display means and the sub effect display means display an effect image that constitutes one screen, the sub effect display means expands the main effect display means diagonally upward or diagonally downward. It is possible to show the player such a production.

In this way, depending on the rotation position of the swivel table, the main effect display means can be opened and closed from various directions by a pair of shutters, and the sub effect display means can be arranged in various directions with respect to the main effect display means. Therefore, the player can determine at which rotation angle (swivel angle) the rotation of the swivel table is stopped by turning the pair of shutters at the separation position and the sub-effect display means at the retreat position by the swivel table. In addition to being able to excite, the player is also thrilled by whether or not the pair of shutters move to the approaching position after the swivel table has stopped rotating, or whether or not the sub-effect display means moves to the protruding position. be able to.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is rotated around the main effect display means by the swivel table while the sub-effect display means is kept in the retracted position, the sub-effect is displayed around the effect image (for example, a certain character) displayed on the main effect display means. It is possible to show the player the effect that the effect image (for example, another character) displayed on the display means is rotating, and the effect that has not been seen in the conventional gaming machines has a strong impact on the player. Can be given. In addition, when the sub-effect display means is swiveled in the retracted position by the swivel table, when the sub-effect display means and the sub-effect display means are used to display an effect image that constitutes one screen, the sub effect display means is displayed. By turning the effect display means, the outer shape of the display screen by the main effect display means and the sub effect display means changes, so that the player can be made to wonder and pay attention to the effect image. It is possible to further enjoy the effect using the effect display means and the sub effect display means.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position while being swiveled by the swivel table, it is possible to show the player the effect that the sub-effect display means moves in an arc shape toward the center side. Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position while reciprocating within a range of a predetermined turning angle by the swivel table, the sub-effect display means moves in a zigzag shape toward the center side. It can be shown to the player. When moving the sub-effect display means to the protruding position, it can be turned to an arbitrary position with respect to the turning direction and then moved toward the protruding position. Therefore, the pattern of the movement (effect) of the sub-effect display means moving from the retracted position to the protruding position can be diversified, and the player can be less likely to get bored. Then, when the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the sub-effect display means approaches the rotation center of the swivel table and thus moves to the front side of the main effect display means. The effect image displayed on the main effect display means can be blocked by the means, and the player's interest can be attracted to the effect image displayed on the sub effect display means to entertain the effect image. Further, since the sub-effect display means can be moved from the protruding position to the retracted position by moving in the opposite direction to the above, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of effects.

Further, since each pair of shutters can be moved separately between the approaching position and the separating position, by moving only one of them, only one side of the main effect display means in the left-right direction can be moved in the vertical direction. Show the player the effect of hiding only one side or only one side in the diagonal direction so that the whole can be seen, or move one shutter to the approaching position and then move the other shutter to the approaching position. It is possible to show the player an effect that obscures the main effect display means. Therefore, with the rotation of the swivel table stopped, the player can be excited by whether only one of the pair of shutters moves or both of them move, and after one shutter moves, the other shutter moves. The player can be excited depending on whether or not he / she moves.

Further, for example, when the pair of shutters is moved from the detached position to the approaching position while rotating the swivel table in a predetermined direction, the pair of shutters move spirally (arc-shaped) toward the center of rotation to display the main effect. Since the means are hidden, it is possible to show the player an effect such as an iris diaphragm, and it is possible to enjoy the opening and closing operation of the main effect display means by the pair of shutters. On the other hand, if the pair of shutters is moved from the detached position to the approaching position while reciprocating the swivel table within a predetermined angle range, the pair of shutters will move in a zigzag manner toward the rotation center of the swivel table. You can show the player a lightning-like effect. As mentioned above, since each pair of shutters can be moved separately, it is exciting for the player to decide whether only one shutter moves or both shutters move when the swivel table is rotating. In addition to being able to do this, if the swivel table is further rotated after one shutter has moved, the player can be excited depending on whether or not the other shutter moves.

Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters swiveled by the swivel table, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the decorations that can be seen from the front of the plurality of decorative bodies. Can be changed (changed), the appearance in the game area can be greatly changed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and it is difficult to get bored, and the appearance in the game area can be changed. It is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player, and to make it easier for the player who is selecting the game machine to be played to select the main game machine. Further, since the plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters, the effect of the shutter movement as described above is the overall effect of the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surface of the shutters. It can be said that it is an effect, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the effect of the movement of the shutter described above.

Therefore, whether or not the sub-effect display means moves, whether or not the swivel table rotates, whether or not a pair of shutters move, and whether or not a plurality of decorative objects rotate, and so on. Since branch points of various effects can be provided in the flow of a series of effects, the player can be thrilled and thrilled at each branch point, and the player can be made less bored and the game can be played. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player's game and suppress the decline in the player's interest.

Further, when performing the above-mentioned effect, the effect image according to the rotation of the swivel table, the movement of the sub-effect display means, the movement of the pair of shutters, and the rotation of a plurality of decorative objects is used as the main effect display means. It may be displayed in the sub-effect display means. For example, an effect image in which a plurality of decorative objects are rotated around the main effect display means by a predetermined character, and a sub effect display means is moved between a protruding position and a backward position by a predetermined character. A production image, a production image in which a plurality of decorations are moved between an approaching position and a separation position by a predetermined character, or a predetermined character is moved by rotation or movement of a plurality of decorations. By displaying such an effect image, etc. on the main effect display means, etc., it is possible to show the player a collaborative effect between the movable effect and the effect image, further entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. be able to.

In this way, the movement of the pair of shutters by the opening / closing driving means, the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the respective shutters by the rotation driving means, the movement of the sub-effect display means by the haunting driving means, and the turning driving means. By appropriately combining the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters and the rotation of a plurality of decorative bodies, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, and it is possible to make the player less bored and the player. It is possible to make the player more entertaining, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the moving direction of the sub-effect display means that moves between the protruding position and the retracting position is a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the pair of shutters, the pair of shutters are arranged on the front surface of the swivel table. The sub-effect display means can be arranged at a position where the sub-effect display means is not provided, and a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned effects can be realized. In addition, the moving direction of the sub-effect display means and the moving direction of the pair of shutters are orthogonal to each other, and the movement of the sub-effect display means and the movement of the shutter are made different, so that a wider variety of effects can be obtained. It can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated by the rotary drive means, it is not necessary to provide each decorative body with a rotary drive means, and the space required for the rotary drive means can be narrowed as much as possible. The space required for a plurality of decorative bodies can be made relatively large. Therefore, for example, since the space of the decorative body can be relatively widened, the rotation range of the decorative body can be increased to make the movement more enjoyable, or the decorative body can be made larger and more conspicuous. Since it is possible to increase the impact when rotating by increasing the number of decorative objects, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movement and decoration of multiple decorative objects, and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, depending on the game state, the pair of shutters may be moved by the opening / closing driving means, a plurality of decorative objects may be rotated by the rotation driving means, the sub-effect display means may be moved by the haunting driving means, or the rotation driving means may be used. Since the pair of shutters and the sub-effect display means are rotated together with the plurality of decorations, the sub-effect display means moves and the shutter opens and closes (the plurality of decorations move as a whole). By rotating the shutter and the sub-effect display means together with the multiple decorations, the player's interest is strongly focused on the shutter, the multiple decorations, and the sub-effect display means. It can be attracted and can be enjoyed by the movement of the shutter and the sub-effect display means, the rotation of the plurality of decorative objects, and the rotation of the shutter and the plurality of decorative objects and the sub-effect display means. It is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, for example, the gaming machine is provided with an entrance (so-called starting port) in which a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the gaming medium like a pachinko machine. If a predetermined effect is to be executed in order to suggest the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium to the entrance to the player, the shutter or the sub-effect display means is moved at the time of the predetermined effect. , Rotation of a plurality of decorative bodies, rotation of a shutter, a plurality of decorative bodies, and a sub-effect display means, etc., to the player, a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, " It is possible to make the player think that the "big hit") has been drawn, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in interest. In addition, a swivel table, a sub-effect display means, and a pair that can be suitably used for a gaming machine that performs an effect suggesting a special lottery result, such as a pachinko machine, because it exerts the above-mentioned effects. A production unit having a shutter and a plurality of decorative objects can be provided.

It is desirable that the sub-effect display means be able to move from the retracted position to the protruding position when the pair of shutters are in the separated positions. As a result, the sub-effect display means can be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position only when the pair of shutters are separated from each other. Therefore, the positions of the pair of shutters and the sub-effect display means in the front-rear direction are set to the same position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a widening of the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters (plurality of decorative objects), and a gaming machine equipped with the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters is realized. It can be facilitated, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of decorative objects from becoming relatively small. By making the decorative objects as large as possible, the decorative objects can be made to stand out, and the decorative effect of the plurality of decorative objects can be enhanced. It can be fully exerted.

Further, when the sub-effect display means can be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position when the pair of shutters are in the separated positions, at least one of the pair of shutters is moved from the separated position to the approaching position side. , Since the sub-effect display means cannot be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position side, when the sub-effect display means is located above the main effect display means (above the rotation center of the swivel table) by the swivel table. By moving the shutter to the approaching position side, even if a force to move the sub-effect display means downward due to the load of the sub-effect display means acts, the sub-effect is produced by the shutter moving to the approaching position side. It is possible to prevent the display means from moving downward. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display means from moving downward without permission, it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display means from moving unnaturally and giving the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to surely enjoy the production by the sub-effect display means and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the shutter moving to the approaching position side can prevent the sub-effect display means from moving downward, it is not necessary to keep driving the haunting drive means so that the sub-effect display means does not move arbitrarily. It is possible to prevent the haunting driving means from being damaged due to an overload and prevent the game from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the sub-effect display means can be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position when the pair of shutters are in the separated positions, the pair of the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position side. Since the shutters of the above cannot be moved from the separated position to the approaching position side, the sub-effect display means is moved to the protruding position side when the moving direction of the pair of shutters is set to the vertical direction (including the diagonal direction) by the swivel table. Therefore, in the shutter located on the upper end side in the moving direction, even if a force for moving the shutter downward is applied due to the load of the shutter, the sub-effect display means moving to the protruding position side is used. It is possible to prevent the shutter from moving downward. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the shutter from moving downward without permission, it is possible to prevent the shutter from moving unnaturally and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and the effect of the shutter or the like is ensured. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the sub-effect display means moving to the protruding position side can prevent the pair of shutters from moving downward, it is necessary to keep driving the opening / closing driving means so that the pair of shutters do not move arbitrarily. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing driving means from being damaged due to an overload and prevent the game from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, a swivel regulating means for regulating the rotation of the swivel table may be provided. As a result, while the rotation of the swivel table by the swivel drive means is stopped, the shutter can be moved by the open / close drive means, a plurality of decorative objects can be rotated by the rotation drive means, and the sub-effect display means can be moved. At that time, even if the swivel table is to be rotated in the rotation direction due to a change in the position of the center of gravity or the occurrence of vibration, the swivel table can be regulated by the swivel regulating means, so that the swivel table rattles. It is possible to prevent the whole of the plurality of decorations, the pair of shutters, and the sub-effect display means from unstable movements, and the whole of the plurality of decorations can be rotated in a stable state, or the shutters and subs can be rotated. The effect display means can be moved in a stable state, and the rotation of a plurality of decorative objects and the movement of the shutter and the sub effect display means can be made less likely to give a sense of discomfort, which entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, in this case, since the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated by the swivel regulating means, the rotation moment for rotating the swivel table by the load of the shutter, a plurality of decorative bodies, the rotation driving means, the sub-effect display means, and the like. Is received by the rotation regulating means, so that when the rotation of the rotation table is stopped, a force that cancels the rotation moment due to the load of the shutter, a plurality of decorative objects, the rotation driving means, the sub-effect display means, etc. is applied. It is not necessary to act on the swivel table from the swivel drive means, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the swivel drive means, and it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to an overload.

Further, when the swivel regulating means for regulating the rotation of the swivel table is provided, it is desirable that the swivel regulating means regulates the rotation of the swivel table when the sub-effect display means is in the retracted position. As a result, when the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position, the rotation of the sub-effect display means is restricted by the turning regulating means. When the display means is performed with the swivel table rotated and stopped at any position on either side of the main effect display means in the left-right direction, the swivel table is rotated by moving the sub-effect display means to the retracted position. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed, and it is possible to surely entertain the production and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Further, in this case, when the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position, the rotation of the swivel table is restricted by the swivel regulating means. Therefore, in order to rotate the swivel table, the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position. It is necessary to move it to the protruding position side to some extent. Therefore, when the sub-effect display means at the retreating position is turned by the swivel table, the sub-effect display means moves in the direction of the turning center (protruding position) and then turns. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the sub-effect display means and make it difficult to overlook the rotation of the sub-effect display means by the swivel table, and the effect by the sub-effect display means is surely enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the swivel control means for regulating the rotation of the swivel table is provided, when the sub-effect display means is in the retracted position, a part of the swivel table is projected outward from the outer circumference of the swivel table, and then the swivel is regulated. The means is rotated forward from the unit base at a portion outside the outer circumference of the swivel table in the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and is swiveled by contacting the sub-effect display means at the retracted position. The rotation of the table may be regulated. As a result, for example, when the two turning restricting means are separated from each other in the circumferential direction of the turning table by substantially the same width as the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is inserted between the two turning regulating means. When is moved to the retracted position, the portion of the sub-effect display means that protrudes outward from the swivel table is sandwiched between the two swivel control means, and the swivel table can be restricted (locked) so that it cannot rotate. can. Further, when the distance between the turning tables of the two turning regulating means in the circumferential direction is wider than the width of the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is moved back so as to be inserted between the two turning regulating means. When moved to, a gap of a predetermined size is provided between the sub-effect display means and the two turning control means, so that the swivel table can be rotated by the gap, and the sub-effect display means can be rotated. Or a pair of shutters (plurality of ornaments) can be regulated so that they can be swiveled only within a predetermined swivel angle. In this way, the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated by the swivel regulating means, and a gaming machine that exerts the above-described effects can be reliably realized. Further, in this case, when the distance between the turning tables of the two turning regulating means in the circumferential direction is narrower than the width of the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is set at the turning position between the two turning regulating means. When the sub-effect display means is moved in the direction of the backward position, the sub-effect display means abuts on the turning restricting means to restrict the movement to the backward position, and the sub-effect display means does not invade between the two turning regulating means. Even if another member is attached to the portion between the two turning regulating means, the other member can be attached to the portion because it does not come into contact with the sub-effect display means. Therefore, as other members, a member (mechanism) such as a swivel drive means for rotating the swivel table and a swivel pinion gear is attached to the relevant part to surely embody or decorate a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect. You can attach your body to improve the appearance in the game area.

Further, when a swivel regulating means for regulating the rotation of the swivel table is provided, it is desirable that the rotation of the swivel table is regulated when the swivel table is in a specific swivel position. As a result, when the swivel table is in the specific swivel position, the rotation is regulated by the swivel regulating means. The turning can be regulated, and the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. Further, in this case, when the swivel table is in the specific swivel position, the rotation is regulated by the swivel regulating means. That is, a turning position (effect) in which the sub-effect display means is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position, the pair of shutters is moved between the approaching position and the separating position, and a plurality of decorative objects are rotated. Since the execution position) is limited to a specific turning position, it is possible to suppress an increase in the effect pattern as compared with the case where the effect can be executed at any turn position, and the effect pattern can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of having too much, and it is possible to entertain the player with an appropriate number of production patterns, and it is possible to reduce the load on the production control. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the load, and to surely enjoy the above-mentioned effect.

Further, after providing a spur gear-shaped slide gear that is rotated around an axis extending back and forth by the haunting drive means, the sub-effect display means meshes with the slide gear to connect the protruding position and the retracted position. However, it may have a haunting rack gear extending in the haunting direction. As a result, the slide gear for moving the sub-effect display means between the protruding position and the retracted position is rotated around the axis extending forward and backward, so that the mechanism for moving the sub-effect display means is moved. The depth in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible, and it is possible to easily prepare for a gaming machine having a limited depth. Further, by rotating the slide gear by the haunting drive means, the sub-effect display means can be moved between the protruding position and the retracting position via the haunting rack gear, and the gaming machine having the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably performed. Can be embodied.

Further, it is desirable that the swivel table and the unit base have through holes and openings that are larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrate the front and back. As a result, the display screen of the main effect display means arranged on the rear side of the unit base can be viewed from the front (player side) through the opening of the unit base and the through hole of the swivel table. Compared with the case where the swivel table is composed of transparent members so that the main effect display means can be visually recognized through the transparent part, the effect image displayed on the main effect display means can be visually recognized in a clear state. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image of the main effect display means and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, it is desirable to provide an opening / closing regulating means for restricting the movement of the pair of shutters. As a result, by restricting the movement of the shutter by the opening / closing regulating means, the shutter moves without permission even if the swivel table is rotated, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated, or the sub-effect display means is moved. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort to the movements of the shutter and the plurality of decorative objects, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, in this case, even if the swivel table is rotated, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated, or the swivel table is stopped to rotate so that the movement direction of the pair of shutters is in the vertical direction, the shutter is shuttered by the opening / closing restricting means. By restricting the movement of the shutter, it is not necessary to keep applying force to the shutter by the opening / closing driving means so that the shutter does not move arbitrarily, and it is possible to prevent the opening / closing driving means from being loaded, due to overload. It is possible to avoid interruption of the game.

In addition, the unit is placed on the front surface of the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward. A plurality of guide rollers that rotatably attach the swivel table to the base, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth at a position outside the front view swivel table in the unit base, and rotated by the swivel drive means. A spur gear-shaped swivel pinion gear to be made to be formed may be provided, and the swivel table may have a swivel gear formed along the outer peripheral edge and meshing with the swivel pinion gear. As a result, the swivel table can be rotatably mounted around the axis extending back and forth by the plurality of guide rollers mounted on the unit base, and when the swivel pinion gear is rotated by the swivel drive means, the swivel table is swiveled. Since the swivel table can be rotated around the axis extending back and forth by the swivel gear meshing with the pinion gear, it is possible to surely embody a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects. Further, in this case, since the plurality of guide rollers are brought into contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table and the swivel table is rotatably attached around the axis extending back and forth, the swivel table is rotated among the plurality of guide rollers. Since the load applied to the swivel table can be supported by a plurality of guide rollers arranged below the center, a sub-effect display means, a pair of shutters, a plurality of decorative objects, etc. are attached to the swivel table. Even if the weight increases, the load applied to the swivel table can be distributed and supported, so that the load acting on each guide roller can be reduced, the guide roller can be made less likely to be damaged, and the swivel table can be prevented from being damaged. Can be smoothly rotated, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. Further, in this case, the swivel table is rotatably attached by a plurality of guide rollers that are in contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table, and it is not necessary to provide a rotary shaft at the center of rotation of the swivel table. Since there is nothing to interfere with the main effect display means arranged in, the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front in good condition, and the effect image of the main effect display means can be enjoyed and the swivel table. It is possible to reliably embody a gaming machine provided with a main effect display means on the rear side, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, when the swivel table is rotatably attached by a plurality of guide rollers attached to the unit base, the swivel regulating means for restricting the rotation of the swivel table is a portion outside the outer circumference of the swivel table in the unit base. In the above, a plurality of columnar guide pins extending forward from the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table and rotatably supporting a part of the plurality of guide rollers are formed. Is desirable. As a result, a part of the plurality of guide rollers can be rotatably supported by the plurality of guide pins, and the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated, so that the configuration of the gaming machine can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, it is desirable to arrange the plurality of decorative bodies on the same surface parallel to the front surface of the shutter in each shutter so that the axis of each shaft portion is arranged. As a result, a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row along the front surface of the shutter, so that the depth required for arranging the plurality of decorative bodies in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the depth is surely on the front side of the shutter. In addition to being able to arrange a plurality of decorative objects in a pachinko machine, a plurality of decorative objects, a shutter, a swivel table, and a main effect display means can be easily arranged in the front-rear direction in a gaming machine having a limited depth. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that exerts an action effect. Further, in this case, since the depth applied to the plurality of decorative bodies can be reduced, the decorative body can be made relatively large, or other members (for example, a game panel, a center role) before and after the plurality of decorative bodies and the shutter can be used. A gaming machine that can place objects, etc.) and multiple decorative objects in a narrow space (for example, between the game panel and the main effect display means), which strongly attracts the attention of the player. Can be.

Further, the main effect display means is a horizontally long quadrangle whose outer shape is viewed from the front, and the length of the pair of shutters in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position is set as the main effect display means. It may be formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of. As a result, the size (length) of the shutter straddles the display screen of the main effect display means, so that when the shutter is moved to the front side of the main effect display means, the part covered by the shutter becomes wider, and the shutter It is possible to increase the impact on the player when the main effect display means is moved to the front side, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, in this case, since the length of the shutter is set to be the length straddling the main effect display means, for example, when both ends in the longitudinal direction of the shutter are supported so as to be movable between the approaching position and the separating position. , A guide member (for example, a slide shaft, a slide guide, a slide rail, etc.) that supports the movement is arranged outside the main effect display means in the front view, and the guide member makes it difficult for the effect image to be obstructed. It is possible to entertain the production image to the player in a good condition.

Further, a decorative cover covering the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the front surface side of the rotary drive means may be attached to the front surface of the shutter. As a result, the decorative cover can hide the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the rotary drive means from the player side, and the shaft portion, the universal shaft joint, and the rotary drive means of the decorative body can be seen for the game. It is possible to reduce the unsightly appearance in the area. Further, in this case, since the decorative cover is provided to hide the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the rotation driving means, the decorative cover can decorate the inside of the game area and the front surface of the shutter to improve the appearance. It can entertain the player.

In addition, a decorative substrate having a light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies after making the decorative body transparent is provided for each of the pair of shutters. It may be attached. As a result, when the light emitting means provided on the decorative substrate is made to emit light, a plurality of decorative bodies can be made to emit light and be decorated, the appearance of the decorative bodies can be improved, and the decorative bodies can be made to stand out by the player. It can attract a strong interest and raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that there is something. Further, in this case, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light in a state where the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the orientation of the decorative body main body formed three-dimensionally by the rotation changes. The refraction, the direction of reflection, the amount of transmission, etc. of the light radiated from the light emitting means to the decoration in front are changed one after another, and the decoration can be made to appear to be blinking, which entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the decorative body is provided with the decorative substrate after making the decorative body transparent, the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light while the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching position by the opening / closing driving means. Since it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration having a brightness clearly different from that of the effect image of the main effect display means or the sub effect display means, the player's attention can be directed to the center of the game area. In addition, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light while the shutter is moved to the approaching position and the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated, the plurality of decorative bodies blink in front of the main effect display means. Since the production can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, when the decorative body is provided with the decorative substrate after making the decorative body transparent, the swivel table is rotated by the swivel driving means and the entire plurality of decorative bodies are swiveled through the shutter. Then, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light, the arc-shaped light locus centered on the center of the swivel table can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. Further, in this case, when a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means while rotating the swivel table, the arc-shaped light locus by the light emitting means of the decorative substrate blinks brilliantly to produce a comet-like movable light emitting effect. Since it can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, a plurality of decorative bodies may be arranged in an arc shape so as to be centered on the center side of the swivel table in the front view. As a result, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, when the pair of shutters are moved to the separated positions, the plurality of decorative bodies are along the outer periphery of the gaming area. It is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming machine by decorating the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gaming area. Further, in this case, since a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching position. The diameter of the virtual ring formed by a plurality of ornaments arranged in an arc shape can be reduced or increased by moving the ring to a detached position. Therefore, when the pair of shutters is moved from the separated position to the approached position, the virtual annulus formed by the plurality of ornaments becomes smaller, so that the player's attention is directed to the center of the swivel table (the center of the game area). Can be done. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters is moved from the approaching position to the separating position, the virtual annulus formed by the plurality of decorative bodies becomes large, so that the player's attention can be directed to the outer peripheral side of the gaming area.

Further, when a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, as described above, a virtual ring can be formed by the plurality of decorative bodies. , Decorate the effect image of the main effect display device by decorating the ring with multiple ornaments, or move the sub effect display means to the protruding position to place the sub effect display means in the decoration of the ring with multiple ornaments. By locating it, it is possible to decorate the effect image of the sub-effect display means, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by making it difficult for the player to get bored with various effects. Further, in this case, since a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, when the swivel table is rotated by the swivel driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row. Since it moves in the direction in which it is installed, it is possible to show the player a movable effect as if multiple ornaments are running side by side on the circumference, entertaining the player and reducing the interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, when a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, for example, the ends of the plurality of decorative bodies facing the center side of the swivel table move forward. By rotating each of them in such a way, it is possible to show the player the effect of flowing forward from the center of the swivel table, and it is possible to make the player feel as if a headwind is blowing. Alternatively, when the ends of the swivel table facing the center side of the plurality of ornaments are rotated so as to move backward, the player is shown an effect of flowing from the center of the center of the swivel table to the rear. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is sucked into the swivel table (game area). At this time, by displaying the effect images corresponding to the rotation directions of the plurality of decorative bodies on the main effect display means, the player can be shown an effect radiated forward from the main effect display means, or the main effect can be displayed. It is possible to show an effect that is sucked into the display means.

In addition, the universal shaft joints are projected from the ends of the respective shafts with the same gap in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center in each of the connecting shafts, and the width in the circumferential direction is the gap. Surrounded by four arm portions with the arm portions of the other shaft portion inserted into the gaps between the pair of arm portions formed narrower than the one and the pair of arm portions on one shaft portion. It may be composed of a spider having four transmission portions protruding in a rod shape from the inside of the arm portions to each of the arm portions. As a result, when one shaft portion is rotated, the transmission portion of the spider abuts on the side surface of the arm portion, and the transmission portion abuts on the side surface of the arm portion on the other shaft portion, so that the transmission portion abuts from one shaft portion. The rotation can be transmitted to the other shaft portion. Further, even when one shaft portion and the other shaft portion extend in different directions, rotation can be transmitted between the shaft portions via the transmission portion of the spider as described above. .. At this time, the plurality of transmissions of the spider keep the surface passing through the center of the plurality of transmissions of the spider aligned with the plane including the bisector of the angle of the central axis of the two axes. However, it slides relatively between the arm portions in the extending direction of the arm portions. In this way, since the two shaft portions can be connected so that the rotation is transmitted to each other, the universal shaft joint can be embodied, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, when the universal shaft joint is composed of a pair of arm portions protruding from the respective shaft portions connected to each other and a cross-shaped spider inserted between the respective arm portions, the spider is formed. Since the rotation is transmitted via the rubber or the spring, the time lag of the rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber or the spring can be eliminated as compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by using the rubber or the spring. , Multiple ornaments can be rotated at the same time. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated at the same time, and the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated with a delay in order, which makes the player feel unnatural. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of a plurality of decorative bodies having a sense of unity and suppress the decline in interest. Further, in this case, simply by sandwiching the transmission portion of the spider between the side surface of the arm portion of one shaft portion and the side surface of the arm portion of the other shaft portion, the rotation can be transmitted between the two shaft portions. Since it is possible to assemble a universal joint, the number of parts can be reduced and the labor required for assembly can be facilitated compared to the case where a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft joint is used as the universal joint. , It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Further, a rotation drive mechanism may be further provided for rotating the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row by transmitting the drive from the rotation drive means to the shaft portion of at least every other decorative body. .. As a result, in the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, the drive from the rotational driving means is transmitted to the shafts of the decorative bodies located at least every other one from the end via the rotation driving mechanism. Since it is rotated, it is possible to reduce the accumulation of rattling and twisting in the rotation direction in the universal shaft joint in a plurality of decorative bodies sequentially connected by the universal shaft joint. Therefore, since the time lag of rotation of the decorative body rotated via the universal shaft joint can be reduced as much as possible, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated at substantially the same time. It is possible to rotate it, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the movement (rotation) of a plurality of decorative bodies and to fully exert the effect of the multiple decorative bodies. can do. Further, in this case, the drive from the rotation drive means is made to rotate the shaft portions of the plurality of decorative bodies via the rotation drive mechanism. That is, since the shaft portions of the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by one rotation driving means and it is not necessary to provide the plurality of rotation driving means, a space corresponding to the rotation can be secured. It is possible to increase the space of the decoration, increase the rotation range of the decoration to make the movement more enjoyable, make the decoration larger and make it stand out, and increase the number of decorations. It is possible to increase the impact when it is rotated, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movement and decoration of multiple decorative bodies, to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, when the above-mentioned rotary drive mechanism is provided, it is desirable to connect the shaft portion rotated by the rotary drive mechanism and the adjacent shaft portion by a universal shaft joint. As a result, since the shaft portion rotated by the rotation drive mechanism and the adjacent shaft portion are connected by a universal shaft joint, the shaft portions that cannot be rotated by the rotation drive mechanism are adjacent to each other. Since the part is not connected by the universal shaft joint, the rotation is transmitted from both sides to the decorative body sandwiched between the two decorative bodies whose shaft is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the decorative body from being jerky. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the respective decorative bodies can be rotated at substantially the same time without discomfort, so that the effect of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies can be sufficiently exerted. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the above-mentioned rotary drive mechanism is provided, the rotary drive mechanism is meshed with the rotary gear in the shape of a bevel gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body from the rear side and extends back and forth. A transmission gear member having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion rotatably attached to the base around a shaft, and a transmission mechanism attached to the base by rotating the transmission gear member by driving a drive means. , Is desirable. As a result, a rotary drive mechanism that rotates the shaft portion of the decorative body by driving from the rotary drive means is provided with a rotary gear attached to the shaft portion and a transmission gear member having a transmission gear portion that meshes with the rotary gear from the rear side. Since the transmission gear member is configured to include a transmission mechanism that is rotated by driving from a drive means, the rotation drive mechanism can be embodied, and a game machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be provided. can. Further, in this case, a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear is attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body extending parallel to the surface of the shutter, and the bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion is meshed from the rear side of the rotary gear to form a transmission gear member. Since it is possible to rotate around an axis extending back and forth, and the drive from the rotation drive means is transmitted to this transmission gear member via a transmission mechanism to rotate the rotation, the transmission mechanism is used to transmit the rotation. Since the gear or pulley can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth, the depth (thickness) in the front-back direction of the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, in a gaming machine having a limited depth, it is possible to easily arrange a plurality of decorative objects on the front side of the main effect display means, the unit base, the swivel table, and the shutter, and the gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. It can be easily embodied. Further, in this case, as described above, since the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the transmission mechanism can be reduced as much as possible, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of decorative bodies can be relatively increased. It can make multiple ornaments stand out. Alternatively, a plurality of decorative bodies can be arranged even at a position having a narrow depth, and the degree of freedom in arrangement (degree of freedom of movement) of the plurality of decorative bodies (shutters) can be increased.

Further, in the above-described rotary drive mechanism, the transmission gear member is further provided with a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion at the rear end, and then the transmission mechanism is meshed with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member. It may have a rod-shaped drive rack that is provided with an actuating rack gear and is slidably attached to the shutter along the surface of the shutter and is slidable by a rotary drive means. As a result, when the rod-shaped drive rack is slid along the surface of the shutter by the rotary drive means, the transmission gear member can be rotated via the driven gear portion that meshes with the operating rack gear of the drive rack. The decorative body can be rotated together with the shaft portion via the rotating gear that meshes with the transmission gear portion of the transmission gear member, and a gaming machine that exerts the above-described effects can be reliably embodied. Further, in this case, since the drive of the rotary drive means is transmitted to the transmission gear member side by the rod-shaped drive rack, the rotary drive means can be transferred from a plurality of decorative bodies by appropriately selecting the length of the drive rack. It can be placed as far away as possible in an inconspicuous position, and a plurality of decorative objects can be relatively conspicuous.

Further, a rotating member that is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at a predetermined position of the swivel table and rotates to move a pair of shutters between an approaching position and a separating position, and a rotating member. An action pulley that rotates integrally, a drive pulley that is rotated by an opening / closing drive means, and an endless annular belt that is wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley may be provided. As a result, when the drive pulley is rotated by the opening / closing drive means for moving each shutter, the action pulley is rotated by the belt wound around the drive pulley, and the rotating action member is moved together with the action pulley. The shutter will rotate, and the shutter corresponding to the rotation of the rotating member will move between the approaching position and the separating position. In this way, the drive from the opening / closing drive means is transmitted to the rotating action member via the belt wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley to move the shutter, so that the shutter is opened / closed at a position away from the shutter. Since the shutter can be moved even if the driving means is arranged, it is not necessary to arrange the opening / closing driving means in the vicinity of the shutter, and it is possible to easily secure a space around the shutter. Therefore, the space secured around the shutter makes it possible to relatively lengthen the moving distance of the shutter, making it easier to open and close the front side of the effect display means, and also to fill the space. It is possible to make the decorative body relatively large and conspicuous, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative body, and it is possible to entertain the directing operation by the decorative body and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, when the drive from the opening / closing driving means is transmitted to the rotating working member via the belt to move the shutter as described above, the belt is used to transmit the rotation from the opening / closing driving means to the rotating working member. Because the belt is flexible, the diameter of the drive pulley and the working pulley can be reduced as compared with the case where the belt is transmitted via a plurality of gears as in the conventional technique. By guiding the belt between the drive pulley and the action pulley with a guide roller, the distance between the outward path side and the return path side of the belt can be narrowed, and between the open / close drive means and the corresponding shutter. Width (width of the path for transmitting rotation) can be narrowed. Further, in this case, since a belt is used for transmission of rotation, a relay pulley for relaying rotation between a plurality of belts, a guide roller for guiding the belt, and the like are appropriately arranged so that the drive pulley and the action pulley can be connected. The path of the belt extending between them can be various paths with a simple structure such as a dogleg shape, a U shape, a C shape, an L shape, an S shape, a curved shape, a zigzag shape, and the like. .. From these things, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the opening / closing driving means with respect to the shutter. Therefore, the pair of shutters that open and close can be arranged at a position (in front of the swivel table) that was difficult to arrange with a conventional gaming machine, so that the effect of the shutters can be fully exhibited or enhanced. The movable effect of the pair of shutters can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the drive from the opening / closing driving means is transmitted to the rotating member via the belt to move the shutter, it is desirable that the belt extends along the outer circumference of the swivel table. As a result, the belt wound around the action pulley and the drive pulley is extended along the outer circumference of the swivel table, so that the opening / closing drive means for rotating the drive pulley around which the belt is wound swivels. Since it is arranged near the outer periphery of the table, the opening / closing driving means can be arranged at a position where it does not get in the way in the front view game area, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, in this case, since the belt wound around the action pulley and the drive pulley is extended along the outer circumference of the swivel table, the rotating action member rotated by the action pulley around which the belt is wound. Will be placed near the outer circumference of the swivel table. That is, since the rotating member for moving the shutter can be arranged near the outer periphery of the swivel table, the rotating member is placed at a position where it is difficult to block the effect image of the main effect display means arranged behind the swirl table. The game is arranged so that the shutter can be moved between the approaching position and the separating position, and the effect image displayed on the main effect display means can be visually recognized in a good state, and the above-mentioned effect is achieved. The machine can be embodied.

Further, when the drive from the opening / closing drive means is transmitted to the rotary action member via the belt to move the shutter, at least one rotatably attached to the swivel table between the drive pulley and the action pulley. After providing two relay pulleys, the belt is wound around an endless annular working belt wound around the working pulley and a relay pulley close to the working pulley, and a drive pulley and a relay pulley close to the drive pulley. It is desirable to configure at least with an endless annular drive belt that is hung. As a result, a relay pulley is provided between the action pulley and the drive pulley, and the belt is wound between the action pulley and the relay pulley. As shown in the above, it is composed of multiple belts, and each belt is wound in sequence between the two pulleys so that the rotation is transmitted from the drive pulley to the action pulley via the multiple belts. Compared to the case where one belt is wound around the drive pulley and the drive pulley, the rate at which the belt extends due to the tension applied to the belt when the drive pulley is rotated can be relatively reduced, and the belt extends from the pulley. It can be suppressed from coming off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the corresponding shutter from being stuck due to the belt coming off, so that the shutter can be reliably moved and the player can enjoy the movable effect of the shutter, which reduces the interest in the game. It can be suppressed. Further, in this case, since the relay pulley provided between the action pulley and the drive pulley is wound with a belt from each side to transmit the rotation, the relay pulley is used as the relay pulley for the action pulley and the drive pulley. By arranging it at a position different from that on the connected straight line, it is possible to make the path of the belt from the drive pulley to the action pulley various shapes such as dogleg, U-shape, C-shape, etc. Therefore, the rotation from the opening / closing drive means (drive pulley) can be transmitted to the corresponding shutter (action pulley) by wrapping around via the relay pulley, and the degree of freedom in arranging the shutter on the front surface of the swivel table is increased. Can be enhanced. At this time, it is desirable that the belts extend linearly between the wound pulleys in each of the plurality of belts such as the working belt and the drive belt. As a result, since no lateral force acts on each belt, the belt can be made difficult to come off from the pulley, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, when the shutter is moved by the rotation of the rotating action member by the opening / closing driving means as described above, the corresponding shutter is separated from the approaching position by revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction with respect to the rotating action member. It may have an action part that moves to and from the position. As a result, when the rotating acting member is rotated by the opening / closing driving means, the acting portion provided in the rotating acting member revolves, and the corresponding shutter is moved between the approaching position and the separating position by the revolving of the acting portion. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to embody a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned effects, and by increasing the orbital radius of the acting portion, the moving distance of the corresponding shutter can be made longer, and the shutter can be moved by the player. It is possible to entertain the production and suppress the decline in interest. In this case, it is desirable that the working part is a columnar pin (sliding pin). As a result, the shape of the rotating action member can be such that the connecting portion from the central portion that rotates integrally with the acting pulley to the acting portion extends in a rod shape. Therefore, by making the acting portion a groove, the connecting portion can be formed. Compared with the case where the shape is formed in a disk shape or a fan shape centered on the central portion, the rotating working member can be made as small as possible, and the rotating working member can be made inconspicuous and corresponding. When the shutter is moved to the separated position, it is possible to prevent a part of the rotating action member from unnecessarily protruding toward the front side of the main effect display means, and a part of the rotation action member protrudes from the main effect display means. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest by suppressing the production image from becoming difficult to see or the appearance in the game area from deteriorating.

Further, when the shutter is moved by the rotation of the rotating member by the opening / closing driving means, the rotating member is moved to the rear side of each shutter when the pair of shutters are separated from each other, and the approaching position in the shutter. At each position near the center in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the and the separation position, each is rotatably attached to the swivel table, and then in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of each shutter. A force in the moving direction may be applied to the central portion to move the shutter between the approaching position and the separating position. As a result, the rotating member for moving the corresponding shutter is arranged near the center in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the moving direction) on the rear side of the shutter at the time of separation position on the swivel table. When moving the shutter between the approaching position and the separating position, a force is applied to the central part of the shutter in the longitudinal direction to move the shutter, so the direction of movement of the shutter is changed by the rotation of the swivel table. Therefore, even if the shutter is moved, the force for moving the shutter acts near the position of the center of gravity of the shutter, so that the shutter can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the shutter can be moved smoothly. Therefore, the pair of shutters can be smoothly moved between the approaching position and the separating position without rattling, regardless of the orientation of the pair of shutters due to the rotation of the swivel table. A pair of shutters (and multiple decorative objects attached to the front of the shutter) can be moved without giving a sense of discomfort to the person, and the movement of the pair of shutters (multiple decorative objects) can be enjoyed. Can be suppressed. Further, in this case, as described above, since the pair of shutters can be smoothly moved regardless of the rotation position of the swivel table, the shutters cannot be moved between the approaching position and the separating position. Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming frustrated and deteriorating the interest due to the interruption of the game.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The sub-effect display means is
When the pair of shutters are in the separated positions, they can move from the retracted position to the protruding position. "

By the way, when the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters (plurality of decorative objects) can be moved to the front side of the main effect display means at the same time, it is necessary to prevent the sub-effect display means and the shutter from coming into contact with each other. There is. Therefore, for example, when the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, it is necessary to secure a wide depth in the front-rear direction in order to arrange them, but the depth is limited in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is relatively necessary to thin the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surface of the shutter, and the three-dimensional appearance of the decorative bodies becomes poor, so that a sufficient decorative effect may not be obtained. Further, when at least one of the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters is made small so that the sub-effect display means and the shutter do not come into contact with each other, when only one of them is moved to the front side of the main effect display means, the main effect is displayed. There is a risk that the display means cannot be sufficiently covered, or that the display means becomes smaller and less noticeable, so that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

Further, when the swivel table is rotated and stopped so that the moving direction (opening / closing direction) of the pair of shutters is the vertical direction, the position is on the upper end side with respect to the moving direction of the shutters (the upper shutter is in the separation position and the lower side). If the shutter is positioned at an approaching position with the shutter on the side), there is a risk that the shutter will move downward due to the gravity applied to the shutter, and the shutter will move freely, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. There is a risk that the interest will be reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to keep applying an upward force to the shutter by the opening / closing driving means so that the shutter does not move by itself. However, the load applied to the opening / closing driving means becomes high, and the opening / closing driving means is damaged by the overload. By doing so, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the game is interrupted.

Further, when the swivel table is stopped rotating so that the moving direction (appearance direction) of the sub-effect display means is in the vertical direction, the sub-effect display means is moved to a position on the upper end side in the moving direction. Then, there is a risk that the sub-effect display means will move downward due to the load of the sub-effect display means, and the sub-effect display means will move freely, giving the player a sense of discomfort and reducing the interest. There is a risk of causing it. Therefore, it is necessary to continue to apply an upward force to the sub-effect display means by the haunting drive means so that the sub-effect display means does not move arbitrarily, but the load applied to the sub-effect display means becomes high and the load is overloaded. There is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the game is interrupted due to damage to the haunting drive means.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the sub-effect display means can be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position when the pair of shutters are in the separated positions.

As a result, the sub-effect display means can be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position only when the pair of shutters are separated from each other. Therefore, the positions of the pair of shutters and the sub-effect display means in the front-rear direction are set to the same position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a widening of the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters (plurality of decorative objects), and a gaming machine equipped with the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters is realized. It can be facilitated, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of decorative objects from becoming relatively small. By making the decorative objects as large as possible, the decorative objects can be made to stand out, and the decorative effect of the plurality of decorative objects can be enhanced. It can be fully exerted.

Further, if at least one of the pair of shutters is moved from the detached position to the approaching position side, the sub-effect display means cannot be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position side. When the shutter is located above the main effect display means (above the rotation center of the swivel table), the shutter is moved to the approaching position side, so that the sub effect display means is moved downward by the load of the sub effect display means. Even if an attempting force acts, the shutter moving to the approaching position side can prevent the sub-effect display means from moving downward. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display means from moving downward without permission, it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display means from moving unnaturally and giving the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to surely enjoy the production by the sub-effect display means and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the shutter moving to the approaching position side can prevent the sub-effect display means from moving downward, it is not necessary to keep driving the haunting drive means so that the sub-effect display means does not move arbitrarily. It is possible to prevent the haunting driving means from being damaged due to an overload and prevent the game from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position side, the pair of shutters cannot be moved from the separated position to the approached position side, so that the moving direction of the pair of shutters is moved up and down by the swivel table. By moving the sub-effect display means to the protruding position side when the direction (including the diagonal direction) is set, in the shutter located on the upper end side in the moving direction, the shutter is moved downward by the load of the shutter. Even if the force is applied, the sub-effect display means moving to the protruding position side can prevent the shutter from moving downward. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the shutter from moving downward without permission, it is possible to prevent the shutter from moving unnaturally and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and the effect of the shutter or the like is ensured. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the sub-effect display means moving to the protruding position side can prevent the pair of shutters from moving downward, it is necessary to keep driving the opening / closing driving means so that the pair of shutters do not move arbitrarily. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing driving means from being damaged due to an overload and prevent the game from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
It is characterized in that it is "further provided with a swivel regulating means for regulating the rotation of the swivel table".

Here, as the "swivel control means", "a part of the sub-effect display means can be projected outward from the outer circumference of the swivel table, and the sub-effect display means is extended forward from the outer part of the swivel table in the unit base to sub-effect. It regulates rotation by contacting with the display means. ”,“ It is possible to engage with a protruding member that is attached to the swivel table and can protrude outward, and a protruding member that is attached to the unit base and protrudes from the swivel table. An engaging member that regulates rotation by engaging the protruding member and the engaging member "," A recess formed in the swivel table that is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the central side, and attached to the unit base It is equipped with a protruding member that can move forward and backward in the recess of the swivel table, and regulates rotation by allowing the protruding member to enter the recess. " It is provided with a possible pressing member, and the rotation is regulated by a frictional force by pressing the outer periphery of the swivel table with the pressing member. "

Further, as the "swivel regulating means", the swivel table may be able to rotate within a predetermined angle range when the rotation is regulated, or the swivel table may not be able to rotate at all. Further, as the "swivel regulating means", the rotation may be regulated only when the swivel table is in a specific rotation position, or the rotation may be regulated when the swivel table is in any rotation position.

By the way, when the pair of shutters attached to the swivel table is moved by moving only one of them, moving each of them in the same direction, or moving the sub-effect display means, the shutter or the sub-effect display means is moved to rotate. Since the position of the center of gravity of the table moves, the swivel table may rattle in the rotation direction depending on the moving speed or reciprocating movement of the shutter or the sub-effect display means. Further, since the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the swivel table via the shutter have their respective axes oriented in different directions, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies Vibration is likely to occur due to the rotation of the swivel table, and the swivel table may be shaken by the generated vibration, causing the swivel table to rattle in the rotation direction. When the swivel table swings for this reason, the plurality of decorative objects attached to the swivel table via the sub-effect display means and the shutter also swing as a whole, and the sub-effect display means and the plurality of decorations also swing. The unstable movement of the decoration body may give the player a sense of distrust and anxiety, making it impossible to enjoy the game and reducing the interest of the player.

Further, for example, with the rotation of the swivel table stopped so that the movement direction (opening / closing direction) of the pair of shutters is horizontal, one shutter is moved to the separation position and the other shutter is moved to the approach position. In this case, the rotational moment for rotating the swivel table acts due to the load of the shutter moved to the separated position, the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surface of the shutter, the rotational driving means, and the like. Alternatively, when the rotation of the swivel table is stopped at a position where the sub-effect display means is at the same height as the rotation center of the swivel table (either side of the main effect display means in the left-right direction), the load of the sub-effect display means is applied. As a result, a rotational moment that attempts to rotate the swivel table in the direction in which the sub-effect display means moves downward acts. Then, in the case of a movable effect that maintains this state, in order to prevent the swivel table from rotating, it is necessary to apply a force for canceling the rotational moment to the swivel table from the swivel drive means, and the swivel table must be swiveled. The load applied to the drive means becomes high, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the game is interrupted due to damage to the turning drive means due to the overload.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the gaming machine is provided with a turning regulating means for regulating the rotation of the turning table.

As a result, while the rotation of the swivel table by the swivel drive means is stopped, the shutter can be moved by the open / close drive means, a plurality of decorative objects can be rotated by the rotation drive means, and the sub-effect display means can be moved. At that time, even if the swivel table is to be rotated in the rotation direction due to a change in the position of the center of gravity or the occurrence of vibration, the swivel table can be regulated by the swivel regulating means, so that the swivel table rattles. It is possible to prevent unstable movements of the entire plurality of decorations, a pair of shutters, and the sub-effect display means, and the entire plurality of decorations can be rotated in a stable state, or the shutters and sub-effects can be rotated. The display means can be moved in a stable state, and the rotation of a plurality of decorative objects and the movement of the shutter and the sub-effect display means can be made less likely to give a sense of discomfort, which entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated by the swivel regulating means, the rotation moment for rotating the swivel table by the load of the shutter, a plurality of decorative bodies, the rotation driving means, the sub-effect display means, etc. is swiveled. Since it can be received by the regulating means, when the rotation of the swivel table is stopped, the swivel driving means exerts a force that cancels the rotational moment due to the load of the shutter, a plurality of decorative bodies, the rotation driving means, the sub-effect display means, and the like. It is not necessary to act on the swivel table, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the swivel drive means, and it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to an overload.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 3,
"The turning regulating means is
When the sub-effect display means is in the retracted position, the rotation of the swivel table is restricted. "

According to the configuration of the means 4, the turning regulating means regulates the rotation of the turning table when the sub-effect display means is in the retracted position.

As a result, when the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position, the rotation of the sub-effect display means is restricted by the turning regulating means. When the display means is performed with the swivel table rotated and stopped at any position on either side of the main effect display means in the left-right direction, the swivel table is rotated by moving the sub-effect display means to the retracted position. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed, and it is possible to surely entertain the production and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position, the rotation of the swivel table is restricted by the swivel regulating means. Therefore, in order to rotate the swivel table, the sub-effect display means protrudes to some extent from the retracted position. It is necessary to move it to the position side. Therefore, when the swivel table rotates when the sub-effect display means is in the retracted position, the sub-effect display means moves in the direction of the turning center (protruding position) and then rotates. By moving, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention to the sub-effect display means and make it difficult to overlook the rotation of the sub-effect display means by the swivel table, and the effect by the sub-effect display means is surely enjoyed. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

When the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position when the swivel table is in the specific swivel position, it is desirable that the swivel regulating means regulates the rotation of the swivel table. As a result, the sub-effect display means does not move to the retracted position at the portion other than the specific turning position in the rotation direction (turning direction) of the turning table, so that even if another decorative body is arranged at that portion. Other decorative members can be arranged without coming into contact with the sub-effect display means, and the appearance in the game area can be improved by the other decorative members.

Means 5: In the configuration of means 3 or means 4,
"The sub-effect display means is
At the retracted position, a part of the swivel table protrudes outward from the outer circumference and
The turning regulating means is
At a portion of the unit base outside the outer circumference of the swivel table, it extends forward from the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and corresponds to the sub-effect display means at the retracted position. It is characterized in that the rotation of the swivel table is regulated by being in contact with the swivel table.

Here, as the "swivel control means", "a plurality of columnar guide pins for rotatably mounting a part of a plurality of guide rollers for rotatably mounting the swivel table with respect to the unit base", " An extension member that simply extends forward from the unit base ", and the like can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 5, when the sub-effect display means is in the retracted position, a part of the sub-effect display means projects outward from the outer circumference of the swivel table, and then the swivel regulating means is set more than the outer circumference of the swivel table in the unit base. At the outer part, the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated by extending it forward from the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table and contacting the sub-effect display means at the retracted position. ..

As a result, for example, when the two turning restricting means are separated from each other in the circumferential direction of the turning table by substantially the same width as the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is inserted between the two turning regulating means. When is moved to the retracted position, the portion of the sub-effect display means that protrudes outward from the swivel table is sandwiched between the two swivel control means, and the swivel table can be restricted (locked) so that it cannot rotate. can. Further, when the distance between the turning tables of the two turning regulating means in the circumferential direction is wider than the width of the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is moved back so as to be inserted between the two turning regulating means. When moved to, a gap of a predetermined size is provided between the sub-effect display means and the two turning control means, so that the swivel table can be rotated by the gap, and the sub-effect display means can be rotated. Or a pair of shutters (plurality of ornaments) can be regulated so that they can be swiveled only within a predetermined swivel angle. In this way, the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated by the swivel regulating means, and a gaming machine that exerts the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, when the distance between the turning tables of the two turning regulating means in the circumferential direction is narrower than the width of the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is set to the retracted position at the turning position between the two turning regulating means. When the sub-effect display means is moved in the direction, the sub-effect display means comes into contact with the turning restricting means and the movement to the backward position is restricted, and the sub-effect display means does not invade between the two turning regulating means. Even if another member is attached to the portion between the two turning restricting means, the other member can be attached to the portion because it does not come into contact with the sub-effect display means. Therefore, a member (mechanism) for rotating the swivel table is attached to the portion as another member to surely embody the gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect, or a decorative body is attached to the appearance in the gaming area. Can be improved.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations from means 3 to means 5,
"The turning regulating means is
When the swivel table is in a specific swivel position, the rotation of the swivel table is regulated. "

Here, the "specific turning position" may be provided for each constant turning angle (for example, 45 degrees, 60 degrees, 90 degrees, etc.), or may be provided for each uneven turning angle. Is also good.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the swivel regulating means is such that the rotation of the swivel table is regulated when the swivel table is in the specific swivel position.

As a result, when the swivel table is in the specific swivel position, the rotation is regulated by the swivel regulating means. It is possible to obtain the above-mentioned effects.

Further, when the swivel table is in the specific swivel position, the rotation is regulated by the swivel regulating means. That is, a turning position (effect) in which the sub-effect display means is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position, the pair of shutters is moved between the approaching position and the separating position, and a plurality of decorative objects are rotated. Since the execution position) is limited to a specific turning position, it is possible to suppress an increase in the effect pattern as compared with the case where the effect can be executed at any turn position, and the effect pattern can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of having too much, and it is possible to entertain the player with an appropriate number of production patterns, and it is possible to reduce the load on the production control. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the load, and to surely enjoy the above-mentioned effect.

Means 7: In any one of means 1 to 6,
"It is further provided with a spur gear-shaped slide gear that is rotated around an axis extending back and forth by the haunting drive means.
The sub-effect display means
It is characterized by having a hauling rack gear that meshes with the slide gear and extends in the hoisting direction connecting the protruding position and the retracting position. "

Here, as the "slide gear", "a slide plate that can be moved in the haunting direction by the haunting drive means between the swivel table and the sub-effect display means is provided, and the swivel table faces the haunting rack gear. A fixed-side rack gear that extends in the haunting direction is provided on the slide plate, and the fixed-side rack gear and the haunting rack gear are meshed with each other and rotatably attached to the slide plate. " Things that can be made to do ", etc.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is provided with a spur gear-shaped slide gear that is rotated around an axis extending back and forth by the haunting drive means, and then the sub-effect display means meshes with the slide gear. , It has a haunting rack gear extending in the hauling direction connecting the protruding position and the retracting position.

As a result, the slide gear for moving the sub-effect display means between the protruding position and the retracted position is rotated around the axis extending forward and backward, so that the mechanism for moving the sub-effect display means is moved. The depth in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible, and it is possible to easily prepare for a gaming machine having a limited depth. Further, by rotating the slide gear by the haunting drive means, the sub-effect display means can be moved between the protruding position and the retracting position via the haunting rack gear, and the gaming machine having the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably performed. Can be embodied.

Means 8: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 7,
"The swivel table and the unit base
It has a through hole and an opening that are larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrate the front and back. ”

According to the configuration of the means 8, the swivel table and the unit base are provided with through holes and openings that are larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrate the front and back.

As a result, the display screen of the main effect display means arranged on the rear side of the unit base can be viewed from the front (player side) through the opening of the unit base and the through hole of the swivel table. Compared with the case where the swivel table is composed of transparent members so that the main effect display means can be visually recognized through the transparent part, the effect image displayed on the main effect display means can be visually recognized in a clear state. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image of the main effect display means and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Means 9: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 8.
It is characterized in that it is "further provided with opening / closing restricting means for restricting the movement of the pair of shutters".

Here, the "opening / closing regulating means" includes "a means for restricting the movement (opening / closing) of the shutter by moving the sub-effect display means from the retracted position to the protruding position side and bringing it into contact with the shutter", and "on a swivel table". It is equipped with a projecting member that can project to the part where the shutter moves, and regulates the movement (opening and closing) of the shutter by contacting the projecting member with the shutter. " It is equipped with a projecting member that can project, and the projecting member projecting from the shutter abuts on the member attached to the swivel table to regulate the movement (opening and closing) of the shutter. " In addition to being provided with a slit extending to, it is equipped with an action part that revolves by an opening / closing driving means and slides in the slit, and when the shutter is moved to an approaching position or a distant position, the acting part that revolves is dead in the moving direction of the shutter. It regulates the movement (opening and closing) of the shutter by passing through a point and contacting the end of the slit. "

By the way, when the swivel table is rotated while the shutter is moved closer to the separation position than the separation position, the shutter moves to the separation position by the centrifugal force acting on the shutter depending on the rotation speed of the rotation table. There is a risk of doing so. Further, when the swivel table is rotated and stopped so that the moving direction (opening / closing direction) of the pair of shutters is the vertical direction, the position is above the moving direction of the shutters (the upper shutter is the separation position and the lower side). If the shutter is positioned at an approaching position), the shutter may move downward due to gravity. Therefore, it is necessary to keep applying a force to the shutter by the opening / closing driving means so that the shutter does not move arbitrarily, the load applied to the opening / closing driving means becomes high, and the opening / closing driving means is damaged due to the overload and the game is interrupted. There is a risk of causing problems.

Further, when a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of each of the pair of shutters are rotated by a rotation driving means, vibration is likely to occur due to the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies, so that the generated vibration causes the shutter to shake. As a result, there is a risk that the plurality of decorative objects will vibrate as a whole. In addition, vibration may occur even when the sub-effect display means is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position, and the vibration is transmitted to the shutter via the swivel table so that it can be attached to the shutter or the front of the shutter. There is a risk that the plurality of decorative objects being mounted may vibrate rattlingly. For this reason, the shutter and the entire decorative body rattle and become unstable, giving the player a sense of distrust and anxiety, making it impossible to enjoy the game and reducing the interest. There is a risk that it will end up.

According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine is provided with opening / closing regulating means for regulating the movement of the pair of shutters.

As a result, by restricting the movement of the shutter by the opening / closing regulating means, the shutter moves without permission even if the swivel table is rotated, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated, or the sub-effect display means is moved. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort to the movements of the shutter and the plurality of decorative objects, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, even when the swivel table is rotated, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated, or the swivel table is stopped to rotate so that the movement direction of the pair of shutters is in the vertical direction, the shutters can be moved by the opening / closing restricting means. By restricting, it is not necessary to keep applying force to the shutter by the opening / closing driving means so that the shutter does not move arbitrarily, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing driving means from being loaded, and the game is interrupted due to overload. Can be avoided.

Means 10: In any one of means 1 to 9,
"It is arranged on the front surface of the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction so as to abut on the outer circumference of the swivel table. With a plurality of guide rollers that rotatably attach the swivel table to the unit base,
Front view of the unit base A spur gear-shaped swivel pinion gear that is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at a position outside the swivel table and is rotated by the swivel drive means is further provided. And
The swivel table
It is formed along the outer peripheral edge and has a swivel gear that meshes with the swivel pinion gear. "

Here, examples of the "swivel gear" include "a non-annular shape extending in an arc shape having both ends", "a circle extending in an annular shape having no end portion", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is arranged on the front surface of the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward to swivel. Multiple guide rollers that rotatably attach the swivel table to the unit base by contacting the outer circumference of the table, and rotatably mount around the axis extending back and forth at a position outside the front view swivel table on the unit base. The swivel table is provided with a spur gear-shaped swivel pinion gear that is rotated by a swivel drive means, and the swivel table has a swivel gear that is formed along the outer peripheral edge and meshes with the swivel pinion gear. It is the one that was made.

As a result, the swivel table can be rotatably mounted around the axis extending back and forth by the plurality of guide rollers mounted on the unit base, and when the swivel pinion gear is rotated by the swivel drive means, the swivel table is swiveled. Since the swivel table can be rotated around the axis extending back and forth by the swivel gear meshing with the pinion gear, it is possible to surely embody a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since a plurality of guide rollers are brought into contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table and the swivel table is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward, the swivel table is located more than the center of rotation of the swivel table among the plurality of guide rollers. Since the load applied to the swivel table can be supported by a plurality of guide rollers arranged on the lower side, the weight is increased by attaching a sub-effect display means, a pair of shutters, a plurality of decorative bodies, etc. to the swivel table. Even so, by supporting the load applied to the swivel table in a distributed manner, the load acting on each guide roller can be reduced, the guide roller can be made less likely to be damaged, and the swivel table can be rotated smoothly. It is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the swivel table is rotatably attached by a plurality of guide rollers that are in contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table and it is not necessary to provide a rotary shaft at the center of rotation of the swivel table, the swivel table is arranged behind the swivel table. Since there is nothing to interfere with the main effect display means, the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front in good condition, the effect image of the main effect display means can be enjoyed, and after the swivel table. It is possible to reliably embody a gaming machine provided with a main effect display means on the side, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, since the swivel pinion gear is meshed with the swivel gear formed along the outer peripheral edge of the swivel table to rotate the swivel table, the swivel gear has a large diameter, so that the swivel pinion Even if the rotational driving force of the gear is small, the swivel table can be rotated via the swivel gear. Therefore, even if the weight of the swivel table is increased by attaching the sub-effect display means, a pair of shutters, a plurality of decorative bodies, the rotary drive means, etc. to the swivel table, the swivel drive means side can use the swivel table with a small driving force. It can be rotated, the load related to the rotation of the swivel table can be reduced, and the game can be prevented from being interrupted due to an overload.

Means 11: In the configuration of means 10,
"The turning regulating means is
A plurality of portions of the unit base outside the outer circumference of the swivel table extend forward from the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and a part of each of the plurality of guide rollers. It is characterized in that it is composed of a plurality of columnar guide pins that rotatably support the.

According to the configuration of the means 11, a plurality of swivel regulating means are extended forward from the unit base at a portion outside the outer circumference of the swivel table in the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and a plurality of swivel regulating means are extended forward by each. It is composed of a plurality of columnar guide pins that rotatably support a part of the guide roller.

As a result, a part of the plurality of guide rollers can be rotatably supported by the plurality of guide pins, and the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated, so that the configuration of the gaming machine can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Means 12: In any one configuration from Means 1 to Means 11.
"The plurality of the ornaments
In each of the shutters, the axis of each of the shafts is arranged on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter. "

According to the configuration of the means 12, in each shutter, the axial cores of the respective shafts are arranged on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter.

As a result, a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row along the front surface of the shutter, so that the depth required for arranging the plurality of decorative bodies in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the depth is surely on the front side of the shutter. In addition to being able to arrange a plurality of decorative objects in a pachinko machine, a plurality of decorative objects, a shutter, a swivel table, and a main effect display means can be easily arranged in the front-rear direction in a gaming machine having a limited depth. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that exerts an action effect. Further, since the depth applied to the plurality of decorative bodies can be reduced, the decorative body can be made relatively large, and other members (for example, a game panel, a center accessory, etc.) before and after the plurality of decorative bodies and the shutter can be used. ) Can be placed, or multiple decorative objects can be placed in a narrow space (for example, between the game panel and the main effect display means), making the machine a game machine that strongly attracts the attention of the player. Can be done.

Means 13: In any one configuration from Means 1 to Means 12
"The main effect display means is
The outer shape of the front view is formed in a horizontally long quadrangle, and
The pair of shutters
The length in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position is formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the main effect display means. "

According to the configuration of the means 13, the main effect display means has a horizontally long quadrangle in the front view, and the length in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position in the pair of shutters is the main. It is formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the effect display means.

As a result, the size (length) of the shutter straddles the display screen of the main effect display means, so that when the shutter is moved to the front side of the main effect display means, the part covered by the shutter becomes wider, and the shutter It is possible to increase the impact on the player when the main effect display means is moved to the front side, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the length of the shutter is set to be a length that straddles the main effect display means, for example, when both ends in the longitudinal direction of the shutter are supported so as to be movable between the approaching position and the separating position, the shutter can be moved. The guide members (for example, slide shafts, slide guides, slide rails, etc.) that support the above are arranged outside the main effect display means in the front view, and the guide members can make the effect image less likely to be obstructed. It is possible to entertain the production image to the player in a good condition.

Means 14: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 13.
"It is attached to the front surface of the shutter, and further includes a decorative cover that covers the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the front surface side of the rotary drive means." ..

According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is further provided with a decorative cover attached to the front surface of the shutter and covering the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the front surface side of the rotary drive means.

As a result, the decorative cover can hide the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the rotary drive means from the player side, and the shaft portion, the universal shaft joint, and the rotary drive means of the decorative body can be seen for the game. It is possible to reduce the unsightly appearance in the area. In addition, since it is equipped with a decorative cover that hides the shaft of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the rotational drive means, the decorative cover can decorate the inside of the game area and the front of the shutter, improving the appearance and making the player look good. Can be entertained.

Means 15: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 14.
"It further comprises a decorative substrate that is attached to each of the pair of shutters and is provided with light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies.
The decorative body is
It is characterized by having "translucency".

Here, as the "light emitting means", "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "incandescent lamp", "fluorescent lamp", "organic EL", "neon lamp", "cold cathode fluorescent lamp" , Etc. can be mentioned. Further, the light emitting means may be a wide-angle type having a wide light irradiation range or a narrow-angle type having a narrow light irradiation range.

According to the configuration of the means 15, a decorative substrate, which is attached to each of the pair of shutters in the gaming machine and is provided with light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies, is provided. The decorative body is made to have translucency after being further provided.

As a result, when the light emitting means provided on the decorative substrate is made to emit light, a plurality of decorative bodies can be made to emit light and be decorated, the appearance of the decorative bodies can be improved, and the decorative bodies can be made to stand out by the player. It can attract a strong interest and raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that there is something.

Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light in a state where the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the orientation of the decorative body main body formed three-dimensionally by the rotation is changed, so that the light emitting means can be used. The refraction and reflection direction of the light radiated to the front decorative body, the amount of transmission, etc. will change one after another, and the decorative body can be made to appear to be twinkling, entertaining the player and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light while the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching position by the opening / closing driving means, the light emitting decoration having a brightness clearly different from that of the effect image of the main effect display means or the sub effect display means. Can be shown to the player, so that the player's attention can be directed to the center of the game area. In addition, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light while the shutter is moved to the approaching position and the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated, the plurality of decorative bodies blink in front of the main effect display means. Since the production can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light in a state where the swivel table is rotated by the swivel driving means and the entire plurality of decorative bodies are swiveled through the shutter, an arc shape centered on the center of the swivel table is formed. The trajectory of the light can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. In addition, when a plurality of decorative objects are rotated by the rotation driving means while rotating the swivel table, the arc-shaped light locus by the light emitting means of the decorative substrate blinks brilliantly to give the player a comet-like movable light emitting effect. Since it can be shown, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Means 16: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 15.
"The plurality of the ornaments
It is characterized in that it is arranged in an arc shape so as to be centered on the center side of the swivel table in the front view. "

Here, as an arc in which a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row, a line connecting one end of the arc and the center of the arc and a line connecting the other end of the arc and the center of the arc are included. However, it is desirable that the intersecting angle is within the range of 60 degrees to 150 degrees. This is because if the angle is smaller than this range, it may appear that a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a straight line. In addition, if the angle is larger than this range, one ornament must be made smaller in order to make it a part of the annulus, which may make the ornament less noticeable, and one ornament is larger. This is because there is a risk that it will not appear to be lined up in an arc.

According to the configuration of the means 16, a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape so as to be centered on the center side of the swivel table in the front view.

As a result, a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side (center side of the gaming area) of the swivel table. Therefore, when the pair of shutters are moved to the separated positions, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged. Are lined up along the outer periphery of the gaming area, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gaming area can be decorated to improve the appearance of the gaming machine.

In addition, since a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surface of the pair of shutters are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, the pair of shutters can be moved to an approaching position or separated from each other. By moving to, the diameter of the virtual ring formed by the plurality of ornaments arranged in an arc shape can be reduced or increased. Therefore, when the pair of shutters is moved from the separated position to the approached position, the virtual annulus formed by the plurality of ornaments becomes smaller, so that the player's attention is directed to the center of the swivel table (the center of the game area). Can be done. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters is moved from the approaching position to the separating position, the virtual annulus formed by the plurality of decorative bodies becomes large, so that the player's attention can be directed to the outer peripheral side of the gaming area.

Further, as described above, since a virtual ring can be formed by a plurality of decorative bodies, the effect image of the main effect display device can be decorated by the decoration of the ring by the plurality of decorative bodies, or the sub effect display can be displayed. By moving the means to the protruding position and locating the sub-effect display means within the decoration of the ring by the plurality of decorative bodies, it is possible to decorate the effect image of the sub-effect display means, and the game can be played with various effects. It is possible to prevent people from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, when the swivel table is rotated by the swivel driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row. Since it moves in the direction in which it is, it is possible to show the player a movable effect as if multiple ornaments are running side by side on the circumference, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, for example, the ends of the plurality of decorative bodies facing the center side of the swivel table move forward. By rotating each of them in this way, it is possible to show the player a production that flows forward from the center of the swivel table, and it is possible to make the player feel as if a headwind is blowing. Alternatively, when the ends of the swivel table facing the center side of the plurality of ornaments are rotated so as to move backward, the player is shown an effect of flowing from the center of the center of the swivel table to the rear. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is sucked into the swivel table (game area). At this time, by displaying the effect images corresponding to the rotation directions of the plurality of decorative bodies on the main effect display means, the player can be shown an effect radiated forward from the main effect display means, or the main effect can be displayed. It is possible to show an effect that is sucked into the display means.

In this way, the pair of shutters can be moved between the approaching position and the separating position, the plurality of ornaments arranged in an arc shape can be rotated, and the plurality of shutters can be moved together with the pair of shutters via a swivel table. There is something good for the player because it is possible to direct the player's attention to the center side of the swivel table, that is, the center of the game area, by turning the decoration of the. It is possible to make people think that it is, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Means 17: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to 16.
"The plurality of the ornaments
When the pair of shutters are in the approaching position, they are arranged in an arc shape around the rotation center of the swivel table. "

According to the configuration of the means 17, a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the swivel table when the pair of shutters are in close positions.

As a result, when the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching position, the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front of each of them are arranged in an annular shape, so that the player's attention is strongly directed to the center of the game area. It is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row around the rotation center of the swivel table, the swivel table is rotated by the swivel drive means while the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching position by the open / close drive means. When a plurality of ornaments are rotated together with the shutter, the entire rotation center of the plurality of ornaments is rotated without blurring, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort. It is possible to enjoy the turning of the decorative body and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

When the pair of shutters is moved to the approaching position, it can be moved from the outside of the front view main effect table means into the decoration of the ring formed by the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc shape. It may be provided with various appearance decorations. As a result, the front side of the main effect display means can be almost completely covered by a pair of shutters, a plurality of decorative bodies, and the appearing decorative bodies, which can give a strong impact to the player and can give a strong impact to the player and the center of the game area. The appearance of a large disk-shaped decoration can make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Means 18: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 17.
"The universal shaft joint is
Each of the connected shafts protrudes from the end of each shaft with the same circumferential gap on the circumference separated from the center, and the width in the circumferential direction is narrower than the gap. A pair of arms and
With the arm portions of the other shaft portion inserted into the gaps of the pair of arm portions of one of the shaft portions, the arms are surrounded by the four arm portions from the inside. It is composed of a spider having four transmission parts protruding in a rod shape between the parts. "

By the way, when a rubber tube joint is used as the universal shaft joint, the rubber may deteriorate. Further, when a spring joint is used, a time lag is likely to occur in the transmission of rotation depending on the spring constant, and there is a possibility that the sense of unity of rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies is impaired. Further, when a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft joint is used, since the mechanism is complicated, it takes time and effort to assemble, and there is a risk that the cost will increase.

According to the configuration of the means 18, the universal shaft joints are projected from the ends of the respective shaft portions with the same circumferential gap on the circumference separated from the center at the respective shaft portions connected to each other. With the arm portions of the other shaft portion inserted into the gaps between the pair of arm portions whose width in the direction is narrower than the gap and the pair of arm portions on one shaft portion, four. It is composed of a spider having four transmission parts protruding in a rod shape from the inside surrounded by one arm part to each of the arm parts.

As a result, when one shaft portion is rotated, the transmission portion of the spider abuts on the side surface of the arm portion, and the transmission portion abuts on the side surface of the arm portion on the other shaft portion, so that the transmission portion abuts from one shaft portion. The rotation can be transmitted to the other shaft portion. Further, even when one shaft portion and the other shaft portion extend in different directions, rotation can be transmitted between the shaft portions via the transmission portion of the spider as described above. .. At this time, the four spiders are kept so that the plane passing through the center of the four transmission parts of the cross-shaped spider is aligned with the plane including the bisector of the angle of the central axis of the two shaft parts. The two transmission portions slide relatively between the arm portions in the extending direction of the arm portions. In this way, since the two shaft portions can be connected so that the rotation is transmitted to each other, the universal shaft joint can be embodied, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

In addition, since the rotation is transmitted via the spider, the time lag of rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and spring is longer than when the rotation is transmitted using rubber and spring. It can be eliminated and multiple ornaments can be rotated at the same time. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated at the same time, and the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated with a delay in order, which makes the player feel unnatural. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of a plurality of decorative bodies having a sense of unity and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, a universal shaft that can transmit rotation between two shafts by simply sandwiching the spider transmission portion between the side surface of the arm portion of one shaft portion and the side surface of the arm portion of the other shaft portion. Since the joint can be assembled, the number of parts can be reduced and the time and effort required for assembly can be reduced as compared with the case where a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft joint is used as the universal shaft joint. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

Means 19: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 18.
"Rotation of a plurality of the decorative bodies attached to the shutter and arranged in a row by transmitting a drive from the rotation driving means to the shaft portion of the decorative body at least every other one to rotate the decorative bodies. It is characterized by having a further drive mechanism.

Here, as the "rotation drive mechanism", "a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body and the rotary gear are meshed with the rotary gear from the rear side and can rotate around the shaft extending back and forth. A rotary pulley attached to the shaft of the decorative body, which includes a transmission gear (transmission gear member) in the shape of a bevel gear and a gear mechanism that rotates the transmission gear by being driven by a rotary drive means. A drive pulley that is rotated by a rotary drive means behind the decorative body, and a belt that is wound around the drive pulley and the rotary pulley. "," Attached to the shaft of the decorative body. A spur gear-shaped rotary gear and a transmission gear that meshes with the rotary gear from the rear side and is rotated by a rotary drive means. "

By the way, a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row are sequentially connected to shaft portions adjacent to each other by a universal shaft joint, and the shaft portion of the decorative body located at one end is rotated by a rotation driving means. In this case, since the universal shaft joint has a certain amount of rattling and twisting in the rotational direction, the rattling and twisting in the rotational direction will be accumulated as the transmission of rotation passes through the flexible shaft joint. There is a time lag in the timing of rotation of the decorative body at the other end, whose rotation is transmitted through a plurality of free shaft joints, with respect to the decorative body at one end rotated via the shaft portion by the rotation driving means. As a result, the sense of unity of the movements (rotations) of the plurality of decorative bodies becomes poor, and there is a risk that the effect of the movements cannot be fully exerted.

According to the configuration of the means 19, at least every other decorative body attached to the shutter and arranged in a row of the gaming machine transmits the drive from the rotational driving means to the shaft portion of the decorative body. It is provided with a rotation drive mechanism for rotating.

As a result, in the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, the drive from the rotational driving means is transmitted to the shafts of the decorative bodies located at least every other one from the end via the rotation driving mechanism. Since it is rotated, it is possible to reduce the accumulation of rattling and twisting in the rotation direction in the universal shaft joint. Therefore, since the time lag of rotation of the decorative body rotated via the universal shaft joint can be reduced as much as possible, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated at substantially the same time. It is possible to rotate it, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the movement (rotation) of a plurality of decorative bodies and to fully exert the effect of the multiple decorative bodies. can do.

Further, the drive from the rotation drive means is made to rotate the shaft portions of the plurality of decorative bodies via the rotation drive mechanism. That is, since the shaft portions of the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by one driving means and it is not necessary to provide the plurality of rotating driving means, it is possible to secure a space corresponding to the rotation. It is possible to increase the space of the decoration, increase the rotation range of the decoration to make the movement more enjoyable, make the decoration larger and make it stand out, and increase the number of decorations. It is possible to increase the impact when rotating, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movement and decoration of multiple decorative bodies, to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game. can.

Further, since the rotation drive mechanism transmits the drive from the rotation drive means to rotate the shaft portion of the decorative body, the rotation drive mechanism arranges the rotation drive means at a position away from the plurality of decoration bodies. It is possible to make the rotation driving means inconspicuous, and it is possible to make a plurality of decorative bodies relatively conspicuous, so that the player can enjoy the decoration and movement (rotation) of the plurality of decorative bodies. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 20: In the configuration of Means 19
"The universal shaft joint is
It is characterized in that "the shaft portion adjacent to the shaft portion rotated by the rotation drive mechanism is connected".

By the way, in a plurality of decorative bodies sequentially connected by a universal shaft joint, for example, when the shaft portions of two separated decorative bodies are rotated by a rotation drive mechanism, the shaft portions are rotated by the rotation drive mechanism. Since at least one ornament is arranged in a state of being connected by a free shaft joint between the two ornaments to be formed, the ornament is arranged between the two ornaments rotated by the rotation drive mechanism. Then, the rotation from both sides is transmitted via the universal shaft joint. As described above, since the universal shaft joint has rattling and twisting in the rotation direction, if there is a time lag in the rotation transmitted from both sides, the rotation of the decorative body becomes jerky. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable and the effect of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies may not be sufficiently exerted.

According to the configuration of the means 20, a free shaft joint connects the shaft portion rotated by the rotation drive mechanism and the adjacent shaft portion.

As a result, since the shaft portion rotated by the rotation drive mechanism and the adjacent shaft portion are connected by a universal shaft joint, the shaft portions that cannot be rotated by the rotation drive mechanism are adjacent to each other. Since the part is not connected by the universal shaft joint, the rotation is transmitted from both sides to the decorative body sandwiched between the two decorative bodies whose shaft is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the decorative body from being jerky. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the respective decorative bodies can be rotated at substantially the same time without discomfort, so that the effect of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies can be sufficiently exerted. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 21: In the configuration of means 19 or means 20
"The rotation drive mechanism is
A bevel gear-shaped rotary gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body, and
A bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion that meshes with the rotary gear from the rear side is provided at the front end, and a transmission gear member that is rotatably attached to the shutter around an axis extending forward and backward, and a transmission gear member.
The transmission gear member is rotated by the drive of the rotation driving means, and is provided with a transmission mechanism attached to the shutter. "

Here, the "transmission mechanism" includes a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion provided at the rear end of the transmission gear member and an operating rack gear extending in a predetermined direction to mesh with the driven gear portion. , With a drive rack that is slidably attached to the base and slid by the drive of a rotary drive means "," with a spur gear-like driven gear section provided at the rear end of the transmission gear member , A spur gear-shaped drive gear that is rotated by the drive of a rotary drive means, and at least a spur gear-shaped drive gear that is rotatably attached to the base by transmitting rotation by meshing from the drive gear to the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member. "One with one transmission gear", "A driven pulley provided at the rear end of the transmission gear member, a drive pulley rotated by a rotary drive means, and wound around the drive pulley and the driven pulley. A belt equipped with a belt, etc. ", etc. can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 21, the rotary drive mechanism has a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body and a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion that meshes with the rotary gear from the rear end at the front end. It is provided with a transmission gear member that is rotatably attached to the shutter around an axis extending forward and backward, and a transmission mechanism that is attached to the shutter by rotating the transmission gear member by driving a rotary drive means. It is something like that.

As a result, a rotary drive mechanism for rotating the shaft portion of the decorative body by driving from the rotary drive means is provided with a rotary gear attached to the shaft portion and a transmission gear member provided with a transmission gear portion that meshes with the rotary gear from the rear side. Since the transmission gear member is composed of a transmission mechanism that is rotated by driving from a rotation drive means, the rotation drive mechanism can be embodied, and a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects and effects can be provided. Can be done.

Further, a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear is attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body extending parallel to the surface of the shutter, and the bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion is meshed from the rear side of the rotary gear to extend the transmission gear member back and forth. Since the transmission gear member is made to be rotatable around the shaft and the drive from the rotation drive means is transmitted to the transmission gear member to rotate, the gear or pulley for transmitting the rotation is used as the transmission mechanism. Can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth, so that the depth (thickness) in the front-back direction of the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, in a gaming machine having a limited depth, it is possible to easily arrange a plurality of decorative objects on the front side of the main effect display means, the unit base, the swivel table, and the shutter, and the gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. It can be easily embodied.

Further, as described above, since the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of decorative bodies can be relatively increased, and a plurality of decorations can be made relatively large. The decoration can be made to stand out. Alternatively, a plurality of decorative bodies can be arranged even at a position having a narrow depth, and the degree of freedom in arrangement (degree of freedom of movement) of the plurality of decorative bodies (shutters) can be increased.

Means 22: In the configuration of Means 21
"The transmission gear member is
A spur gear-shaped driven gear section is further provided at the rear end, and
The transmission mechanism
A rod-shaped drive rack that includes an actuating rack gear that meshes with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member, is slidably attached to the shutter along the surface of the shutter, and is slid by the rotary drive means. It is characterized by having "have".

Here, examples of the rod-shaped "drive rack" include "a linearly extending one", "an arc-shaped extending one", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 22, the transmission gear member is further provided with a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion at the rear end, and then the transmission mechanism is engaged with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member. It is provided with a rod-shaped drive rack that is slidably attached to the shutter along the surface of the shutter and is slid by a rotary drive means.

As a result, when the rod-shaped drive rack is slid along the surface of the shutter by the rotary drive means, the transmission gear member can be rotated via the driven gear portion that meshes with the operating rack gear of the drive rack. The decorative body can be rotated together with the shaft portion via the rotating gear that meshes with the transmission gear portion of the transmission gear member, and a gaming machine that exerts the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

Further, since the drive of the rotary drive means is transmitted to the transmission gear member side by the rod-shaped drive rack, the rotary drive means can be selected from a plurality of decorative bodies by appropriately selecting the length of the drive rack. It can be placed in an inconspicuous position at a distance from each other, and a plurality of decorative objects can be relatively conspicuous.

Means 23: In any one configuration from Means 1 to Means 22
"A rotating member that is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at a predetermined position of the swivel table and that rotates to move a pair of the shutters between the approaching position and the separating position. ,
An action pulley that rotates integrally with the rotating action member,
A drive pulley rotated by the opening / closing drive means,
It further includes an endless annular belt wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley. "

Here, as the "rotating action member", "a member having a revolving action part and moving (moving) the shutter by the revolution of the action part", "rotating (moving) the shutter directly or indirectly". "The one that has a pinion gear that meshes with the rack gear provided in the shutter, and the one that moves (operates) the shutter by the rotation of the pinion gear" and the like.

Further, examples of the "belt" include a "toothed belt", a "flat belt", a "V belt", a "round belt", a "chain", and the like. The "action pulley" and "drive pulley" may be any one corresponding to the type of belt, and when the belt is a chain, the pulley may be a sprocket.

Further, as the "belt", "a relay pulley is provided between the action pulley and the drive pulley, and then the action belt wound around the action pulley and the relay pulley, and the drive pulley and the relay are provided. "Composed of a drive belt wound around a belt", "Composed of a working pulley and a drive pulley and a single belt wound around", "Multiple between the working pulley and the drive pulley" The action belt wound around the action pulley and the relay pulley close to it, and the drive belt wrapped around the drive pulley and the relay belt close to it, after being provided with the relay pulley of It is composed of a relay belt wound around one relay pulley. "

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-146881), when a driving means (driving motor) is arranged at a position away from an effect movable member having a predetermined movement, a plurality of driving motors are driven. Since the drive is transmitted to the effect movable member via the gear of, if the drive is transmitted from the drive motor to the effect movable member with a small number of gears, the diameter of one gear must be increased. It is necessary to secure a wide width (space) between the drive motor and the effect movable member, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the effect movable member is lowered due to the space. On the other hand, if the width between the drive motor and the effect movable member is narrowed, the diameter of one gear becomes smaller, so the drive must be transmitted by many gears (components) for assembly. There was a problem that took time and effort.

According to the configuration of the means 23, the pair of shutters are rotatably attached to the gaming machine around an axis extending back and forth at a predetermined position of the swivel table, and by rotating the pair of shutters are moved between the approaching position and the separating position, respectively. A rotating action member, an action pulley that rotates integrally with the rotation action member, a drive pulley that is rotated by an opening / closing drive means, and an endless annular belt that is wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley are provided. It is a thing.

As a result, when the drive pulley is rotated by the opening / closing drive means for moving each shutter, the action pulley is rotated by the belt wound around the drive pulley, and the rotating action member is moved together with the action pulley. The shutter will rotate, and the shutter corresponding to the rotation of the rotating member will move between the approaching position and the separating position. In this way, the drive from the opening / closing drive means is transmitted to the rotating action member via the belt wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley to move the shutter, so that the shutter is opened / closed at a position away from the shutter. Since the shutter can be moved even if the driving means is arranged, it is not necessary to arrange the opening / closing driving means in the vicinity of the shutter, and it is possible to easily secure a space around the shutter. Therefore, the space secured around the shutter makes it possible to relatively lengthen the moving distance of the shutter, making it easier to open and close the front side of the effect display means, and also to fill the space. It is possible to make the decorative body relatively large and conspicuous, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative body, and it is possible to entertain the directing operation by the decorative body and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, since a belt is used for transmitting rotation from the opening / closing driving means to the rotating member, and the belt has flexibility, a plurality of belts are used as in the conventional technique (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-146881). By reducing the diameter of the drive pulley and action pulley, and by guiding the belt between the drive pulley and the action pulley by a guide roller, as compared with the case where transmission is performed via the gear of The distance between the outward path side and the return path side can be narrowed, and the width between the opening / closing driving means and the corresponding shutter (the width of the path for transmitting rotation) can be narrowed. In addition, since a belt is used to transmit rotation, a relay pulley for relaying rotation between a plurality of belts, a guide roller for guiding the belt, and the like are appropriately arranged to form a belt between the drive pulley and the action pulley. The extending path can be various paths with a simple structure such as a dogleg shape, a U shape, a C shape, an L shape, an S shape, a curved shape, a zigzag shape, and the like. From these things, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the opening / closing driving means with respect to the shutter. Therefore, the pair of shutters that open and close can be arranged at a position (in front of the swivel table) that was difficult to arrange with a conventional gaming machine, so that the effect of the shutters can be fully exhibited or enhanced. The movable effect of the pair of shutters can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the rotation from the opening / closing driving means is transmitted via the belt, and the increase of the components between the opening / closing driving means and the corresponding shutter can be suppressed. Therefore, the shutter and the opening / closing of the present configuration can be suppressed. Even if a driving means or the like is provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine, and it is possible to easily provide the gaming machine having this configuration.

Further, since the rotation from the opening / closing driving means is transmitted via the belt, the swivel table is rotated, and even if the moving direction of the shutter changes, the rotating member for moving the shutter can be used. The rotation from the opening / closing driving means can be transmitted without any problem, and the shutter can be reliably moved regardless of the turning position of the shutter by the turning table.

Means 24: In the configuration of means 23,
"The belt is
It is characterized in that it "extends along the outer circumference of the swivel table".

According to the configuration of the means 24, the belt extends along the outer circumference of the swivel table.

As a result, the belt wound around the action pulley and the drive pulley is extended along the outer circumference of the swivel table, so that the opening / closing drive means for rotating the drive pulley around which the belt is wound swivels. Since it is arranged near the outer periphery of the table, the opening / closing driving means can be arranged at a position where it does not get in the way in the front view game area, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the belt wound around the action pulley and the drive pulley is extended along the outer circumference of the swivel table, the rotating action member rotated by the action pulley around which the belt is wound swivels. It will be placed near the outer circumference of the table. That is, since the rotating member for moving the shutter can be arranged near the outer periphery of the swivel table, the rotating member is placed at a position where it is difficult to block the effect image of the main effect display means arranged behind the swirl table. The game is arranged so that the shutter can be moved between the approaching position and the separating position, and the effect image displayed on the main effect display means can be visually recognized in a good state, and the above-mentioned effect is achieved. The machine can be embodied.

Means 25: In the configuration of means 23 or means 24,
"It is rotatably attached to the swivel table between the drive pulley and the action pulley and further comprises at least one relay pulley.
The belt is
An endless annular working belt wound around the working pulley and the relay pulley close to the working pulley,
It is characterized in that it is composed of at least an endless annular drive belt wound around the drive pulley and the relay pulley close to the drive pulley. "

Here, the "relay pulley" means that two pulleys that rotate integrally can be arranged in a row in the axial direction, and two belts having different extending directions can be wound around the pulleys. When a plurality of relay pulleys are provided, it is desirable to include a relay belt wound around two relay pulleys that are close to each other in addition to the working belt and the drive belt.

By the way, when the belt is bent and extended in a dogleg shape, a U shape, a C shape, etc. by guiding the belt by the guide roller, the belt is guided by the guide roller to the belt. Since the lateral force acts, the belt is more likely to come off the pulley and guide roller than when the belt is simply wrapped between the two pulleys, and the belt comes off and the corresponding shutter does not move. The game may be interrupted, and some players may become frustrated and lose their interest in the game.

According to the configuration of the means 25, the gaming machine is provided with at least one relay pulley rotatably attached to the swivel table between the drive pulley and the action pulley, and then the belt is attached to the action pulley. At least the endless annular working belt wound around the relay pulley close to the working pulley and the endless annular drive belt wound around the drive pulley and the relay pulley close to the drive pulley are configured. It is a thing.

As a result, a relay pulley is provided between the action pulley and the drive pulley, and the belt is wound between the action pulley and the relay pulley. As shown in the above, it is composed of multiple belts, and each belt is wound in sequence between the two pulleys so that the rotation is transmitted from the drive pulley to the action pulley via the multiple belts. Compared to the case where one belt is wound around the drive pulley and the drive pulley, the rate at which the belt extends due to the tension applied to the belt when the drive pulley is rotated can be relatively reduced, and the belt extends from the pulley. It can be suppressed from coming off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the corresponding shutter from being stuck due to the belt coming off, so that the shutter can be reliably moved and the player can enjoy the movable effect of the shutter, which reduces the interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the relay pulley provided between the action pulley and the drive pulley is wound with a belt from each side to transmit the rotation, the relay pulley is a straight line connecting the action pulley and the drive pulley. By arranging it at a position different from the above, it is possible to make the path of the belt from the drive pulley to the action pulley various shapes such as dogleg, U-shape, C-shape, etc., and open and close. The rotation from the drive means (drive pulley) can be transmitted to the corresponding shutter (action pulley) by wrapping around via the relay pulley, and the degree of freedom in arranging the shutter on the front surface of the swivel table can be further increased. can. At this time, it is desirable that the belts extend linearly between the wound pulleys in each of the plurality of belts such as the working belt and the drive belt. As a result, since no lateral force acts on each belt, the belt can be made difficult to come off from the pulley, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Means 26: In any one configuration from means 23 to means 25,
"The rotating member is
It has an action part that moves the shutter between the approaching position and the separating position by revolving around an axis extending back and forth. "

Here, the "acting part" is "a columnar sliding pin slidably inserted into a slit (or groove) extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction provided in the corresponding shutter. "What is , "Those that can be engaged with the engaging portion provided in the corresponding shutter", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 26, the rotating acting member is provided with an acting portion that revolves around an axis extending back and forth to move the corresponding shutter between the approaching position and the separating position.

As a result, when the rotating acting member is rotated by the opening / closing driving means, the acting portion provided in the rotating acting member revolves, and the corresponding shutter is moved between the approaching position and the separating position by the revolving of the acting portion. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to embody a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned effects, and by increasing the orbital radius of the acting portion, the moving distance of the corresponding shutter can be made longer, and the shutter can be moved by the player. It is possible to entertain the production and suppress the decline in interest.

The working part is preferably a columnar pin (sliding pin). As a result, the shape of the rotating action member can be such that the connecting portion from the central portion that rotates integrally with the acting pulley to the acting portion extends in a rod shape. Therefore, by making the acting portion a groove, the connecting portion can be formed. Compared with the case where the shape is formed in a disk shape or a fan shape centered on the central portion, the rotating working member can be made as small as possible, and the rotating working member can be made inconspicuous and corresponding. When the shutter is moved to the separated position, it is possible to prevent a part of the rotating action member from unnecessarily protruding toward the front side of the main effect display means, and a part of the rotation action member protrudes from the main effect display means. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest by suppressing the production image from becoming difficult to see or the appearance in the game area from deteriorating.

Further, when the working part is a pin that slides in the slit provided in the shutter, when the shutter is moved to the approaching position or the separating position, the revolving working part passes through the dead center in the moving direction of the shutter. It is desirable to make contact with the end of the slit. As a result, when the movement direction of the shutter is not the horizontal direction but the diagonal direction or the vertical direction due to the rotation of the swivel table, a force that tries to move the shutter to the approach position side or the separation position side by the load of the shutter acts on the shutter. However, since the acting part comes into contact with the end of the slit to prevent the acting part from revolving, the movement of the shutter is restricted (locked) and the shutter moves freely due to the rotation of the swivel table. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, to entertain the production, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 27: In any one of the configurations from Means 23 to Means 26,
"The rotating member is
Each of the pair of shutters is located behind each of the shutters at the time of the separation position, and is near the center in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approach position and the separation position of the shutter. At the position of, the shutter is rotatably attached to the swivel table, and the shutter is moved by applying a force in the moving direction to the central portion of each of the shutters in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction. It is characterized in that it is "moved between the approaching position and the separating position".

Here, as the force acting on the central portion in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the shutter, "a plurality of forces act on both sides with the center in between, and the position where these forces are combined is the position of the shutter. "The one that becomes the central part", "the one that the force acts only on the central part of the shutter", and the like.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine provided with a pair of shutters that open and close the front side of the main effect display means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-108258), the upper end side (one end portion in the longitudinal direction) of the shutter extending vertically A force is applied to the side) to move the shutter to the left and right. When the shutter having such a configuration is attached to the swivel table and rotated, for example, when the swivel table is rotated by 45 degrees or 90 degrees and the moving direction of the shutter is oblique or vertical, the position of the center of gravity of the shutter and the position of the center of gravity of the shutter are determined. Since the position of one end of the shutter in the longitudinal direction on which the force for moving the shutter acts is significantly separated (shifted) in the horizontal direction, the shutter may be moved depending on the structure that supports the shutter so that it can be moved. If a force is applied to one end in the longitudinal direction in order to move the shutter, the shutter may be tilted with respect to the correct posture, and the shutter may move while rattling or the shutter may not move.

According to the configuration of the means 27, the rotating action member is placed behind each shutter when the pair of shutters are in the separated positions, and in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position in the shutters. At each position near the center of the shutter, it is rotatably attached to the swivel table, and then a force in the moving direction is applied to the central part in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of each shutter. Is moved between the approaching position and the separating position.

As a result, the rotating member for moving the corresponding shutter is arranged near the center in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the moving direction) on the rear side of the shutter at the time of separation position on the swivel table. When moving the shutter between the approaching position and the separating position, a force is applied to the central part of the shutter in the longitudinal direction to move the shutter, so the direction of movement of the shutter is changed by the rotation of the swivel table. Therefore, even if the shutter is moved, the force for moving the shutter acts near the position of the center of gravity of the shutter, so that the shutter can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the shutter can be moved smoothly.

Therefore, the pair of shutters can be smoothly moved between the approaching position and the separating position without rattling, regardless of the orientation of the pair of shutters due to the rotation of the swivel table. A pair of shutters (and multiple decorative objects attached to the front of the shutter) can be moved without giving a sense of discomfort to the person, and the movement of the pair of shutters (multiple decorative objects) can be enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the pair of shutters can be smoothly moved regardless of the rotation position of the swivel table, there is a problem that the shutters cannot move between the approaching position and the separating position. Since it can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming frustrated and deteriorating the interest due to the interruption of the game.

Means 28: In a gaming machine
"The game area where the game is played and
A main effect display means capable of displaying an effect image, which is arranged in the center of the game area in the front view and has an outer shape of a horizontally long quadrangle in the front view.
A circle that is arranged in the game area on the front side of the main effect display means in a front view and has a larger diameter than the main effect display means and a smaller diameter than the game area around the main effect display means. A swivel table that is formed in a shape and has a through-hole that is larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a swivel gear that is formed along the outer peripheral edge.
A unit base that is arranged between the swivel table and the main effect display means and has an opening that is larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrates back and forth.
It is arranged on the front surface of the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A plurality of guide rollers rotatably attached to the unit base around an axis extending back and forth with the center of the outer circumference of the circle as the center of rotation.
Front view of the unit base A spur gear-shaped swivel pinion gear that is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at a position outside the swivel table and meshes with the swivel gear.
The swivel table is rotated by rotating the swivel pinion gear according to a game state that changes as the game is played in the game area, and the swivel drive means attached to the unit base and the swivel drive means.
The main effect display means is opposed to each other with the rotation center of the swivel table in between, and is located at an approach position close to the rotation center and located in front of the main effect display means and away from the rotation center. It is attached to the front surface of the swivel table so that it can move independently from the separation position located on the outside, and has a length in a direction perpendicular to the movement direction connecting the approach position and the separation position. However, a pair of shutters formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the main effect display means,
Back and forth on the swivel table at each position of the pair of shutters behind the shutters when they are separated from each other and near the center in the direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the shutters. Each of them is rotatably attached around an extended axis, and by revolving, a force in the moving direction acts on a central portion of each of the shutters in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction to bring the shutter closer to the shutter. A rotating action member having an action part that moves between the position and the separation position,
An action pulley that rotates integrally at the center of rotation of each of the rotating action members,
An opening / closing driving means that is attached to the swivel table at positions apart from the pair of shutters and is driven according to the gaming state.
A drive pulley that is rotated by each of the open / close drive means,
Rotatably attached to the swivel table between the respective drive pulleys and the working pulleys, at least one relay pulley and
An endless annular working belt wound around the working pulley and the relay pulley close to the working pulley, and an endless annular drive belt wound around the drive pulley and the relay pulley close to the drive pulley. An endless annular belt that is wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley so as to extend along the outer circumference of the swivel table.
An opening / closing regulating means that regulates the movement of the pair of shutters,
It is provided with a three-dimensionally formed decorative body body and a shaft portion coaxially projecting outward from the back-facing portion of the decorative body body, and the axial core of each of the shaft portions is described above. When the pair of shutters are in the approaching position, they are arranged on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutters, and the shafts are adjacent to each other. In a row, each of the shafts is rotatably attached to the front of each of the pair of shutters, and a plurality of translucent decorative bodies.
A decorative substrate attached to each of the pair of shutters and provided with light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies.
It is attached to the shaft portion on the side adjacent to the shaft portion of the other decoration body among the two shaft portions of the decoration body which are arranged every other one with respect to the plurality of the decoration bodies. A bevel gear-shaped rotary gear and a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion that meshes with the rotary gear from the rear side are provided at the front end, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion is provided at the rear end. The shutter is provided with a transmission gear member rotatably attached to the shutter around an extended axis and an operating rack gear that meshes with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member so as to be slidable along the surface of the shutter. A rotary drive mechanism with a transmission mechanism having a rod-shaped drive rack mounted on the
The drive rack in the transmission mechanism of the rotation drive mechanism is slid according to the gaming state, and the rotation drive means attached to each of the pair of shutters.
The shaft portion adjacent to the shaft portion to which the rotary gear is attached is connected to each other so as to be rotationally transmissible, and the circumferential direction of each of the connected shaft portions is separated from the center. A pair of arm portions protruding from the ends of the respective shaft portions with the same gap and having a width in the circumferential direction narrower than the gap, and a pair of the arm portions in one of the shaft portions. In a state where the arm portion of the other shaft portion is inserted into each of the gaps, the arm portion projects from the inside surrounded by the four arm portions in a rod shape between the arm portions. A universal shaft joint consisting of a spider with four transmission parts,
A decorative cover that is attached to the front surface of the shutter and covers the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the front surface side of the rotary drive means.
The shutters approach the rotation center of the swivel table at right angles to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separation position where the pair of shutters move, and when the pair of shutters are at the separation positions, respectively. It is possible to move between a protruding position located in front of the main effect display means and a retreating position in which a part of the outside of the main effect display means projects outward from the outer circumference of the swivel table away from the center of rotation. Along with being attached to the front surface of the swivel table, it has a haunting rack gear extending in the hauling direction connecting the protruding position and the retracting position, and the display screen is smaller than the main effect display means. Sub-effect display means that can display images and
A spur gear-shaped slide gear that meshes with the infested rack gear of the sub-effect display means and can rotate around an axis extending back and forth.
By rotating the slide gear according to the gaming state, the sub-effect display means is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position, and the haunting driving means attached to the swivel table
A plurality of portions of the unit base outside the outer circumference of the swivel table extend forward from the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the swivel table, and each of the plurality of guide rollers is rotated. It is composed of a plurality of columnar guide pins that can support the swivel table, and when the swivel table is in a specific swivel position, the rotation of the swivel table is restricted by contacting the sub-effect display means at the retracted position. It is characterized in that it is equipped with a turning control means.

According to the configuration of the means 28, the game machine is arranged in the game area where the game is performed and in the center of the game area in the front view, and the outer shape of the front view is formed in a horizontally long quadrangle. The main effect display means capable of displaying and the main effect display means are arranged in the game area in front view in front of the main effect display means, and the outer circumference is larger than the main effect display means centering on the main effect display means. A swivel table that is formed in a circular shape with a smaller diameter than the main effect display means, has a through hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction larger than the display screen of the main effect display means, and has a swivel gear formed along the outer peripheral edge. , A unit base that is placed between the swivel table and the main effect display means and has an opening that is larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrates back and forth, and a swivel table in front of the unit base. It is arranged at intervals along the outer circumference of the unit, and is rotatably attached around an axis that extends back and forth. A plurality of guide rollers rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward with the center as the center of rotation, and rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward at a position outside the front view turning table on the unit base. The swirl table is rotated by rotating the spur gear-shaped swivel pinion gear that meshes with the swivel gear and the swivel pinion gear according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. The swivel drive means attached to the base and the swivel table face each other with the rotation center in between, and are close to the rotation center and away from the approach position located in front of the main effect display means and the rotation center. It is attached to the front of the swivel table so that it can move independently from the separation position located outside the main effect display means, and is in the direction perpendicular to the movement direction connecting the approach position and the separation position. A pair of shutters whose length is longer than the short side of the outer shape of the main effect display means, and behind each shutter when the pair of shutters are at right-angled positions, and in the direction of movement in the shutter. On the other hand, at each position near the center in the perpendicular direction, they are rotatably attached to the swivel table around the axis extending back and forth, and by revolving, the center in the direction perpendicular to the movement direction of each shutter. A force in the moving direction acts on the part to move the shutter to the approaching position and the separating position. A rotating action member having an action part to move between the two, an action pulley that rotates integrally at the center of rotation of each of the rotation action members, and a position away from a pair of shutters on the swivel table are attached to each other. , An open / close drive means that is driven according to the gaming state, a drive pulley that is rotated by each open / close drive means, and rotatably attached to a swivel table between each drive pulley and action pulley, at least. One relay pulley, an endless annular working belt wound around the working pulley and a relay pulley close to the working pulley, and an endless annular drive belt wound around the drive pulley and the relay pulley close to the drive pulley. It consists of at least an endless annular belt wound around a drive pulley and an action pulley so as to extend along the outer circumference of the swivel table, an opening / closing regulating means for restricting the movement of a pair of shutters, and a three-dimensional structure. It is provided with a decorative body body formed in the above and a shaft portion coaxially projecting outward from the back-facing portion of the decorative body main body, and the axial core of each shaft portion is parallel to the front surface of the shutter. When the pair of shutters are in close positions, they are arranged in an arc around the center of the game area so that the shafts are adjacent to each other. The shaft is rotatably attached to the front of each of the pair of shutters, and is attached to a plurality of translucent ornaments and to each of the pair of shutters, rather than multiple ornaments. A decorative substrate having a light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front, and a decorative body other than the two shafts of the decorative body arranged every other for a plurality of decorative bodies. The spur gear is equipped with a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear attached to the shaft on the side adjacent to the shaft, and a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear that meshes with the rotary gear from the rear side at the front end. It is equipped with a driven gear part in the shape of a rear end, and is equipped with a transmission gear member that is rotatably attached to the shutter around an axis extending forward and backward, and an operating rack gear that meshes with the driven gear part of the transmission gear member. A rotary drive mechanism having a transmission mechanism having a rod-shaped drive rack attached to the shutter so as to be slidable along the surface of the shutter, and a drive rack in the transmission mechanism of the rotary drive mechanism are slid according to a gaming state. , The rotary drive means attached to each of the pair of shutters and the shaft part to which the rotary gear is attached and the shaft part adjacent to each other are connected so as to be able to transmit rotation to each other. In each of the connected shafts, the same gap is formed in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center and protrudes from the end of each shaft, and the width in the circumferential direction is narrower than the gap. Inside surrounded by four arm parts, with the arm parts of the other shaft part inserted into the gaps between the pair of arm parts and the pair of arm parts on one shaft part. A free shaft joint consisting of a spider having four transmission parts protruding from each of the arm parts in a rod shape, and a free shaft joint attached to the front surface of the shutter. And the rotation of the swivel table when the decorative cover covering the front side of the rotation driving means and the pair of shutters are in the detached positions in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the detached position where the pair of shutters move. Move between a protruding position located in front of the main effect display means approaching the center and a retreating position partly protruding outside the outer circumference of the swivel table away from the center of rotation. It is possible to mount it on the front of the swivel table and have a haunting rack gear that extends in the haunting direction connecting the protruding position and the retracting position, so the display screen is smaller than the main staging display means and the staging image can be displayed. The sub-effect display means that can be displayed and the spur gear-shaped slide gear that is engaged with the haunting rack gear of the sub-effect display means and can rotate around the axis extending back and forth, and the slide gear according to the game state By rotating the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position, and the sub-effect display means is swiveled at the infestation driving means attached to the swivel table and a portion outside the outer circumference of the swivel table in the unit base. It is composed of a plurality of columnar guide pins that extend forward from the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference of the table and rotatably support a part of the plurality of guide rollers. When the table is in a specific turning position, it is provided with a turning regulating means for restricting the rotation of the turning table by abutting on the sub-effect display means in the retracted position.

As a result, in the front view game area, the rotation stop position of the swivel table is set to the specific swivel position, and the pair of shutters attached to the front surface of the swivel table are set to the separated positions, and the sub By setting the effect display means in the retracted position, the display screen of the main effect display means arranged on the rear side of the unit base is passed through the opening of the unit base and the through hole of the swivel table between the pair of shutters. , It can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in a good state, and the player can be entertained by the effect image by the main effect display means. In this state, since the sub-effect display means is located adjacent to the main effect display means in the front view, the effect image in which the main effect display means and the sub-effect display means form one screen. By displaying, a large effect image that combines the main effect display means and the sub effect display means can be shown to the player, and the player can be surprised and entertained by the powerful effect image. Further, since the pair of shutters are located on both outer sides of the effect display means, it is possible to decorate both outer sides of the main effect display means with a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front of each of the pair of shutters. It can be made into a gaming machine that can improve the appearance in the gaming area and strongly attract the attention of the player.

In this state, when the drive pulley is rotated by the opening / closing drive means according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area, the relay pulley is rotated by the drive belt wound around the drive pulley. , The action pulley is rotated by the action belt wound around the relay pulley, and turns together with the action pulley at a position near the center in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the shutter behind each shutter in the separated position. The rotating working member rotatably attached to the table rotates, and the working part of the rotating working member revolves, and the corresponding shutter moves from the detached position to the approaching position due to the revolving of the working part. Become. In this way, when the pair of shutters is moved from the separated position to the approaching position by the opening / closing driving means, the pair of shutters are each located in front of the display screen of the main effect display means to block the effect image, and a plurality of shutters are blocked. Since the decoration moves to the center side of the front view game area and changes its position, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to a pair of shutters or multiple decorations attached to each shutter. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that there is something good.

Since each of these pair of shutters can be moved separately between the approaching position and the separating position, by moving only one of them, only one side of the main effect display means in the left-right direction can be moved in the up-down direction. Show the player the effect of hiding only one side or only one side in the diagonal direction so that the whole can be seen, or move one shutter to the approaching position and then move the other shutter to the approaching position. It is possible to show the player an effect that obscures the main effect display means. Then, even if the shutters are moved as described above, the display screen of the sub-effect display means adjacent to the main effect display means is not blocked by the pair of shutters, so that the sub-effect display means for the player. It is possible to show the effect image of the above, and to entertain the effect image by the sub effect display means. Further, if one of the pair of shutters is moved to the approaching position side, the sub-effect display means cannot move from the retracted position to the protruding position side, so that the sub-effect display means does not move arbitrarily. , You can enjoy the production using shutters and multiple decorative objects without any discomfort.

Further, when the rotary driving means attached to each shutter is driven according to the game state, every other decorative body arranged in an arc shape on the front surface of each shutter is arranged. A transmission gear member having a transmission gear portion that meshes with a rotary gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body is rotated via a transmission mechanism such as a drive rack, and the rotary gear is attached. The decorative body (decorative body) having the shaft protruding through the shaft is rotated about the axis of the shaft, and at the same time, adjacent to the shaft to which the rotating gear is attached. Since the existing shaft is connected by a free shaft joint so that rotation can be transmitted, the rotation of the shaft can be transmitted even if the direction in which the shaft extends is different, and the shaft is adjacent via the free shaft joint. The decorative body is also rotating. In this way, the drive from the rotation drive means is transmitted to each of the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row via the rotation drive mechanism, and the rotation is transmitted via the adjacent shaft portion. Since the decorations in between are rotated, a plurality of decorations having different directions in which the rotation axis extends by being arranged in an arc shape by one rotation driving means can be rotated at the same time by the rotation driving means. At the same time, since the axial cores of the respective shafts extend along the surface of the shutter, when a plurality of decorative bodies are stopped at appropriate rotation angles, they face the front of the three-dimensionally formed decorative body main body. The part is changed, and the appearance of the decorative body seen from the player side can be changed.

Further, according to the game state, the slide gear is rotated by the haunting drive means, and the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position via the haunting rack gear meshing with the slide gear. Is located in front of the display screen of the main effect display means and blocks the effect image of the main effect display means, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect image of the sub effect display means. You can entertain the production image of. Further, when the effect image that constitutes one screen by the main effect display means and the sub effect display means is displayed, if the sub effect display means is moved from the backward position to the protruding position, the display screen becomes smaller. The effect can be shown to the player, and when the sub-effect display means is moved from the protruding position to the backward position, the player can see the effect that the display screen becomes large. If this sub-effect display means is moved to the protruding position side from the backward position, the pair of shutters cannot be moved from the detached position to the approaching position side by the sub-effect display means, so that the shutters move arbitrarily. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and entertain the player using the sub-effect display means.

Further, when the swivel pinion gear is rotated by the swivel drive means according to the game state, the swivel gear meshing with the swivel pinion gear rotatably supports the unit base around an axis extending back and forth to the front side. The swivel table is rotated. The outside of this swivel table is provided with a plurality of guide pins as swivel control means extending forward from the unit base at intervals along the outer circumference, and is sub only when the swivel table is in a specific swivel position. Since the effect display means can be moved to the retracted position and the rotation of the swivel table is restricted by the rotation regulating means when the sub effect display means is in the retracted position, the sub effect display is required to rotate the swivel table. It is necessary to move the means from the retracted position to the protruding position side to some extent. Therefore, when the swivel table rotates when the sub-effect display means is in the retracted position, the sub-effect display means moves in the direction of the rotation center (protruding position) of the swivel table and then rotates. Therefore, the movement makes it possible to attract the player's attention to the sub-effect display means and make it difficult to overlook the rotation of the sub-effect display means by the swivel table. It can surely entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

Then, as the swivel table rotates, the pair of shutters and sub-effect display means attached to the swivel table and the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters are centered on the swivel table. That is, the whole turns around the axis extending back and forth around the center of the effect display means, and a pair of shutters, a sub effect display means, and a plurality of decorative objects are swirled around the main effect display means. Can be swiveled. Therefore, it is possible to change the position in which a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row in the game area in various ways, such as on the left side or right side, on the upper side or lower side, or on the diagonally upper side or diagonally lower side. The decoration (appearance) in the game area can be changed, and the machine can be a game machine that can strongly attract the attention of the player. Further, by stopping the rotation of the swivel table at various specific swivel positions and moving the sub-effect display means to the retracted position, the moving direction of the pair of shutters that move between the approaching position and the separating position can be changed to the left-right direction. Since it can be changed according to a specific turning position such as in the vertical direction or diagonal direction, the main effect display means can be opened and closed from various directions by a pair of shutters, and the player is less likely to get bored. be able to. Further, by rotating the swivel table, the position where the sub-effect display means is arranged with respect to the main effect display means can be moved to the left or right side of the main effect display means, above or below, or diagonally above or diagonally below. It can be changed in various ways, such as on the side.

In this way, the rotation driving means rotates the plurality of decorative bodies, the opening / closing driving means opens and closes the pair of shutters together with the plurality of decorative bodies, the haunting driving means moves the sub-effect display means, and the rotation is performed. A plurality of decorative objects can be rotated together with the sub-effect display means and a pair of shutters by the driving means. Therefore, a plurality of decorative objects can be rotated together with the pair of shutters by the driving means. , It is possible to show a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a multi-stage effect by sequentially performing these movements and effect images. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The production by these will be described in detail. For example, when a specific turning position in which the moving direction of the pair of shutters is horizontal is provided, the rotation of the turning table is stopped at the specific turning position, and the sub-effect display means is moved to the backward position. The moving direction of the pair of shutters (the direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position) is the horizontal direction, and the player can be shown the effect of opening and closing the main effect display means from the left and right directions. Further, in this state, by setting the pair of shutters in the separated positions, the sub-effect display means that moves between the retracted position and the protruding position is located between the upper side and the front side of the main effect display means, or the lower side. It is possible to show an effect that moves in the vertical direction, such as between the front side and the front side, and display an effect image that constitutes one screen with the main effect display means and the sub effect display means. In this case, the sub-effect display means can show the player an effect in which the main effect display means spreads upward or downward.

Further, when a specific turning position in which the moving direction of the pair of shutters is vertical is provided, the rotation of the turning table is stopped at the specific turning position, and the sub-effect display means is moved to the backward position. The movement direction of the pair of shutters is vertical, and the player can be shown the effect of opening and closing the main effect display means from the vertical direction. Further, in this state, by setting the pair of shutters in the separated positions, the sub-effect display means can be moved in the left-right direction, such as between the left side and the front side of the main effect display means, or between the right side and the front side. In addition to being able to show the effect of moving to, when the effect image that constitutes one screen is displayed by the main effect display means and the sub effect display means, the main effect display means can be used by the sub effect display means. It is possible to show the player an effect that spreads to the left or right side.

Further, when a specific turning position in which the moving direction of the pair of shutters is oblique is provided, the rotation of the turning table is stopped at the specific turning position, and the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position. The movement direction of the pair of shutters extends to the upper left or the upper right, and the player can be shown the effect of opening and closing the main effect display means from an oblique direction. Further, in this state, by setting the pair of shutters in the separated positions, the sub-effect display means can be located between the diagonally upper side and the front side of the main effect display means, or between the diagonally lower side and the front side. , It is possible to show an effect that moves in an oblique direction, and when an effect image that constitutes one screen is displayed by the main effect display means and the sub effect display means, the main effect display means is used. It is possible to show the player an effect that the display means spreads diagonally upward or diagonally downward.

In this way, depending on the specific rotation position that stops the rotation of the swivel table, the main effect display means can be opened and closed from various directions by a pair of shutters, and the sub effect display means can be arranged in various directions with respect to the main effect display means. Therefore, the pair of shutters in the separated position and the sub-effect display means in the retracted position are rotated by the swivel table, so that the player can be determined by whether or not the rotation of the swivel table is stopped at which specific swivel position. In addition to being exciting, the player is also thrilled by whether or not the pair of shutters move to the approaching position after the swivel table has stopped rotating, or whether or not the sub-effect display means moves to the protruding position. Can be done.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position side and the rotation restriction by the turning restricting means is released, the sub-effect display means is swiveled around the main effect display means by the swivel table. Show the player an effect in which the effect image (for example, another character) displayed on the sub-effect display means is rotating around the effect image (for example, a certain character) displayed on the effect display means. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the production that has not been seen in the conventional gaming machines. Further, when the swivel table is rotated while the sub-effect display means is moved to the protruding position side so that the regulation by the turn control means is released, one screen is displayed by the main effect display means and the sub-effect display means. When the effect image to be configured is displayed, the outer shape of the display screen by the main effect display means and the sub effect display means changes due to the rotation of the sub effect display means, so that the player It is possible to make the effect image pay attention to the effect, and to make the effect using the main effect display means and the sub effect display means more enjoyable.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved to the protruding position side and the regulation by the turning regulating means is released, and the sub-effect display means is moved to the protruding position while rotating the swivel table, the sub-effect display means is moved to the center side. It is possible to show the player the effect of moving in an arc shape toward the player. Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved to the protruding position while reciprocally rotating the swivel table within a predetermined turning angle range, the player is given an effect that the sub-effect display means moves in a zigzag manner toward the center side. I can show you. When moving the sub-effect display means to the protruding position, the swivel table can be rotated to an arbitrary position and then moved toward the protruding position. Therefore, the pattern of the movement (effect) of the sub-effect display means moving to the protruding position can be diversified, and the player can be less likely to get bored. Then, when the sub-effect display means is moved to the protruding position, the sub-effect display means approaches the rotation center of the swivel table, so that the sub-effect display means is moved to the front side of the main effect display means. The effect image displayed on the effect display means can be blocked, and the player's interest can be attracted to the effect image displayed on the sub effect display means to entertain the effect image. Further, since the sub-effect display means can be moved from the protruding position to the backward position side by moving in the opposite direction to the above, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of effects.

Further, the pair of shutters can each move separately between the approaching position and the separating position when the turning table stops rotating at the specific turning position and the sub-effect table means moves to the retracting position. Therefore, by moving only one side, only one side of the main effect display means, only one side in the vertical direction, and only one side in the diagonal direction can be hidden or the whole can be seen. It is possible to show the player the effect of moving one shutter to the approaching position and then moving the other shutter to the approaching position to make the main effect display means invisible. Therefore, after the swivel table has stopped rotating at the specific swivel position, the player is excited by whether only one of the pair of shutters moves or both of them move in a state where the sub-effect table means moves to the retracted position. In addition to being able to do this, the player can be excited by whether or not one shutter moves and then the other shutter moves.

Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters swiveled by the swivel table, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the decorations that can be seen from the front of the plurality of decorative bodies. Can be changed (changed), the appearance in the game area can be greatly changed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and it is difficult to get bored, and the appearance in the game area can be changed. It is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player, and to make it easier for the player who is selecting the game machine to be played to select the main game machine. Further, since the plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters, the effect of the shutter movement as described above is the overall effect of the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surface of the shutters. It can be said that it is an effect, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the effect of the movement of the shutter described above.

Therefore, whether or not the sub-effect display means moves, whether or not the swivel table rotates, whether or not a pair of shutters move, and whether or not a plurality of decorative objects rotate, and so on. Since branch points of various effects can be provided in the flow of a series of effects, the player can be thrilled and thrilled at each branch point, and the player can be made less bored and the game can be played. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player's game and suppress the decline in the player's interest.

Further, when performing the above-mentioned effect, the effect image according to the rotation of the swivel table, the movement of the sub-effect display means, the movement of the pair of shutters, and the rotation of a plurality of decorative objects is used as the main effect display means. It may be displayed in the sub-effect display means. For example, an effect image in which a plurality of decorative objects are rotated around the main effect display means by a predetermined character, and a sub effect display means is moved between a protruding position and a backward position by a predetermined character. A production image, a production image in which a plurality of decorations are moved between an approaching position and a separation position by a predetermined character, or a predetermined character is moved by rotation or movement of a plurality of decorations. By displaying such an effect image, etc. on the main effect display means, etc., it is possible to show the player a collaborative effect between the movable effect and the effect image, further entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. be able to.

In this way, the movement of the pair of shutters by the opening / closing driving means, the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the respective shutters by the rotation driving means, the movement of the sub-effect display means by the haunting driving means, and the turning driving means. By appropriately combining the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters and the rotation of a plurality of decorative bodies, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, and it is possible to make the player less bored and the player. It is possible to make the player more entertaining, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the sub-effect display means can be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position only when the pair of shutters are separated from each other, the positions of the pair of shutters and the sub-effect display means in the front-rear direction are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a widening of the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters (plurality of decorative objects), and it is easy to embody a gaming machine equipped with the sub-effect display means and the pair of shutters. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a plurality of ornaments from becoming relatively small, and by making the ornaments as large as possible to make them stand out, the decorative effect of the plurality of ornaments is sufficient. Can be demonstrated.

Further, if at least one of the pair of shutters is moved from the detached position to the approaching position side, the sub-effect display means cannot move from the retracted position to the protruding position side, so that the sub-effect display means is used as the main effect display. When the swivel table is stopped rotating at a specific swivel position located above the means (above the center of rotation of the swivel table), the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position, and then the shutter is moved to the approaching position. By moving it to the side, even if a force that tries to move the sub-effect display means downward due to the load of the sub-effect display means acts, the shutter moving to the approaching position side moves the sub-effect display means downward. Can be blocked from moving. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display means from moving downward without permission, it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display means from moving unnaturally and giving the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to surely enjoy the production by the sub-effect display means and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the shutter moving to the approaching position side can prevent the sub-effect display means from moving downward, it is not necessary to keep driving the haunting drive means so that the sub-effect display means does not move arbitrarily. It is possible to prevent the haunting driving means from being damaged due to an overload and prevent the game from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the sub-effect display means is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position side, the pair of shutters cannot be moved from the separated position to the approached position side, so that the moving direction of the pair of shutters is moved up and down by the swivel table. When the direction (including the diagonal direction) is set, the sub-effect display means is located on the protruding position side, so that the shutter located on the upper end side in the moving direction moves the shutter downward due to the load of the shutter. Even if a force for causing the shutter acts, the sub-effect display means moving to the protruding position side can prevent the shutter from moving downward. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the shutter from moving downward without permission, it is possible to prevent the shutter from moving unnaturally and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and the effect of the shutter or the like is ensured. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the sub-effect display means moving to the protruding position side can prevent the pair of shutters from moving downward, it is necessary to keep driving the opening / closing driving means so that the pair of shutters do not move arbitrarily. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing driving means from being damaged due to an overload and prevent the game from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, since it is equipped with a turning regulating means that regulates the rotation of the turning table, the turning driving means stops the rotation of the turning table at a specific turning position, and then the sub-effect display means is moved to the backward position. , Even if the swivel table is rotated in the rotation direction due to a change in the position of the center of gravity or the occurrence of vibration when the shutter is moved by the opening / closing drive means or a plurality of decorative objects are rotated by the rotation drive means, the swivel is restricted. Since the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated by means, it is possible to prevent the swivel table from rattling and causing unstable movement of the entire plurality of ornaments or a pair of shutters, and a plurality of. It is possible to rotate the entire decoration in a stable state or move the shutter in a stable state, and it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort to the rotation of a plurality of decorations or the movement of the shutter. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the rotation of the swivel table can be regulated by the swivel regulating means, the rotation moment for rotating the swivel table by the load of the shutter, a plurality of decorative bodies, the rotation driving means, the sub-effect display means, etc. is swiveled. Since it can be received by the regulating means, when the rotation of the swivel table is stopped, the swivel driving means exerts a force that cancels the rotational moment due to the load of the shutter, a plurality of decorative bodies, the rotation driving means, the sub-effect display means, and the like. It is not necessary to act on the swivel table, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the swivel drive means, and it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to an overload.

Further, the rotation regulating means, which is a guide pin, is projected forward from the unit base and brought into contact with the sub-effect display means at the retracted position to regulate the rotation of the swivel table, and a plurality of guide pins are used. By appropriately differentiating the protruding intervals of the above at a plurality of specific turning positions, the turning table (sub-effect display means) can be regulated within a range of different rotation angles, and the turning table is positioned when the rotation is stopped. Depending on the specific turning position, the turning table can be made non-rotatable or can be reciprocated within a predetermined rotation angle by the turning regulating means. More specifically, for example, when two guide pins are separated from each other in the circumferential direction of the turning table by substantially the same width as the sub-effect display means at a specific turning position, they are inserted between the two turning regulating means. When the sub-effect display means is moved to the retracted position, the portion of the sub-effect display means that protrudes outward from the swivel table is sandwiched between the two guide pins, and the swivel table is restricted (locked) so that it cannot rotate. can do. Further, in the specific turning position, when the distance between the two guide pins in the circumferential direction of the turning table is wider than the width of the sub-effect display means, the sub-effect display means is inserted between the two guide pins. When is moved to the retracted position, a gap of a predetermined size is provided between the sub-effect display means and the two guide pins, so that the swivel table can be rotated by the gap, and the sub-effect display can be displayed. Means and a pair of shutters (plurality of ornaments) can be restricted to swivel only within a predetermined swivel angle. In this way, depending on the specific turning position, the turning table can be made unable to turn by the turning regulating means, or can be reciprocally turned in the turning direction within a range of a predetermined turning angle, so that the turning table is positioned. Depending on the specific turning position to be performed, different movements of the turning table in the rotation direction can be shown to the player, and various effects can make the player less likely to get bored and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, when the distance between the two guide pins in the circumferential direction is narrower than the width of the sub-effect display means other than the specific turning position, the sub-effect display means is at the turning position between the two guide pins. When is moved in the direction of the retracted position, the sub-effect display means abuts on the guide pin and the movement to the retracted position is restricted, and the sub-effect display means does not invade between the two guide pins. Even if another member is attached to the portion between the two guide pins, the other member can be attached to the portion because it does not come into contact with the sub-effect display means. Therefore, a member (mechanism) for rotating the swivel table is attached to the portion as another member to surely embody the gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect, or a decorative body is attached to the appearance in the gaming area. Can be improved.

Further, when the swivel table is in a specific swivel position, rotation is regulated by a swivel regulating means (guide pin). That is, a turning position (effect) in which the sub-effect display means is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position, the pair of shutters is moved between the approaching position and the separating position, and a plurality of decorative objects are rotated. Since the execution position) is limited to a specific turning position, it is possible to suppress an increase in the effect pattern as compared with the case where the effect can be executed at any turn position, and the effect pattern can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of having too much, and it is possible to entertain the player with an appropriate number of production patterns, and it is possible to reduce the load on the production control. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the load, and to surely enjoy the above-mentioned effect.

Further, since the slide gear for moving the sub-effect display means between the protruding position and the retracted position is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the mechanism for moving the sub-effect display means can be used. The depth in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible, and it is possible to easily prepare for a gaming machine having a limited depth. Further, by rotating the slide gear by the haunting drive means, the sub-effect display means can be moved between the protruding position and the retracting position via the haunting rack gear, and the gaming machine having the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably performed. Can be embodied.

Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated by the rotary drive means, it is not necessary to provide each decorative body with a rotary drive means, and the space required for the rotary drive means can be narrowed as much as possible. The space required for a plurality of decorative bodies can be made relatively large. Therefore, for example, since the space of the decorative body can be relatively widened, the rotation range of the decorative body can be increased to make the movement more enjoyable, or the decorative body can be made larger and more conspicuous. Since it is possible to increase the impact when rotating by increasing the number of decorative objects, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movement and decoration of multiple decorative objects, and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the swivel table and the unit base have through openings and openings that are larger than the display screen of the main effect display means and penetrate in the front-rear direction, the main effect display means arranged on the rear side of the unit base. Since the display screen of the unit base and the swivel table can be seen from the front (player side) through the opening of the unit base and the through hole of the swivel table, the unit base and the swivel table are composed of transparent members to produce the main effect through the transparent part. Compared with the case where the display means can be visually recognized, the effect image displayed on the main effect display means can be visually recognized in a clear state, and the player can enjoy the effect image of the main effect display means. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Furthermore, since the opening / closing regulating means for restricting the movement of the pair of shutters is provided, by restricting the movement of the shutters with the opening / closing regulating means, the swivel table can be rotated or a plurality of decorative objects can be rotated. , Even if the sub-effect display means is moved, it is possible to prevent the shutter from moving without permission, so that it is possible to make it less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the movement of the shutter or a plurality of decorative objects, and the player. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest. Further, even when the swivel table is rotated, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated, or the swivel table is stopped to rotate so that the movement direction of the pair of shutters is in the vertical direction, the shutters can be moved by the opening / closing restricting means. By restricting, it is not necessary to keep applying force to the shutter by the opening / closing driving means so that the shutter does not move arbitrarily, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing driving means from being loaded, and the game is interrupted due to overload. Can be avoided.

In addition, the swivel table can be rotatably mounted around the axis extending back and forth by a plurality of guide rollers mounted on the unit base, and when the swivel pinion gear is rotated by the swivel drive means, the swivel pinion Since the swivel table can be rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction by the swivel gear meshing with the gear, it is possible to surely embody a game machine that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect. Further, since a plurality of guide rollers are brought into contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table and the swivel table is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward, the swivel table is located more than the center of rotation of the swivel table among the plurality of guide rollers. Since the load applied to the swivel table can be supported by a plurality of guide rollers arranged on the lower side, the weight is increased by attaching a sub-effect display means, a pair of shutters, a plurality of decorative bodies, etc. to the swivel table. Even so, by supporting the load applied to the swivel table in a distributed manner, the load acting on each guide roller can be reduced, the guide roller can be made less likely to be damaged, and the swivel table can be rotated smoothly. It is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect. Further, since the swivel table is rotatably attached by a plurality of guide rollers that are in contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table and it is not necessary to provide a rotary shaft at the center of rotation of the swivel table, the swivel table is arranged behind the swivel table. Since there is nothing to interfere with the main effect display means, the main effect display means can be visually recognized from the front in good condition, the effect image of the main effect display means can be enjoyed, and after the swivel table. It is possible to reliably embody a gaming machine provided with a main effect display means on the side, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, since the axes of the respective shafts of the plurality of decorative bodies are on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row along the front surface of the shutter. Therefore, the depth required for arranging a plurality of ornaments in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the plurality of ornaments can be surely arranged on the front side of the shutter, and the depth is limited. It is possible to easily arrange a plurality of decorative bodies, a shutter, a swivel table, and a main effect display means in the front-rear direction in the gaming machine, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects. Further, since the depth applied to the plurality of decorative bodies can be reduced, the decorative body can be made relatively large, and other members (for example, a game panel, a center accessory, etc.) before and after the plurality of decorative bodies and the shutter can be used. ) Can be placed, or multiple decorative objects can be placed in a narrow space (for example, between the game panel and the main effect display means), making the machine a game machine that strongly attracts the attention of the player. Can be done.

Further, the main effect display means is a horizontally long quadrangle whose outer shape is viewed from the front, and the length of the pair of shutters in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position is set as the main effect display means. Since it is formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of, the shutter has a size (length) that straddles the display screen of the main effect display means, so the shutter is moved to the front side of the main effect display means. When it is made, the part covered by the shutter becomes wider, and when the shutter is moved to the front side of the main effect display means, the impact on the player can be increased, which makes the player more entertaining and suppresses the decline in interest. be able to. Further, for example, when both ends in the longitudinal direction of the shutter are movably supported between the approaching position and the separating position, a guide member (for example, a slide shaft, a slide guide, a slide rail, etc.) that movably supports the shutter is used. ) Is arranged outside the effect display means in the front view, and the effect image can be less likely to be obstructed by the guide member, and the player can enjoy the effect image in a good state.

Further, since the decorative cover that covers the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the front side of the rotary drive means is attached to the front surface of the shutter, the decorative cover allows the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the rotary drive means to be mounted. Can be hidden from the player's side, and it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance in the game area due to the appearance of the shaft portion of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the rotary drive means. In addition, since it is equipped with a decorative cover that hides the shaft of the decorative body, the universal shaft joint, and the rotational drive means, the decorative cover can decorate the inside of the game area and the front of the shutter, improving the appearance and making the player look good. Can be entertained.

Further, since the decorative body is provided with a light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies after making the decorative body transparent, the light emission provided in the decorative substrate is provided. When the means is made to emit light, a plurality of decorative bodies can be made to emit light, and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and at the same time, the decorative body can be made to stand out and the player's attention can be strongly attracted. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the person think that there is something. Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light in a state where the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the orientation of the decorative body main body formed three-dimensionally by the rotation is changed, so that the light emitting means can be used. The refraction and reflection direction of the light radiated to the front decorative body, the amount of transmission, etc. will change one after another, and the decorative body can be made to appear to be twinkling, entertaining the player and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light while the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching position by the opening / closing driving means, the light emitting decoration having a brightness clearly different from that of the effect image of the main effect display means or the sub effect display means. Can be shown to the player, so that the player's attention can be directed to the center of the game area. In addition, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light while the shutter is moved to the approaching position and the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated, the plurality of decorative bodies blink in front of the main effect display means. Since the production can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light in a state where the swivel table is rotated by the swivel driving means and the entire plurality of decorative bodies are swiveled through the shutter, an arc shape centered on the center of the swivel table is formed. The trajectory of the light can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. In addition, when a plurality of decorative objects are rotated by the rotation driving means while rotating the swivel table, the arc-shaped light locus by the light emitting means of the decorative substrate blinks brilliantly to give the player a comet-like movable light emitting effect. Since it can be shown, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, when the pair of shutters is moved to the approaching position, the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the respective shutters are arranged in an annular shape, so that the player's attention is strongly directed to the center of the game area. be able to. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters are moved to the separated positions, a plurality of decorative bodies are lined up along the outer periphery of the gaming area, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gaming area can be decorated to improve the appearance of the gaming machine. In addition, by moving the pair of shutters to the approaching position or the separating position, the diameter of the virtual ring formed by the plurality of ornaments arranged in an arc shape can be reduced or increased. Can be done. Therefore, when the pair of shutters is moved from the separated position to the approached position, the virtual annulus formed by the plurality of ornaments becomes smaller, so that the player's attention can be directed to the center of the game area. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters is moved from the approaching position to the separating position, the virtual annulus formed by the plurality of decorative bodies becomes large, so that the player's attention can be directed to the outer peripheral side of the gaming area. Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, when the swivel table is rotated by the swivel driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in a row. Since it moves in the direction in which it is, it is possible to show the player a movable effect as if multiple ornaments are running side by side on the circumference, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table, for example, the ends of the plurality of decorative bodies facing the center side of the swivel table move forward. By rotating each of them so as to move, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that flows forward from the center of the swivel table, and it is possible to make the player feel as if a headwind is blowing. Alternatively, when the ends of the plurality of ornaments facing the center side of the swivel table are rotated so as to move backward, the player is shown a movable effect of flowing from the center of the center of the swivel table to the rear. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is sucked into the swivel table (game area). At this time, by displaying the effect images corresponding to the rotation directions of the plurality of decorative bodies on the main effect display means, the player can be shown an effect radiated forward from the main effect display means, or the main effect can be displayed. It is possible to show an effect that is sucked into the display means.

Further, the universal shaft joint is composed of a pair of arm portions protruding from the respective shaft portions connected to each other and a cross-shaped spider inserted between the respective arm portions, via the spider. Since the rotation is transmitted, the time lag of the rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring can be eliminated as compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted using the rubber and the spring. The ornaments can be rotated at the same time. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated at the same time, and the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated with a delay in order, which makes the player feel unnatural. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of a plurality of decorative bodies having a sense of unity and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in a universal joint, rotation can be transmitted between two shafts by simply sandwiching the spider transmission portion between the side surface of the arm portion of one shaft portion and the side surface of the arm portion of the other shaft portion. Since it is possible to assemble a universal joint to be connected, the number of parts can be reduced and the labor required for assembly can be facilitated compared to the case where a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft joint is used as the universal joint. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Further, in a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, the drive from the rotation driving means is transmitted to the shafts of the decorative bodies located every other one from the end to rotate the shafts. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the accumulation of rattling and twisting in the rotational direction in the universal shaft joint as much as possible. Therefore, since the time lag of rotation of the decorative body rotated via the universal shaft joint can be reduced as much as possible, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated at substantially the same time. It is possible to rotate it, giving a sense of unity to the movement (rotation) of the plurality of decorative bodies, and it is possible to fully exert the effect of the movable effect by the plurality of decorative bodies, and the above-mentioned action effect is surely achieved. It can be a game machine.

Further, for a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, a rotation drive mechanism is provided on a shaft portion adjacent to a shaft portion of another decorative body among the two shaft portions of the decorative bodies arranged every other body. Since the rotating gear is attached and the shaft part to which the rotating gear is attached and the adjacent shaft part are connected by a universal shaft joint, the shaft parts that cannot be rotated by the rotary drive mechanism are connected to each other. Since the adjacent parts are not connected by the universal shaft joint, the decorative body sandwiched between the two decorative bodies whose shafts are rotated by the rotation drive mechanism can rotate from both sides. It is possible to prevent the transmission from being transmitted, and it is possible to prevent the rotation of the decorative body from being jerky. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the respective decorative bodies can be rotated at substantially the same time without discomfort, so that the effect of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies can be sufficiently exerted. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear is attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body extending parallel to the surface of the shutter, and the bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion is meshed from the rear side of the rotary gear to extend the transmission gear member back and forth. By making it rotatable around a vertical shaft and engaging the operating rack gear of a rod-shaped drive rack as a transmission mechanism with the driven gear at the rear end of this transmission gear member, the drive rack is slid by a rotary drive means. Since the transmission gear member is made to rotate by transmitting the drive from the rotary drive means via the transmission mechanism, the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since it is possible to secure a space in front of and behind the plurality of decorative bodies, even if the plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surface of the shutter, it is possible to make it difficult for them to come into contact with other members. The machine can be easily embodied. Therefore, in a gaming machine having a limited depth, it is possible to easily arrange a plurality of decorative objects on the front side of the effect display means, the unit base, the swivel table, and the shutter, and realize the gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects. It can be easily transformed. Further, in this case, as described above, since the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the transmission mechanism can be reduced as much as possible, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of decorative bodies can be relatively increased. It can make multiple ornaments stand out. Alternatively, a plurality of decorative bodies can be arranged even at a position having a narrow depth, and the degree of freedom in arrangement (degree of freedom of movement) of the plurality of decorative bodies (shutters) can be increased. Further, since the drive of the rotary drive means is transmitted to the transmission gear member side by the rod-shaped drive rack, the rotary drive means can be selected from a plurality of decorative bodies by appropriately selecting the length of the drive rack. It can be placed in an inconspicuous position at a distance from each other, and a plurality of decorative objects can be relatively conspicuous.

Further, since the drive from the opening / closing drive means is transmitted to the rotating action member via the belt wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley to move the shutter, the opening / closing drive means is moved to a position away from the shutter. Since the shutter can be moved even if the shutter is arranged, it is not necessary to arrange the opening / closing driving means in the vicinity of the shutter, and it is possible to easily secure a space around the shutter. Therefore, the space secured around the shutter makes it possible to relatively lengthen the moving distance of the shutter, making it easier to open and close the front side of the effect display means, and also to fill the space. It is possible to make the decorative body relatively large and conspicuous, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative body, and it is possible to entertain the directing operation by the decorative body and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, a belt is used to transmit the rotation from the opening / closing driving means to the rotating member, and since the belt has flexibility, it is transmitted via a plurality of gears as in the conventional technique. By reducing the diameter of the drive pulley and the action pulley and guiding the belt between the drive pulley and the action pulley by the guide roller, the belt can be located between the outward path side and the return path side of the belt. The interval can be narrowed, and the width between the opening / closing driving means and the corresponding shutter (the width of the path for transmitting rotation) can be narrowed. In addition, since a belt is used to transmit rotation, a relay pulley for relaying rotation between a plurality of belts, a guide roller for guiding the belt, and the like are appropriately arranged to form a belt between the drive pulley and the action pulley. The extending path can be various paths with a simple structure such as a dogleg shape, a U shape, a C shape, an L shape, an S shape, a curved shape, a zigzag shape, and the like. From these things, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the opening / closing driving means with respect to the shutter. Therefore, the pair of shutters that open and close can be arranged at a position (in front of the swivel table) that was difficult to arrange with a conventional gaming machine, so that the effect of the shutters can be fully exhibited or enhanced. The movable effect of the pair of shutters can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the belt wound around the action pulley and the drive pulley is extended along the outer circumference of the swivel table, the opening / closing drive means for rotating the drive pulley around which the belt is wound is the swivel table. The opening / closing driving means can be arranged at a position in the front view gaming area where the opening / closing driving means is less likely to get in the way, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the belt wound around the action pulley and the drive pulley is extended along the outer circumference of the swivel table, the rotating action member rotated by the action pulley around which the belt is wound swivels. It will be placed near the outer circumference of the table. That is, since the rotating member for moving the shutter can be arranged near the outer periphery of the swivel table, the rotating member is placed at a position where it is difficult to block the effect image of the main effect display means arranged behind the swirl table. The game is arranged so that the shutter can be moved between the approaching position and the separating position, and the effect image displayed on the main effect display means can be visually recognized in a good state, and the above-mentioned effect is achieved. The machine can be embodied.

Further, a relay pulley is provided between the action pulley and the drive pulley, and the belt is wound between the action pulley and the relay pulley, and the drive belt is wound between the drive pulley and the relay pulley. As described above, it is composed of a plurality of belts, and each belt is wound in sequence between the two pulleys so that the rotation is transmitted from the drive pulley to the action pulley via the plurality of belts. Compared to the case where one belt is wound around the drive pulley, the rate at which the belt extends due to the tension applied to the belt when the drive pulley is rotated can be relatively reduced, and the belt extends and comes off the pulley. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the corresponding shutter from being stuck due to the belt coming off, so that the shutter can be reliably moved and the player can enjoy the movable effect of the shutter, which reduces the interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the relay pulley provided between the action pulley and the drive pulley is wound with a belt from each side to transmit the rotation, the relay pulley is a straight line connecting the action pulley and the drive pulley. By arranging it at a position different from the above, it is possible to make the path of the belt from the drive pulley to the action pulley various shapes such as dogleg, U-shape, C-shape, etc., and open and close. The rotation from the drive means (drive pulley) can be transmitted to the corresponding shutter (action pulley) by wrapping around via the relay pulley, and the degree of freedom in arranging the shutter on the front surface of the swivel table can be further increased. can. At this time, it is desirable that the belts extend linearly between the wound pulleys in each of the plurality of belts such as the working belt and the drive belt. As a result, since no lateral force acts on each belt, the belt can be made difficult to come off from the pulley, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, a rotating member for moving the corresponding shutter is arranged near the center in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the moving direction) behind the shutter at the time of separation position on the swivel table, and then the shutter. When moving between the approaching position and the separating position, a force is applied to the central part of the shutter in the longitudinal direction to move the shutter. Even if the shutter is moved, the force for moving the shutter acts near the position of the center of gravity of the shutter, so that the shutter can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the shutter can be moved smoothly. Therefore, the pair of shutters can be smoothly moved between the approaching position and the separating position without rattling, regardless of the orientation of the pair of shutters due to the rotation of the swivel table. A pair of shutters (and a plurality of decorative objects attached to the front of the shutters) can be moved without giving a sense of discomfort to the person, and the movement of the pair of shutters can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

Further, as described above, since the pair of shutters can be smoothly moved regardless of the rotation position of the swivel table, there is a problem that the shutters cannot move between the approaching position and the separating position. Since it can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming frustrated and deteriorating the interest due to the interruption of the game.

Means 29: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 28,
The gaming machine
The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player,
A plurality of receptions arranged in the game area and capable of accepting game media, and
The pachinko machine is provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the game medium into the reception port.

Here, as the "reception port", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". "Starting winning opening (starting opening)" where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can be accepted, "ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be used in a specific area (for example, a gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area, such as a variable winning opening (variable starting port, accessory winning opening, etc.) that can accept the game medium. Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing, the game medium can be accepted, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. "Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous include a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means". The special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the stop-displayed special symbols and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result and the advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. When the result of the special lottery to be generated is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state. When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. It has an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called honey machine), and has a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and is drawn by accepting a game medium to the starting opening. Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the large winning opening is designated. A device provided with an advantageous gaming state generating means (so-called multifunction device) that opens and closes in the pattern of the above to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. "

According to the configuration of the means 29, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the gaming area in which the gaming medium is driven by the operation of the player, and the receiving entrance where the gaming medium can be received, and the game to the receiving entrance. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the medium. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It should be noted that the sub-effect display means is moved by the haunting drive means, the pair of shutters is moved by the open / close drive means, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated by the rotation drive means, and the sub-effect display means and the shutter are combined with the swivel drive means. It is desirable that the movable effect of rotating a plurality of decorative bodies is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area at the reception port. As a result, when the game medium is received at the reception port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the sub-effect display means moves, the pair of shutters moves, the plurality of decorative objects rotate, and the sub-effect is sub-effect. Since a movable effect is performed in which a plurality of decorative bodies rotate together with the display means and the shutter, it is possible to entertain the player and facilitate the continuous driving of the game medium aiming at the entrance. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of a person's game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and the result of the special lottery is presented to the player when the result is suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, even if the sub-effect display means is moved, a pair of shutters is moved, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated, or a plurality of decorative objects are rotated together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter. good. As a result, the sub-effect display means moves, the pair of shutters moves, the plurality of decorative bodies rotate, and the plurality of decorative bodies rotate together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter, as described above. Since it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player, the result of the special lottery drawn for the player causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, "big hit". ”), It is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, by moving the sub-effect display means, moving a pair of shutters, rotating a plurality of decorative bodies, or rotating the plurality of decorative bodies together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, it can be suitably used for an effect (for example, reach effect) for suggesting the lottery special lottery result to the player, and the player can be used. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Means 30: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 28,
The gaming machine
Multiple fuselage bodies, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that rotates the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after the game medium is inserted, and a start operation unit.
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and
A slot machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating fuselage that has been rotated and stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by being.

Here, the "slot machine" includes "a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game" and "a plurality of rotating bodies". An internal lottery is executed when the rotation starts, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the lottery internal lottery is given. ”,“ The effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed. It has been done ”, etc. The "privileges" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", and "Assist Time (Assist Time). AT) ”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 30, the game machine is operated by a plurality of rotating bodies, each of which has a plurality of symbols, and a player after the game medium is loaded, so that the plurality of rotating bodies are rotated, respectively. According to the combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating cylinders and a stop symbol by all the rotating cylinders whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units respectively. It is a slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislot machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It should be noted that the sub-effect display means is moved by the haunting drive means, the pair of shutters is moved by the open / close drive means, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated by the rotation drive means, and the sub-effect display means and the shutter are combined with the swivel drive means. Movable effects such as turning multiple ornaments are performed when the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). , As one of the effects presented to the player, the sub-effect display means is moved, the pair of shutters is moved, the plurality of ornaments are rotated, and the plurality of ornaments are rotated together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter. You may let them do it. As a result, the sub-effect display means moves, the pair of shutters moves, the plurality of decorative bodies rotate, and the plurality of decorative bodies rotate together with the sub-effect display means and the shutters, so that the player can move. It can attract a strong interest and entertain the operation of the stop operation unit so as to win the prize. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the sub-effect display means may be moved, a pair of shutters may be moved, a plurality of decorative objects may be rotated, or a plurality of decorative objects may be moved together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter. May be rotated so that the sub-effect display means can be moved, a pair of shutters can be moved, a plurality of ornaments can be rotated, and a plurality of ornaments can be moved together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter. Since it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by turning, when the player is stopped at a specific combination of symbols, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs (for example, "BB"). It is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, the sub-effect display means moves, the pair of shutters moves, the plurality of decorative bodies rotate, and the plurality of decorative bodies rotate together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, it can be suitably used for the effect of suggesting the drawn internal lottery to the player, entertaining the player and reducing the interest. It can be suppressed.

Means 31: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 28,
The gaming machine
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine", which is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. After that, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbols, and a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, for example). , Advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 31, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It should be noted that the sub-effect display means is moved by the haunting drive means, the pair of shutters is moved by the open / close drive means, a plurality of decorative objects are rotated by the rotation drive means, and the sub-effect display means and the shutter are combined with the swivel drive means. Movable effects such as turning multiple ornaments are performed when the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). , As one of the effects presented to the player, the sub-effect display means is moved, the pair of shutters is moved, the plurality of ornaments are rotated, and the plurality of ornaments are rotated together with the sub-effect display means and the shutter. When the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the sub-effect display means may be moved, a pair of shutters may be moved, a plurality of decorative objects may be rotated, or the sub-effect display means and A plurality of decorative bodies may be swiveled together with the shutter, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

According to the present invention, more game balls can be stored in the reserve storage unit than it looks.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member on the main body frame side of the main body frame is removed with respect to the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the upper hinge member on the outer frame side. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. be. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends in the state which turned forward. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and (b) is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. be. It is a rear view of the third production operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 3rd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). It is sectional drawing taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 3rd effect operation unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and (b) is the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in (a). It is an explanatory diagram seen from. (A) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the first decorative surface portion facing forward, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the second decorative surface portion forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state which is directed to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the state which the 1st decorative surface part and the 2nd decorative surface part are rotated in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the air flow by the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the 3rd effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 93 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 97 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 102. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the guide path opening / closing door is closed in the lower full taxiing path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the guide path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of a game panel is in an opaque state. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board in the state of FIG. 129 from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board in the state of FIG. 129 from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front unit in the game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of a game panel transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball in the attacker unit in the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view of the back-up movable production unit in the back unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back-up movable production unit in the back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up movable body unit of the back-up movable production unit and looked at from the front together with the back-up movable main body unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up movable body unit of the back-up movable production unit and looked at from the back together with the back-up movable main body unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up movable main body unit of the back-up movable production unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up movable main body unit of the back-up movable production unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the back-up movable main body unit showing the back-up movable main body unit in the state of the normal ascending position, and (b) is the back-up showing the back-up movable main body unit in the state of the rotated lowering position. It is a front view of the movable production unit. It is a front view of the back-up movable main body unit which roughly shows the rotation of the back-up first rotation decoration body and the revolution of the back-up second rotation decoration body. It is a front view of the back-top movable main body unit which roughly shows the movement of a plurality of back-top haunting decorative bodies and the LED of the back-top decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-up second rotation decoration body and the back-top haunting decoration body in the back-top movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of the back-top first rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-up second rotation decoration body and the back-up haunting decoration body following FIG. 156 according to the rotation angle of the back-top first rotation decoration body. (A) is a front view of the back-up movable main body unit shown together with the LED of the back-up decoration substrate in a state where the back-up first rotation decorative body is rotated 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, and (b). ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT in (a). FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back-up haunting decorative body at the appearance position and the second LED of the back-up decorative substrate by enlarging the portion of arrow A in FIG. 158. It is a front view of the back rear movable production unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view of the back-rear movable production unit in the back unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back-rear movable production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear movable effect unit disassembled into a fixed side unit side and a swivel table side and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear movable effect unit disassembled into a fixed side unit side and a swivel table side and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the swivel table side of the back-rear movable production unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the swivel table side of the back-rear movable production unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the swivel table side of the rear-rear movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the swivel table side of the rear-rear movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning composition of the swivel table in the back rear central movable production unit in the front view of the back rear movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the turning in the counterclockwise direction of the turning table in the back-rear central movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning in the clockwise direction of the turning table in the back-rear central movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning in the clockwise direction of the turning table which continues from FIG. 171. It is a perspective view which looked at the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit in the back unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit in the back unit from the back. The back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit are disassembled into a back rear left movable decoration unit, a back rear right movable decoration unit, a back rear left slide unit, and a back rear right slide unit, and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. The back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit are disassembled into a back rear left movable decoration unit, a back rear right movable decoration unit, a back rear left slide unit, and a back rear right slide unit, and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. It is a front view of the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit as viewed from the front. It is a perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit, and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit, and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative body unit, the back rear right movable decorative body unit, the back rear left rotating decorative body, the back rear right rotating decorative body, and the rotation connecting mechanism disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative body unit, the back rear right movable decorative body unit, the back rear left rotating decorative body, the back rear right rotating decorative body, and the rotation connecting mechanism disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the rotary connecting mechanism in an assembled state, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary connecting mechanism. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear left movable decorative body unit in the back rear left movable effect unit from the left side, and (b) is the back rear left movable decorative unit unit in the back rear left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left rotation decoration body in the back rear left movable decorative body unit of the back rear left movable production unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable effect unit from the front, and (b) is the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member from the right side surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right rotation decoration body in the back rear right movable decorative body unit of the back rear right movable production unit. In (a), in the back-rear left movable effect unit, the back-rear right movable effect unit, and the back-rear right movable decorative unit, the back-rear left-rotating decorative body and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body are normally used. It is a front view which shows in the state of the 1st effect position, (b) is the front view which shows in the state which the back rear left rotation decoration body and the back rear right rotation decoration body are rotated to the 2nd effect position, (c). Is a front view showing a state in which the back-rear left-rotating decorative body and the back-rear-right-rotating decorative body are rotated to the third effect position. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear left movable effect unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the back rear right movable production unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left movable decorative body unit, and the back rear right movable decorative body unit by the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit. (A) is a front view showing the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in the state of the normal separation position, (b). Is a state in which the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit are moved to the approaching position by the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit. It is a front view shown by. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable production unit in the back-rear movable production unit of the back unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front together with the swivel table. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear-upward movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind together with the swivel table. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the sub-effect display device is set to the retracted position farthest from the turning center in the back-rear-upward movable effect unit in a schematic configuration, and (b) shows the sub-effect display device as a swivelable position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which was done in the schematic structure, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the state which made the sub-effect display device the protrusion position closest to the turning center by the schematic structure. (A) is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit on the swivel table side showing the sub-effect display device of the back-rear-upward movable effect unit in the normal retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the sub-effect display device protruding. It is a front view of the swivel table side in the back-rear movable production unit shown in the position. It is a front view of the back-rear movable production unit which shows the state which made the sub-effect display device a swivel position in the first turning position in a schematic structure. It is a front view of the back-rear movable production unit which shows the movable range of the sub-effect display device in the 1st turning position in a schematic structure. It is a front view of the back-rear movable production unit which shows the movable range of the sub-effect display device in the 2nd turning position in a schematic structure. It is a front view of the back-rear movable production unit which shows the movable range of the sub-effect display device in the 3rd turning position in a schematic structure. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable production unit in the back-rear movable production unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a back-rear-lower movable production unit in the back-rear movable production unit of the back unit. It is a perspective view seen from. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back-up first rotation decoration body and the back-up second rotation decoration body of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the descending position. With the swivel table in the back-rear movable production unit of the back unit in the first swivel position, the back-rear left movable production unit and the back-rear right movable production unit are separated from the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which it moved from the position to the approaching position. With the swivel table in the back rear movable production unit of the back unit in the third turning position, the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit are separated from the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which it moved from the position to the approaching position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the sub-effect display device in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit is moved to the protruding position in a normal first turning position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the sub-effect display device in the back-rear movable production unit of a back unit is swirled from the first swivel position to the second swivel position in the state of the protruding position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the sub-effect display device is moved to the retracted position from the state of FIG. 207. It is a front view of the game board which shows the sub-effect display device in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit moved from the second turn position to the third turn position in the state of the protruding position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the sub-effect display device is moved to the retracted position from the state of FIG. 209. From the state of FIG. 205, the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit are the back rear left rotation decoration body and the back rear right rotation decoration body. In addition to the state of the three production positions, the back top first rotation decoration body and the back top second rotation decoration body of the back top movable production unit are moved to the descending position to move the back top first rotation decoration body and the back top second rotation decoration body to the back top second rotation decoration body. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the decorative body is rotating. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and a door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 540, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tongue ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10 are the same. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped bearing 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. The flat rising portion 72 that rises, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 penetrate vertically so that only one game ball can pass through. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. NS.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to it. FIG. 17 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is housed in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. It includes a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

Although the details of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating in the front-rear direction is a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launching device 680, and the ball launching device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be rotated according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 below the through-hole 111, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball lending display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, although the details will be described later. It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward from the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative speaker member 579 and a top right decorative speaker member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 540 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single-shot button operation sensor 312, and the like. Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the door frame base 110 on both the left and right sides, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 with a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a to restrict the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height lower than the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through port 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 540, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to protrude upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 regulates the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. No.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess (not shown) of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess, and the game will be played. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate by operating the pull-out button 327.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 were supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens below the entrance 251a and whose rear is open, and a box in which the rear end of the front cover 251 is closed and the front is open. A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, a rear cover 252, and a front cover. With a ball pulling member 253 having a partition portion 253a which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and which partitions the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. , The game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can rotate around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and the ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 250, the ball feeding member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 253 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 254 of the ball feeding member 254. Ball feed solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side, respectively.

The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with an arcuate slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 253 on the left side of the ball pulling port 251b in a front view, and the slit 251c is provided. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion that is open to the rear of the end side from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 253 has a partition portion 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254 and a ball of the partition portion 253a, which is below the entrance 251a and between the entrance 251a and the ball ejection port 251b. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. From the side surface of the rotating rod portion 253b that is movably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 253b, and the rotating rod portion 253b below the operating rod 253c. It is provided with a weight portion 253d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 253a. The working paddle 253c of the ball pulling member 253 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating paddle 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the actuating transmission unit 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball pulling button 327 of the plate unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 253a of the entrance 251a and the ball pulling member 253, and the rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It is provided with a ball holding portion 254b recessed in an arc shape toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 254 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 255.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing toward. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball that has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking portion 254a blocks the movement of the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting port 252a) side, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the paddle portion 254c side closes the ball hitting supply port 252a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a ball feed operating rod 256 that swings back and forth due to the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b and feeds the ball. The member 254 includes a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256, which swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward in the vertical direction by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257, to transmit the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located in. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 is released. The game ball received by the solenoid can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 in the ball feed unit 250 is controlled by the launch control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 682.

Further, the ball pulling member 253 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 250 is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 253d rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball feeding member 253 projects forward. The operation rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission unit 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320, so that its rotation is restricted. The partition portion 253a of the above partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not invade the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a and moves downward of the operation transmission unit 327a. Along with this, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball pulling member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Will be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

Since the upper plate ball removal slider 327b on which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is formed is urged upward by the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, it is above the partition portion 253a. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball pulling spring 327c via the operating pad 253c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 253 and the like from being damaged. , It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and the ball feeding unit 250 is formed. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape of the front view extends to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 261 and the upper piece portion 261 which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 252a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250 by the ball launching device 680, and is attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating a string to move an illegal game ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launcher 680 causes fraud. A string attached to the game ball was inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 became narrower. It can be cut depending on the part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. be. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272 and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full-tank ball receiving port 274 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through-ball passage 273 in the front view and can communicate with the full-tank guide path 862 of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And have.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 274 and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball socket 275 that receives the foul ball, and the game ball that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank receiver 274 and the foul ball socket 275 are forward. It is provided with a ball discharge port 276 that discharges to and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the dish unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharging port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large size, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. It includes a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in the direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that urges the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game ball can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower plate 322 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 capable of contacting the actuating protrusion 863e of the 863 is provided (see FIG. 127). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 863e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the taxiing portion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. It is provided with a handle cover 303 that can be attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and the handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. The handle base 301 and the inner have a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 308 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side are attached to the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 urging in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301 to the outside. The single-shot button 311 that protrudes and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 around the axis extending back and forth, and the single-shot button 311 that detects the pressing operation and is attached to the handle base 301. It is equipped with a single-shot button operation sensor 312.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base 301a, and the cylindrical base 301a. It also has three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180, and the ridges 183 are formed in the three groove portions 301c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 301 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. The locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusion 302b, the third protrusion 302c, and the fourth protrusion 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 302b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 302b is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly low. The side surface of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction of the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the anti-city decision, which is the opposite side, curves inward. It is recessed so as to be formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

In the third protrusion 302c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 302d is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a whose front center is round and bulges forward and projects rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle mounting member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 is attached. The handle unit 300 attached via the slingshot unit 300 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the launch solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player is rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the launch control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustrated). Is omitted) to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 the driving before operating the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most in the clockwise direction in the front view. When the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. Further, FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

The plate unit 320 contains an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. It is provided with a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 is a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the upper plate ball removal button 327 which are attached so that they can be pressed from above on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side when viewed from the front of the ball lending button 328, and the ball lending button 328. And the ball rental display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and the lower plate ball removal button 333 that protrudes forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322 and is attached so that it can be pressed from the front. I have.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and is formed in the shape of a container opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. There is. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled on the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate 321a from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower becomes lower toward the lower side. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. It is provided with a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect effect operation unit 400 (second effect effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

The lower plate 322 has a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k of a plate unit cover 326 that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open lower plate main body 325. The dish unit is formed by a dish unit base 323 that closes the rear side, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of a portion protruding into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the lower dish body 325. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 is a trapezoid in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is arranged on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that a quadrangle extending to the left and right and an upper side shorter than the base are arranged on the front side with the front side of the quadrangle as the base and the left and right sides extending diagonally are recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (upper surface) is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the front view on the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover an approximately right half portion above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 is abbreviated from the cover standing wall portion 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. It is provided with a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side in the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface-shaped portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion diagonally extending between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered by the plate unit cover 326 (directing operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end to the right side of the portion extending shortly to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is the directing operation unit 400 in the front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes the lower plate first region A1 (the crosshatch region in FIG. 45) located behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 described later, and the lower plate. Lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area) and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has more than half of the storage area (corresponding to the storage area in a plan view, which is the combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which the game balls can be stored. It is located behind the production operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in the front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 which is behind the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (dish unit cover 326) that bulges forward toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range that can be seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed larger in the lower plate second region A2 than in the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. ), And the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertips from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, when the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is arranged in front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, in a state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply is provided when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, but is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved diagonally with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is the game ball. When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c does not enter the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and immediately from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, so that the lower plate 321 and the payout device 830 are used for paying out. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play the game (the operation of driving the game ball). And directing images, etc.) can be devoted to suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower plate 322 Even if the game ball supplied to the inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the mounting space 326j side from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, it is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Since the game ball can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damages them. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper plate ball removal button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, although an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, but the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally from the upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. It may be a lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.), a uniform surface without a through hole is shown, but a plurality of penetrations through which the game ball cannot pass are shown. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which the game ball cannot pass. It may be a thing or a thing formed in a net shape. A light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower dish 322 (to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k), which are separately formed. However, the four members may be integrated to form the lower plate 322 in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. Integrated, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. , The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guidance part of the lower plate]
An embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 including a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from that in (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the ball guide part further different. In FIG. 46, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It is provided with a pair of ball guiding portions 322c arranged apart from each other on the left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guide portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide portions 322c without getting over the ball guide portion 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the punch hole 322a.

Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side (lower plate second region A2). The punch holes 322a are arranged side by side in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guide portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, it is an illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

In the example of FIG. 46A, a rail-shaped ball guide portion 322c is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed on the right wall portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a cushioning portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is tilted so that it becomes. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Will be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also rearward to the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326 which is the lower plate second region A2) in the same manner as described above. It is arranged behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340) so that it cannot be seen from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the cushioning portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d can reflect the sound in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharge it downward (dollar box) without sound. Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the game balls are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the portion of the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in between. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the plate and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. For the return portion 322e, the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322 may be used, or a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that alleviates the collision sound at the time of reflection may be used. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400 which is the lower plate second region A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the return portion 322e allows the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side. It can be reflected downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. In the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47, the lower plate main body 325 can be divided with the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It includes a main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B which is attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2. The first extension unit 325B is more than the main body unit 325A, and is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It protrudes into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension unit 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in the right front corner.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). , The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is a main body portion 325A that forms a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the main body. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the width of the second extension portion 325C in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end is formed to be constant, and the storage area of the game ball is formed larger than that of the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C to the main body portion 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage areas of the game balls are connected. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C in the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed so as to occur.

As described above, in the above example, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a structure that can be divided and at least one of the divided members can be exchanged, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes rearward (inside the mounting space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is below. It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first region A1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325, but the game ball is on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided like the lower plate main body 325, and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion can be divided. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (rear is opened) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110. It is formed in a shallow box shape).

The plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 323a and the upper plate ball supply port 323a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c penetrating the front and rear at the lower part on the left side from the center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 324.

Further, the dish unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides a game ball sent to the rear side of the dish unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging from the lower side of the feeding guide path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the tubular front view of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and is extended from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. The taxiing guide path 323f that guides the released game ball to the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and the upper end of the ball feed guide path 323f on the left side of the front view of the ball feed guide path 323e. With an opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at a height between the two, and is in contact with the taxiing unit 253c of the taxiing unit 250, and the taxiing transmission part 327a that is operated by the taxiing button 327 protrudes rearward. , Is equipped. The downstream end of the ball pulling guide path 323f is open in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. 323i is provided with a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the tubular rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. It penetrates 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower plate ball supply port 323c, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a tubular rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. Then, it is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325. The dish unit cover 326 is provided on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the effect operation unit 400 is mounted and the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and the effect operation unit 400 is largely opened forward in the center in the left-right direction. A plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b are provided. There is.

The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at a height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left-right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 ends on the left-right center side and the left-right end sides. The middle part is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. Further, the lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 is inclined to move upward in the left-right direction (center side in the left-right direction). It is formed so as to narrow in the vertical direction from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right end sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view.

The front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the left-right center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left-right end sides, and the left-right center end and the left-right end side of the dish unit cover 326. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the middle part is recessed rearward with respect to the flat surface connecting the ends of the above.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating the front and back is formed in the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled in the dish unit 320.

The front lower right decorative portion 326c on the right side of the front view has a handle insertion port 326f through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view. A cylinder insertion port 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the right side of the front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h causes the upper plate 321 to have a plate-like top plate portion 326h. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The lower side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is open forward at the portion of the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends in a flat plate shape from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d to the rear, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321. By pressing the upper plate 321, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h by the ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to. The upper end of the ball pulling lever extending vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball pulling button 327. The ball pulling lever is slidably attached in the vertical direction by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball pulling button 327.

Then, the ball pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball pulling button 327 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b slidably attached up and down by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327a is formed from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is urged upward by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and by the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever are used. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b moves downward. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball pulling member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 253a enters. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball ejection port 251b is released, and they are in a state of communicating with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

When the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the operation. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the troublesomeness of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to dedicate the player to the game (driving operation of the game ball, production image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327 on the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses it to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented (paid out) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after deducting the amount of the lent game ball.

Although not shown, the ball lending display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged under the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, or It displays an error code, etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the figure, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are used for the player in the main effect display device 1600 arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400, and the like. When the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select a desired option.

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower plate 322, and projects forward from the lower front lower end of the lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view. By pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball removal button 333 can be slid in the front-rear direction by the lower plate ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower plate body 325. It is attached to. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The lower plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so as to be accommodated in a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side to the upper side at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower plate ball removing base 335 has a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower plate ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are also opened. And are in communication with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower plate ball removal base 335 about a position to the left of the lower plate ball removal button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball extraction base 335. As a result, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown, the lower plate ball removing base 335 has a holding device for holding the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball removing button. A lower plate ball pulling spring that urges the 333 forward is attached. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved to the rear. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is maintained in an open state, and the lower plate is maintained. The game ball in the 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed backward to release the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removing spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. By moving, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. As a result, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327 also moves the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, simply operating the upper plate ball removal button 327 causes the dollar box via the lower plate 322. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in removing the ball. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and FIG. 53 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are lined up within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a tubular opening extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the push detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to abut against the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the push detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference of the transparent button lens 411 so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame body 416 that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c formed by a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the cutout portion 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral opening 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the outer side in the radial direction from the plurality of first LEDs 423a and the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the operation button 410 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 consists of four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically at the center, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, and an operation button internal decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and has a short tubular shape in the front-rear direction and has translucency. The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the left and right sides of the through holes 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decorative member 432, respectively. The operation button upper inner decorative board 435 and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. It includes a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three pressure detection sensors 440, which are attached to the 439 respectively to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side is provided.

The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially quadrangular through hole 431a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a has a size that fits within the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed to a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the outer side of the through hole 431a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 431b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. ..

Further, the unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c that projects forward in a flat plate shape from a portion where the inner decorative substrate 435 on the operation button is attached and a portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper part of the front surface. It has. With this light-shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending shortly in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. It is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 432e, which project rearward from the surface and are mounted on the unit base 431.

The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decorative member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button internal decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , It is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric circles centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b. It is provided with a second button internal decoration portion 432 g (see FIG. 63), which is provided in a plurality of shapes. The second button inner decorative portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending parallel to the four inner periphery of the opening 432c.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed of a transparent member. The rear part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 cannot be clearly seen due to the lens effect of the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and these LEDs are mounted. By emitting light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be made to emit light. By luminescent decoration of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 is white. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431. When the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end is a guide boss projecting rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front surface of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one is on the lower left side. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b of the above via the sensor holder 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decorative board 433, an operation button right inner decorative board 434, and an operation button upper inner decorative board. Connection between 435, decorative board 436 under the operation button, frame top lens decorative board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460, and the door body relay board (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. Is for relaying.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 442a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operating unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect unit mounting portion of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4e. Door frame side production display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front side and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. It is provided with a bottomed square tubular mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed to have the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape is attached so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It can be seen in a state, and the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. , The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of the second embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450, which is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front side, and the second base unit 450, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are provided.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A covers the surfaces of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it is provided. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view.

The second production operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decorative board 482, a switching drive motor 492, and a projector 500. The purpose is to relay the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It is provided with an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

The specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex toward the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A right-angled triangle and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are arranged in multiple rows alternately over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and a button lens 411 in the truss-shaped pattern. A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a base facing the center side of the surface, a side extending from both ends of the base toward the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base. And the diagonal side of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss-like pattern to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right-angled triangle pattern, and the right-angled triangle shape from the tip of that side. It is formed by a modified isosceles triangular pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the diagonal side of the pattern of.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle constituting the first button decorative portion 411a has its own surface facing in a different direction and is formed in a polyhedral shape. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, whereas the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at this portion, and the light passing through this portion is diffusely refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see due to diffuse refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear side open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 is held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the tubular shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from the rear.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The second effect operation unit 400A can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached and attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

The second base unit 450 protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the rear of the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c in the button base 413 of the operation button 410. An operation button spring through which four cylindrical button shafts 452 and four button shafts 452, which are slidably inserted from each other, are inserted and the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 is urged forward. (Not shown), and three pressure detection sensors 454, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect each of the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 has an annular main body 451a, a cover portion 451b that hemispherically protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface to the rear of the main body portion 451a in the shape of a blind hole, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e, which is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the main body portion 451a, and the upper bearing portion 451e, which is vertically recessed from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body portion 451a, are semicircular in coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e. A pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the lower bearing portion 451f and the main body portion 451a that are recessed in a (U shape) shape and regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And have.

The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference formed in substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, rotates. There is. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass through from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can be done.

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. ..

Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the operation buttons are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. It is urging 410 forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape with the front open and extending rearward. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are coaxially located at the center of a portion extending in a semicircular shape. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front side, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

Each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e in which the extension line (plane) thereof is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed so as to be separated from each other in a predetermined angle circumferential direction with the central axis as the center. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulate the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by abutting the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in each pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and by magnetically adhering to an iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, they come into contact with the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the second with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second production display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. The upper bearing member 480, which is mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounts the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 are mounted. It includes a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

Further, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side rotates the screen unit 470 and is installed in the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and in the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting an effect image onto the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505, which is open at the front, and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted so as to cover from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. The upper cover 506 is provided, and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470 are provided.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 around an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible to the player.

The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and has translucency, and a disk-shaped main screen 471 that has one end side in the axial direction as a part of the outer circumference and has a central portion as an axis. The sub-screen 472, which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, is milky white and has translucency, and the main screen 471 protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of both ends in the axial direction to the outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It penetrates the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape that is transparent and imitates a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen 472 that is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on a surface facing the main screen 471 and an end portion of the main screen 471 opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. It is provided with a semi-arc-shaped peripheral decorative member 478 that extends shortly.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape coincides with the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer circumference to the center side, and the peripheral decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction and the inside of the peripheral decoration portion 472a are closed. It is provided with a curved surface-shaped screen general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape as a whole so that the inner peripheral side projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 and are rotatably attached.

The actuating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference by meshing with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and the circumferential end portion of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b is provided with a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc shape about the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetized with a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become like.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness thereof changes in a complicated manner, the transmitted light is intricately refracted and the rear can be visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the characters "PUSH" are formed in the relief of the sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull.

The subscreen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the subscreen 472 so as to form a gap between the subscreen 472 and the subscreen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the front side (the side facing the subscreen 472). Is implemented. The outer shape of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is white. By emitting light from the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the sub-screen decorative member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can strongly illuminate the "eyes" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH" by emitting light from the LED 477a.

Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a is made to emit light. , The point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the subscreen decorative substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 on the subscreen 472.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image that is projected from the projector 500 over the entire semi-cylindrical shape and attracts the attention of the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decorative member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 in the center on the back side. The purpose is to display an effect image that is projected onto the sub-screen decorative member 476 and brightly colors the surroundings of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the operation button 410 is pressed by the player by the light emitting decoration of the sub-screen decorative member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage people.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are the main body portions of the unit base 451 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f which are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of the 451a. Further, in the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451 the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper part of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and the bearing member. It includes a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the shaft core of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the screen is internally formed. A stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arcuately recessed recess 481a allows the stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state of being assembled to the second production operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and whose rotary shaft projects into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first spur gear that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear and can be meshed with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 495.

The rotation drive unit 490 is assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 that is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward in a columnar shape from the projector body 501 and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. It is installed like this.

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. By mounting the projector mounting member 505 on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, it is possible to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating the front and rear are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is facing forward at the first position and the detection piece 475c at the second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c and the time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signals of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and cushions the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above to reduce the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit, and the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat cushioning member 511, whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. It includes a cushioning base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively accessible to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511 and a leg piece that projects downward from both left and right sides of the main body 512a in the front-rear direction and extends in the front-rear direction. 512b and. The leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

In this cushioning unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510. Move down to. The impact is absorbed by compressing the cushioning member 511. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512. Since the left and right leg pieces 512b form a gap between the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body 512a bends, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , The impact will be transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operating unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4g-7. Action effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74 (b) is a sub of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, and (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, and (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410, and to let the player operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. be.

The total height of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being attached to the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is tilted at an angle of 63 degrees so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the gaming board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as good as possible for the front view (projective view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is slid on the four tubular guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the second effect operation unit 400A, in a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is set to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. It is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the above.

In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has the center side (central axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (near the upper part of the operation button 410) where the player can relatively easily press the operation button, the player who presses the operation button 410 vibrates strongly. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a in which the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is applied in multiple stages due to elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second effect operating unit 400A, etc. is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to be damaged. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) that protrudes forward, it is compared with the case where it is made into a flat plate shape. It has high strength and rigidity, and even if it is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. By decorating the unevenness by combining the triangles of the above, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the CL direction of the central axis), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side. A gap is located between the 460A and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (player side) to be seen from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470. It is possible to make the members of the door difficult to see. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can see the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc., pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outer part (the part of the crosshatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (in FIG. 76, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line). ) Is hidden from the player's side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the second production operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

Further, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen general part of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The 472b and the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 can be rotated. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. Since the movement exceeding the player's expectation is performed in the button 410, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decorative member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain the player.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 capable of visually recognizing the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner circumference to the center side of the button frame 412. A polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width is provided, and a door frame side second effect display arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 is provided. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged in a row, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap each other so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration portion 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the player's eyes As the position moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, so the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change, making it possible to show the player a moving decoration, and at the same time, the player can create a deep, three-dimensional decoration. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the driving of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and are vertically extended. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row traverses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decorative portion 472a is in a state in which the peripheral decorative portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a circular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or the decoration can be changed. The change can make the player suggest the arrival of an opportunity, etc., and can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a screen having different screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) that can be switched to the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given and entertained. More specifically, in the screen unit 470, the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 having the disk-shaped and relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center are the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be separated from the axis by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is milky white having translucency. Through the main screen 471 of the above, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the surface of the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the display screen of the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is different from the above, to surprise the player, and to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull appears to be located in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear in this state, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since the flat and translucent sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is blocked, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be luminescently decorated by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. The screen decoration member 476 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, by emitting the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light emission.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side emits LED 477a of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 made of decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decorative member 476, which is inside the sub-screen decorative member 476, is luminescently decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decorative effect is completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly draw the player's attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the production image inside the production image, so that the production image is partially bright, which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a production image that makes the player more entertaining can be displayed.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction in a state where the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500, and the main screen 471 is changed to the sub screen 472. When the sub-screen 472 is changed to the main screen 471, the part located in the projection range of the projector 500 on the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 while the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect is produced in which the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate and move on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the decoration of the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478). As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front surface and the light such as the effect image to the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided with the projector 500, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420 The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with a conventional pachinko machine. , Can give a strong impact to the player and entertain.

[3-4h. Overall configuration of the third embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the third effect operation unit 400B, which is the third embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. 78 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 78 (b) is a right side surface of the third effect operation unit. It is a figure. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80A is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The third effect operation unit 400B can be pressed by the player in the same manner as the effect operation unit 400. Hereinafter, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The third effect operation unit 400B has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. , The third base unit 520 which is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the third base unit 520 which can be visually recognized from the player side through the operation button 410. It is provided with a decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411.

The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, has the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 has a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged in a row along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch formed by a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The frame-shaped frame main body 416 having the portion 416c and attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b are attached from the rear side. It includes a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side so as to close the notch 416c.

The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The third effect operation unit 400B can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the first LED 422a and the first LED 423a capable of emitting and decorating only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, and the frame side of the frame unit 415. It includes a second LED 422b and a second LED 423b that can illuminate and decorate only the lens 417.

The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B has an operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. ..

The third base unit 520 is composed of a housing wall portion 521a that is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and is hemispherically recessed rearward in the central portion, and a blind hole that is opened forward on the outside of the housing wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having one holding hole 521b, a frame top lens decorative substrate 522 attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 521, and four inserted into each of the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521. The operation button spring 523, the three sensor holders 524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 521, the three pressure detection sensors 525 attached to each sensor holder 524 to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the unit. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 attached to the rear side of the base 521 and the relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526. And have.

Further, the third base unit 520 has a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shafts of the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521 and the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. It includes a first drive gear (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 529 that meshes with the first drive gear and is rotatably attached to the unit base 521. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 described later.

The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. In addition to the accommodating wall portion 521a and the holding hole 521b, the unit base 521 accommodates the accommodating wall portion 521c, which projects forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached at the upper front surface. A plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating the wall portion 521a, a left protruding portion 521e protruding forward from substantially the center in the vertical direction on the left outer side of the accommodating wall portion 521a, and accommodating so as to face the left protruding portion 521e. 521g of the right protruding portion 521f projecting forward from the right outer side of the wall portion 521a and substantially the center in the vertical direction, 521g of the left shaft portion extending in a columnar shape from the left protruding portion 521e to the right, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g. A right bearing portion 521h that coaxially penetrates the right protruding portion 521f with respect to the axis (first axis CL1) is provided.

The accommodating wall portion 521a that is hemispherically recessed rearward of the unit base 521 is formed so that substantially half of the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be accommodated without contacting the recessed front surface side.

The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at four corners on the outer side of the accommodating wall portion 521a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 521b is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 521b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 521b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 521b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 521b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the two upper holding holes 521b, respectively. ..

The light-shielding wall portion 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent the light from the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 522. It is for doing.

The left end of the unit base 521 g is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530 from which the left end extending horizontally is fixed to the left protruding portion 521e. It is a thing. Further, in the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the cylindrical right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably inserted into the inside. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with respect to the first axis CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 allow the decorative rotating body unit 530 to be rotatably attached around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs. Further, the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 is white, and the mounted LED is a full-color LED.

The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 521b in the unit base 521. When the operation button spring 523 is assembled to the third effect operation unit 400B, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. These operation button springs 523 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front surface of the unit base 521, one of the three pressure detection sensors 525 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other one is on the lower left side. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 521b of the above via the sensor holder 524, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 525 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 521. These three pressure detection sensors 525 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 on the left outer side (right side of the front view) of the accommodating wall portion 521a in a rear view. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decorative board 522, a pressure detection sensor 525, and an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. , The effect operation unit of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 (not shown). It is for relaying the connection of.

The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 527a attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the unit base 521. When the relay board cover 527 is assembled on the door frame 3, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a extends substantially horizontally, and the leg portion 527a is between the leg portion 527a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted downward, and the effect operation unit of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the dish unit cover 326. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 326a or the like and prevent their damage.

The first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and the left shaft portion 521 g of the unit base 521 and the left shaft portion 521 g of the unit base 521 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. The decorative rotating body unit 530 rotatably attached by the right bearing portion 521h can be rotated around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotating body unit]
The decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the rear. The decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and can show the player a movable effect through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown in the figure, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is formed to have a substantially spherical outer surface shape as a whole.

The decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and is one of the rotating body base unit 531 formed in a disk shape and the disk-shaped rotating body base unit 531. The first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached to the outside of the surface and the first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached to the outside of the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532 of the rotating body base unit 531. The second decorative surface portion 533, which has a different decoration from the 532, and the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit, which is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 and for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 ( (See FIG. 83).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. It is attached to the surface opposite to the mounted first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 of the rotating body base unit 531 and can irradiate light toward the second decorative surface 533. It includes a second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The rotating body base unit 531 has a disk shape having a predetermined thickness, and the inside is hollow. The rotating body base unit 531 is attached to a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates the spur gear-shaped rotating body gear 531a that meshes with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520 and the center of the rotating body gear 531a. The left shaft portion 521g is inserted into the left bearing portion 531b on the rotating body side so as to be relatively rotatable, and the left bearing portion 531b on the rotating body side and the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating body gear 531a project in a cylindrical shape so as to be relatively rotatable in the right bearing portion 521h. A right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side to be inserted and a stopper 531d protruding outward on the base end side of the right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side are provided.

The rotating body gear 531a, the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center of the rotating body base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. It is arranged coaxially with respect to the uniaxial line CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to abut on the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d regulates the rotation range around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction of the decorative rotating body unit 530 with respect to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angle range (here, 180 degrees).

Further, the rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing cylinder portion 531e that extends concentrically with the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center and extends in a cylindrical shape, and a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f that decorate the outer peripheral surface. , Is equipped. The bearing cylinder portion 531e has a shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 inserted therein, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably attached by bushes attached to both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 so that the heat inside the rotating body base unit 531 can be released to the outside and decorates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531. It can improve the appearance.

Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is mounted inside the rotating body base unit 531 and has a peripheral surface on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f are mounted. A decorative substrate may be provided. By appropriately emitting the LED of the peripheral surface decorative portion decorative substrate, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The entire first decorative surface portion 532 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a logo decoration portion 532a composed of predetermined characters provided in the center of the bulging surface and a translucent first decorative portion 532a formed radially around the logo decoration portion 532a. A translucent first sub-decoration that is formed so as to fill the outer periphery of the first main decorative portion 532b and the first main decorative portion 532b, and the outer peripheral end forms the circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532. A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d projecting from the back surface in a columnar shape along the center are provided.

The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are light-emitting and decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing cylinder portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed to have a length that penetrates the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 and extends to the opposite side in a state of being assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the central axis is the first axis. The state coincides with the second axis CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

The entire first decorative surface portion 532 can rotate around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

The second decorative surface portion 533 is arranged between the rotating decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotating decorative portion 533a, and the rotating body base unit 531 and the rotating body base unit. It is provided with a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to 531. Since the rotary decoration portion 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

The rotary decoration portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape having a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotating decorative portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. The fixed decoration portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of lines extending radially. The rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b are partially translucent, and are light-emitting decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is installed in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotating shaft projects rearward. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 534a is attached to the rotating shaft of the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-shaped decorative surface gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 connects the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotary decorative surface portion 533a) via the second drive gear 534a, the decorative surface portion gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

The front surface of the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 is white, and the mounted LEDs are full-color LEDs.

In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction with the second axis CL2 as the center. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided at a distance of 180 degrees in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. Action effect of the third production operation unit]
Next, the operation and effect of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, 88 and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and FIG. 88 (b) shows (a) with the central axis of the operation button extended. It is an explanatory view seen from the direction of the face. FIG. 89A is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the first decorative surface portion facing forward, and FIG. 89B is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state which turned forward.

The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the player participation type production presented to the player.

Although not shown, the third effect operation unit 400B is formed so that the total height is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through port 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. ing. Further, the total width of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The third effect operation unit 400B is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the third effect operation unit 400B, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527, which is the bottom surface, is between the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the central axis CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is tilted at an angle of 63 degrees so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (third effect operation unit 400B). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the gaming board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the third effect operation unit 400B (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projected from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the third effect operation unit 400B, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 523. Has been done. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect operation unit 400B has an operation button similar to the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A due to the urging force of the operation button spring 523. The front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the 410 is in contact with a portion of the frame unit 415 on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B has the center side (central axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 523. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment is performed. Like the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A, the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL tilted with respect to the vertical line, so that the player can operate the button 410 from above like a conventional pachinko machine. When the 410 is pressed, a portion away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed as shown by the white arrow in FIG.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the third effect operation unit 400B is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire third effect operation unit 400B can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the third effect operation unit 400B. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position where the player is relatively easy to press, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, and the game can be played. You can surprise people and entertain the production.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the bottom plate portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. , The mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like can be bent downward to absorb the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted, and the effect operation of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the dish unit cover 326 is performed. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the unit mounting portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the third effect operation unit 400B or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 or the first Since the three-effect operation unit 400B and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to damage the game hall side. The increase in burden can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, since the third effect operation unit 400B includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. Due to the uneven decoration of the button lens 411, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge portion of the portion inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), there are an inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and an outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Although the gap between them is located, the gap on the outer circumference of the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be made difficult to see from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. .. As a result, even if the rotating decorative rotating body unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. The decorative rotating body unit 530 can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) is provided with the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on them, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be light-emitting and decorated in the operation button 410. Then, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are light-emitting decorated, so that the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is provided with a tubular main body portion 413a that surrounds the outer periphery of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the light from the decorative rotating body unit 530 is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate in the decorative board unit 420. The first LED 422a of the 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be made to. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a tubular main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is located between the shape of the inner cylinder portion 416d (see FIGS. 52 and 83, etc.), and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a is emitted from the inside of the main body portion 413a (decorative rotating body unit 530 side) or the inner cylinder. It does not leak to the outside of the portion 416d, and only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 in the third base unit 520 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs. A flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 521c projects forward from the lower side of the portion of the third base unit 520 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 of the unit base 521 is attached to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can visually recognize the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 from the front. In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B is in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is directed forward as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 substantially coincides with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). Further, in a normal state, the logo decoration portion 532a having a directional rotation position around the second axis CL2 on the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated and stationary in a state of facing the correct direction.

Further, in a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotating body base unit 531 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in a normal state, the stopper 531d restricts the rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the direction in which the upper portion moves backward with respect to the horizontally extending first axis CL1.

In this normal state, the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is passed through the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 so that the upper portion thereof moves forward. Then, when the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d comes into contact with the front surface below the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, and further rotation occurs. Is regulated, and the rotary drive by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit is stopped.

Although not shown, the third base unit 520 is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation position of the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 is based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. The rotation position is controlled.

When the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward as shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state of being well visible through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 substantially coincides with the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 via the second drive gear 534a and the decorative surface gear 534b. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be rotated at the same time (see FIG. 89). In other words, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 that is orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1. Can be done.

Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation positions of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at arbitrary rotation positions. Therefore, even if the logo decoration portion 532a having directionality is provided like the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotation can be stopped at a position corresponding to the directionality, so that the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 is impaired. It is possible to ensure that the decorativeness is exhibited.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B uses the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530 to make the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Each can be luminescent and decorated. The light emitting decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotates around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 extends horizontally. This can be performed even when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 which is orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

Since the second decorative surface portion 533 includes a rotating decorative portion 533a and a non-rotating fixed decorative portion 533b, the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 when the rotating decorative portion 533a is rotated. When a plurality of LEDs are made to emit light, a part of the light radiated forward through the fixed decorative portion 533b is periodically caused by a translucent portion or a colored portion of the rotating rotating decorative portion 533a. It is possible to show the player a flickering and blinking light emitting decoration, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in a state where the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 and the like, a movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90A and the like, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decoration portion 532a is directed forward.

As an example of the movable effect of rotating only around the horizontally extending first axis CL1, the first drive gear (not shown) is changed from the normal state (state of FIG. 90 (a)) by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. (Omitted) Through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotating body gear 531a, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view by 180 degrees at a stretch without stopping in the middle, and the first decoration It is assumed that the second decorative surface portion 533 arranged on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 faces forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the second decorative surface portion 533 moves from above and appears while rotating so that the first decorative surface portion 532 moves downward. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 suddenly switches to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit is such that the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates in the counterclockwise direction within an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in the right side view from the normal state. The first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 can be slightly seen with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f sandwiched above the first decorative surface portion 532. (See FIG. 90B), the player can strongly attract the attention of the player to the second decorative surface portion 533 that appears and disappears when the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates. (Ii) Depending on whether or not the decorative surface portion 533 faces forward, the player's expectation for the arrival of an opportunity can be increased. After that, by returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the original state (the state shown in FIG. 90A), it is possible to make the player suggest that the chance does not come. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotating body unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 is facing forward (the state shown in FIG. 90 (d)), it is possible to suggest that an opportunity has arrived, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view from the normal state, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward in between. Since they are located in their respective states and the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 become unclear, a plurality of circumferences provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are relatively present. The decoration of the surface decoration portion 531f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be enjoyed. Further, the decorative rotating body unit 530 stops rotating at an intermediate position with the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f facing forward, so that the player can feel a change in the gaming situation, and the player's game can be predicted. It is possible to raise the expectation for. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as in the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. , The same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right-angle view from the normal state (see FIG. 90C), and a predetermined angle is centered on the rotation angle. The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a range. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more often across the rotating body base unit 531 (plural peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front can be exciting and exciting, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). It is also possible to perform a movable effect that operates in the opposite direction to the above based on the state, and it is possible to achieve the same action and effect as described above. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels an ascending momentum. This makes it possible to raise expectations for the game, and the upward rotation of the second decorative surface portion 533 causes the player's line of sight to be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B. It is possible to entertain the game, the production, and the like in the game area 5a, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When executing the above-mentioned movable effect, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately made to emit light, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 and the second are appropriately emitted. The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately luminescent and decorated. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be more easily seen, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference between the decorations. , The premium feeling due to the difference in decoration can be fully exhibited, and those decorations can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, since the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410 by illuminating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533, the player participation type production in which the operation button 410 is pressed is executed. Occasionally, the player can be prompted to press the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player participation type production to entertain.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, the movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91A, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is the effect operation unit second drive motor. By 534, it is rotated around the second axis CL2 (here, in the clockwise direction) extending so as to coincide with the central axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the directional logo decorative portion 532a.

Effect operation unit As an example of a movable effect performed in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated by the second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 (second decorative surface portion 533) is set to the second axis. While rotating around CL2, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by 180 degrees at a stretch without stopping in the middle. The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is in a state of facing forward (see FIG. 91 (d)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that was rotating clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 with a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotating decorative surface portion 533a) becomes the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotating counterclockwise in the opposite direction, so it can have a strong impact on the player, attract the player's attention, and something to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. However, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in the counterclockwise direction within an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in the right side view. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, it rotates around the second axis CL2 on the upper side of the first decorative surface portion 532. A plurality of peripheral decorative surfaces 531f that are not used can be seen, and a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 can be slightly seen above the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, by reciprocating the decorative rotating body unit 530 around the first axis CL1, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the visible and hidden second decorative surface portion 533, and the second decorative surface portion can be attracted. Whether or not the 533 faces forward can raise the player's expectation for the arrival of an opportunity. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state of FIG. 91A), or the second decoration. When the face portion 533 is turned forward (the state shown in FIG. 91 (b)) and the player is in the desired state, it is possible to convince the player that an opportunity has arrived, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to. After turning the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 forward, the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decorative portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532 is in the correct direction. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532, which can suggest the arrival of an opportunity and raise the player's expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is changed from the state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. Is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 faces forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). .. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward in between. The decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 should be obscured because they are located in the same state and are moving so as to move in the same direction. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show a plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body base unit 531 sandwiched between them. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f to enjoy the decoration. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as in the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. , The same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, while the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 to move the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 forward. In the state facing toward (see FIG. 91 (c)), the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range around the first axis CL around that state. To rotate forward and reverse. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side, each of which is rotating around the second axis CL2, can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more, sandwiching the rotating body base unit 531 (plural peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Therefore, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front, which entertains the player and suppresses the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state of FIG. 91A), or the second decoration. By setting the surface portion 533 to face forward (the state shown in FIG. 91B), the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 from a normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is moved around the first axis CL. Rotate 180 degrees to rotate the rotating second decorative surface 533 forward, or from a normal state, rotate the decorative rotating unit 530 180 degrees around the first axis CL to perform the second decoration. After the surface portion 533 is turned forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are in a state of being rotated around the second axis CL2, and based on this state (see FIG. 91 (d)), the above Can also perform a movable effect that performs the opposite operation, and can produce the same effect as described above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface portion 533 with respect to the circumference of the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, the player can feel the ascending momentum, the expectation for the game can be increased, and the second axis line. By moving the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2 upward, the player's line of sight can be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B, and within the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the game and the production in the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

When executing the above-mentioned movable effect, the rotation of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is set to reverse rotation in the middle. Alternatively, it may be reciprocated within a predetermined angle range. Further, the rotation speed of the decorative rotating body unit 530 by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit around the first axis CL1 and the second of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit. The rotation speed may be the same as the rotation speed around the axis CL2, or may be different. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of the movable effect by the third effect operation unit 400B, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by making it difficult for the player to get bored due to the abundant variations of the movable effect. can.

Further, when executing the above-mentioned movable effect, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately made to emit light, and are rotated around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately luminescent and decorated. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting and decorated with uniform light. On the other hand, when the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 is blinking due to the periodic light blocking by the rotating decorative portion 533a. It can be luminescent and decorated with light. In this way, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be lit up in various ways, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type production in which the operation button 410 is pressed and operated. It is possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410 at the time of execution, and it is possible to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type production.

[3-4h-8. Heat exhaust action of the third production operation unit]
Next, the heat exhausting action of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 and the like. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing an air flow due to the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged behind the operation button 410 is the unit base 521 (accommodation wall portion 521a) of the operation button 410 and the third base unit 520. The front and rear are arranged in the closed button space AS (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating the front and rear are formed in the accommodating wall portion 521a that forms the rear portion of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Therefore, the button interior space AS communicates with the inside of the mounting space 326j of the dish unit cover 326 to which the third effect operation unit 400B is mounted through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, in the decorative rotating body unit 530, one shaft member 532d rotatably attached to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 coaxially with the second axis CL. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 that rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531, a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f made of through-hole-shaped decorations are formed, and through these peripheral surface decorative portions 531f, the inside and the outside of the rotating body base unit 531 are formed. Communicate with each other.

Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 rotatably attached around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates around the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape capable of generating wind when rotated.

In the third effect operation unit 400B having the above configuration, with the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are placed on the effect operation unit No. When the two drive motors 534 rotate in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 causes a plurality of accommodating wall portions 521a covering the rear. Through the ventilation port 521d, it will come out to the rear side of the accommodating wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92 (a)). By this flow of wind, the air in the space AS in the button in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside to be ventilated. Since the space inside the button AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f, the heat released from the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit is transferred to the plurality of circumferences. It can be discharged to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (inside the mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320) through the surface decoration portion 531f, the space inside the button AS, and the ventilation port 521d. As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature inside the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects due to heat.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, with the second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are placed on the effect operation unit No. 533. When the two drive motors 534 rotate in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the accommodating wall portion 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the interior rotating body unit 530 escapes to the rear side of the accommodating wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92 (b)). Due to this wind flow, the air in the button interior space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated, so that the air is installed in the rotating body base unit 531. The heat released from the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit is passed through the plurality of peripheral decoration portions 531f, the space inside the button AS, and the ventilation port 521d to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320). Can be discharged to the inside). As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature inside the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects due to heat.

The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the accommodation wall portion 521a in the unit base 521 is passed through the exhaust ports (not shown) formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340, and the pachinko machine 1 It is discharged to the outside of.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 93 (a). The door frame left side unit 540 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 540 is a strip-shaped left unit base 541 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 541. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 542 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 544, the left unit lower decorative base 545, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 544 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 attached to the front side of the left unit base 541 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the left unit lower decorative base 545, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 547 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 546.

The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 541a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 541, LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 541a of the left unit base 541 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit diffusing lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 542A and a lower diffusing lens member 542B. The left unit diffuser lens member 542 has a circular lens portion 542a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 541a in the left unit base 541 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the quadrangular opening 541a. It includes a lens unit 542b. The door frame left side unit 540 is assembled on the door frame 3 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542a and the square lens portion 542b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With the circular lens portion 542a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear can be irradiated forward in a point shape. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 542a.

The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 includes a central diffuse reflector portion 542c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface and a front diffuser lens portion 542d formed outside the central diffuse reflector portion 542c on the front surface. , The input lens portion 542e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 542c), and the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 542e. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 542f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 542d of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffusion reflection portion 542c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 542d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 542f of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 542f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 542f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 542f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

The square lens portion 542b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

In the square lens unit 542b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 542e into the square lens unit 542b. Since the input lens unit 542e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 542c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 542c is in the direction perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 542b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 542c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 542b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 542f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 542f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 542c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 96). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 542c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 542b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 542f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 542b through the front diffusion lens portion 542d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 542d and the front reflection portion 542f, the square lens portion 542b divides a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then divides a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Since the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 542b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light with a more uniform shade forward. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 542b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 and the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 by the light that the circular decorative portion irradiates forward from the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffuser lens member 542. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 544 on the left unit is a quadrangle having a front view extending vertically, and is formed in a square tubular shape extending back and forth. The upper decorative base 544 of the left unit is inclined so that a portion forming the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 544 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 545 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 545 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 545 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 546 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 544 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the lower decorative base 545 of the unit, the lower end of the upper doglegged part, and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 546 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 547 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 547 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101 and the like. FIG. 97A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 97 (a). FIG. 101 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 101 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 is a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. It is attached to the member 553 and is attached to the right side surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body portion 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, they are formed substantially in the center of each vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched from the left end side in the front view to the right in a quadrangular shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at substantially the center of each vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view as the whole moves forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left and the right side of the right unit right shading member 560 is right. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left shading member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view in a short flat plate shape, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided with a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths as a set, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 101, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. The light emitting decoration can be made only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedron decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a large plate shape from the door frame left side unit 540, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to think that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105 and the like. FIG. 102A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 102B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 102. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extending left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 574 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 574, respectively, and close the plurality of slits 574b. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 574 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central side end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 574, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 574 penetrate through the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 574. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574, respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 574 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 574 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 574, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 574 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the deformed pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the deformed pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 574 near both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side near the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the irregularities of the square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 (see FIG. 105). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 (see FIG. 105). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 574. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right triangles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right triangle lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 574 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 574 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to display the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and are arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around you.

Further, since the door frame 3 can illuminate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface of both the left and right sides of the 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated from each other on the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be light-emitting decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with a high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration with a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, are projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a front view right side surface of the main body frame base 600. The locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right of the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the launch device mounting portion 604. The door of the board unit 900 penetrates back and forth through the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 on the lower left side. A circular shape that penetrates back and forth between the connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward and the lower left side of the game board mounting part 602 when viewed from the front, and allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. It includes an opening 607 for a speaker.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 can be rotated at the rear end. It includes a rear extension 608 that can be attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge member 620 for attaching the upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side and the upper hinge member 640 for attaching the lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side are attached. A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame side upper hinge member and body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The upper hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrate the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the upper hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, and the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is pivotally supported. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame base 600.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates vertically through the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the shaped plate material is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 which penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The door frame hinge hole 644 for axially supporting the door frame and the door frame 3 extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. It is provided with a regulation piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the door.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600 can be reinforced by this reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106, 108 and 109. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft is attached to the launch base 681. A launch solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a ball hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 682, and a ball hammer 683 that extends diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball struck by the ball hammer 683 is guided through the launch rail 684 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the lower foul cover unit 270, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower part of the unit base 701. A protrusion protrudes from the front end in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is transmitted according to the rotation direction of the key. It includes a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 128. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 119 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in (a). Further, FIG. 120 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. 120 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. Is.

Further, FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. be. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the guide path opening / closing door is closed in the lower full taxiing path unit, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guide path opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is provided with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left and aligned in two front-rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 128) that hangs swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal guide path 861 that guides the taxiing ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides the taxiing ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the taxiing ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A guide path opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 that guides the taxiing ball receiving port 274 to the full tank guide path 861 and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. It is provided with a lower full taxiing path unit 860 and the like.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 through the partition plate 823. A pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and are arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. It includes an 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. The 821b is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass through at the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in the state of being assembled to the ball guidance unit 820. There is.

The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole protruding outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member front 825 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball breakage detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 826a through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member 826 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 128). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game balls are paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member is in front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the 825 or the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. NS. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the out of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball, and by shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, the interest of the player is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight Therefore, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate the movable pieces 825a and 826a satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. The lower end side of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. As the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the single member and the 826 after the movable single member can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. By replenishing the game balls and shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and has a payout entrance 831a that opens in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through, and a payout entrance 831a that opens so that the game ball can pass through near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and the payout passage 831d that communicates the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b and allows the game ball to circulate. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c to allow game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped with an open front side, a payout entrance 832a that opens in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through, and a payout that opens so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout passage 832d that communicates the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to circulate. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c to allow game balls to circulate.

Further, the payout device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and the rear side is open, and a rotating shaft mounted in the front box 831 and the rotating shaft penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to, the driven gear 837 that meshes with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and the shaft member 838 which is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 that is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 831d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball-extracting passage 831e is a form in which a portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally to the lower right from the payout entrance 831a is further extended from a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball ejection port 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and then bends so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 832d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 832a to the lower right is further extended, and the height is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It is provided with a plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c which is cylindrically projected rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 839b and the plurality (three) of the front blades 839b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. It cannot be discharged from the outlets 831b and 832b downward. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter D1 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions, and has a main body portion 843a in which the lower portion is bent to form a front view shape and a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A barrel portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843a. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 120) formed of through holes penetrating back and forth at the lower portion bent in a dogleg shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, the rotation is possible at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment has the ball pulling lever 844 slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 120 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a that is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball pulling movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball pulling movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state, and its own weight. A force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball pulling lever 844 regulates the rotation counterclockwise, so that the normal state is maintained.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 120 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing and mounting a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dust, etc. that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball pulling movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball pulling movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes the game ball to come into contact with it. The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that opens upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper ball storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper ball pulling passage 850 g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball pulling entrance 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball pulling passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 is opened downward with the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h arranged in this order from the left side when viewed from the front. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly under the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b. Is located directly below the ball ejection ports 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full taxiing path unit 850 is assembled in the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal guide paths of the lower full taxiing path unit 860. Each of the 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower taxiing guideway 865 opens directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 128).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that are discharged by the payout device 830 and are discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly under the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the taxiing 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the taxiing 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiing path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal taxiing port 850d of the upper full taxiing path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 in the normal taxiing path 861. And a full taxiing path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full taxiing port 850e of the upper full taxiing path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the full taxiing port 274 of the door frame 3. The guide path opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the guide path opening / closing door 863 are normally used as the guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged in the direction of closing the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and is above the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball pulling guide path 865 for discharging to.

In the lower taxiing path unit 860, the normal taxiing path 861, the full taxiing path 862, and the lower taxiing guiding path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of these normal guide paths 861, full tank guide paths 862, and lower taxiing guide paths 865 are open upward. Further, the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiing path 862 extends forward at a position lower than that of the normal taxiing path 861. These normal guide paths 861, full tank guide paths 862, and lower taxiing guide paths 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts as shown in the figure.

The guide path opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guide path 861 and the full taxiing path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiing path unit 860, the full taxiing path 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiing path 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiing path 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The guide path opening / closing door 863 is normally attached below the guide path 861 and at a position on the left side of the full taxiing path 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth.

The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left side from the base portion 863a in a flat plate shape and can normally close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a in a front view, and is inclined so that the front end surface protrudes forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The guideway opening / closing door 863 is urged in the front view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 273, the full tank socket 274, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 127). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the actuating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the guideway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 126). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game ball in the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide No game ball spills from Road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiing path 862 is opened (see FIG. 126 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide path 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiing path 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 861 and the full tank are filled. The penetrating ball passage 273 and the full taxiing port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiing path 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiing path 861 and the full taxiing path 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are opened by rotating the guide path opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanisms of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of the game ball, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the taxiing section 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of the above. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is canceled.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled in the state of being. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board, and the peripheral control board and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is a thing. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 135. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 134 is a front view in which the front unit in the game board is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. Further, FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the game content played by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 212) for controlling the above.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions in the game, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball. By accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of the game ball according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the gate portion 2003. A large prize opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, and a predetermined area in which the game balls accepted in the large prize opening 2005 are distributed. The reception space 2006 and the first reception entrance 2007 and the second reception entrance 2008 for receiving the game balls in the reception space 2006 are provided.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. , The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the start which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. It is attached to the right side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving entrance 2007, and a second receiving entrance. An attacker unit 2400 having 2008, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. It has.

The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The first effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3031 in the rear view, and the second effect drive board 3033 attached to the right side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It has.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back upper movable effect unit 3200 attached to the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 and above the opening. The back-up movable effect unit 3200 is provided with the back-up movable effect unit 3300 attached to the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back-up movable effect unit 3200.

The back-rear movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 installed in the back box 3010 and the back-rear movable effect unit 3350 installed near the left and right sides of the swivel table 3380 of the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350. The left movable effect unit 3400, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the upper part of the swivel table 3380, and the back rear lower movable effect attached to the lower part of the swivel table 3380. It is equipped with a unit 3700.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses projecting rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of mounting bosses into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, the plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the mounting bosses and the panel holder (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1123 of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 136. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch portion 1123 which is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1123 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and normally guides the lower full taxiing path unit 860. The front end openings of the road 861 and the full taxiing road 862 face forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 133) that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to a board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 3031 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first inlet sensor 2404, and a second inlet sensor. It is connected to 2405, a start port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a V winning port solenoid 2416, a general winning port sensor 3101, a first starting port sensor 3102, and a magnetic sensor (not shown).

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 129. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 129, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of two LEDs, a normal holding display 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by the first special lottery, and the second LED consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. A special hold number indicator 1405, a second special symbol display 1406 consisting of eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004, and a second starting port. The second special hold number indicator 1407 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball to 2004, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, or When the game ball received in the big prize opening 2005 is received in the first entrance 2007, a round indicator 1408 consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005, and Mainly equipped with.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 and 133. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 212) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a main control board 1310, an effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, a main effect display device 1600, a first effect drive board 3032, and a second effect drive board 3033. Etc. are connected.

[5-7. Main production display device]
Next, the main effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The main effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The main effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The main effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The main effect display device 1600 is connected to a peripheral control board and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The main effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The main effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and insert the lock mechanism 3020. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112. It penetrates through and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball. To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted at either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the front unit 2000 includes a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has one general winning opening 2001 and a first start port 2002. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200, which is mounted on the right side of the starting port unit 2100, are mounted on the right side of the front view. A game with an attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving entrance 2007, and a second receiving entrance 2008. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to a substantially central portion of the region 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 is formed at the uppermost position directly above the out port 1008, and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time and is always open upward. One general prize that is formed on the left side of the front view below the opening 2002 and the first starting port 2002, and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time and is always open upward. It has a mouth 2001 and.

The starting port unit 2100 is transparently formed except for the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002, and is decorated on the rear side (the back front decoration of the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100). The unit 3100) can be visually recognized.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 and the first start port 2002 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and are opened upward, so that the first start is started. The mouth 2002 is located directly below the center of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, which will be described later. Therefore, when the game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver them to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 and the first starting opening sensor 3102 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, respectively (see FIG. 212). ).

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has two general winning openings 2001 arranged near the right end of the front view and a right shelf 2201 arranged above the two general winning openings 2001 and inclined so as to be lowered toward the right. The left shelf 2202 is arranged above the right shelf 2201 near the left end in the front view and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right.

Two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 open diagonally upward to the right on the lower right end of the right shelf 2201, and the other diagonally to the left on the lower left end of the right shelf 2201. It opens upward. The two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are arranged side by side so as to face each other. The side unit 2200 is transparently formed except for the two general winning openings 2001 (right shelf 2201) and the front of the left shelf 2202, and is backed through the rear side (transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100). The back front decoration unit 3100) of the unit 3000 can be visually recognized.

By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the right shelf portion 2201, and the left shelf portion 2202 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are on the far right side. The general winning opening 2001 is located slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100. Further, in the state where the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the right shelf portion 2201 is lower than the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the left shelf portion 2202 is higher than the first starting port 2002. It is a position. The left end of the left shelf portion 2202 of the side unit 2200 is close to the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right.

The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 212).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 139 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow path of the game ball in the attacker unit. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the receiving space 2006, the first entrance 2007, and the second. It has a reception entrance 2008.

The attacker unit 2400 is formed in an L-shape in which the outer shape in front view extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the upper end on the right side. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls flow up and down is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. ing. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004, and is always opened diagonally to the right at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 having a predetermined size for distributing the game balls received in the large winning opening 2005 is arranged below the large winning opening 2005. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a first inlet 2007 that can be opened upward is arranged in the receiving space 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 is always open upward on the right side of the first inlet 2007. Two entrances 2008 are arranged.

In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball, and the gate portion 2003 is penetrated vertically with a size slightly larger than the game ball. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens forward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is 5 times wider and opens upward.

The attacker unit 2400 is received by the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, the second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball received in the second start port 2004, and the large winning opening 2005. The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball, the first inlet sensor 2404 that detects the game ball received in the first entrance 2007, and the second entrance sensor 2404 that detects the game ball received in the second entrance 2008. It is equipped with a reception sensor 2405.

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening door 2411 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball of the gate portion 2003. The mouth solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result and the first entrance 2007 are opened and closed. Or, it is distributed to either the second entrance 2008) The V winning opening door 2415 and the V winning opening door 2415 are drawn by accepting a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a V winning opening solenoid 2416 that opens and closes according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and has gate portions 2003 and a second starting port 2004 at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and has a gate passage 2421 through which game balls can flow and a gate passage 2421. The left side passage 2422 extending vertically on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and allowing the game balls to circulate, the right side passage 2423 extending vertically extending vertically on the right side of the gate portion 2003 and allowing the game balls to circulate, and the gate passage 2421. An attacker that extends to the left below the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423, and above the grand prize opening 2005 so that the left end side is lower than the lower side of the right side passage 2423, and a game ball can be distributed. It is equipped with a passage 2424.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 extends vertically on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2004 to form a part of the gate passage 2421, and the second starting port left wall portion 2425 and the second starting port right wall portion 2426. The left side passage bottom wall portion 2427 extending from the upper end of the second starting port left wall portion 2425 toward the upper left and forming the bottom wall of the left side passage 2422, and the height below the gate portion 2003. From the right side passage right wall part 2428 that extends up and down to the height below the second starting port 2004 and forms the right wall of the right side passage 2423, and from the lower end of the right side passage right wall part 2428. The attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 extending to the left halfway in the left-right direction of the large winning opening 2005 so as to lower the left end side and forming the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2424, and the left end side from the left end of the large winning opening 2005 It is provided with a discharge shelf portion 2430 extending to the left so as to be lowered.

As shown in FIG. 139, the gate passage 2421 communicates a portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball can pass through the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423, respectively. .. In the second starting port 2004, the game balls are not directly accepted from the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 by the second starting port left wall portion 2425 and the second starting port right wall portion 2426 on both the left and right sides. There is. The downstream end of the left side passage 2422 is merged with the gate passage 2421 on the upper side of the second starting port 2004 by the left side passage bottom wall portion 2427. The attacker passage 2424 extends to the left of the left side passage 2422. The right end of the large winning opening 2005, which is long open to the left and right, is located substantially directly below the second starting port 2004, and a part of the upper side (opening) is covered by the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429. There is.

The second starting port door 2411 allows the second starting port 2004, which is open to the front, to be closed from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. It is installed. The second starting port door 2411 is driven by the starting port solenoid 2412 to rotate (rotate) so that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second starting port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. , The game ball that has flowed down in the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted by the second starting port 2004. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let me.

The grand prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends back and forth and extends to the left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the grand prize opening 2005 that opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. It is possible. The grand prize opening door 2413 closes the grand prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the game ball circulating on the bottom wall portion 2429 of the attacker passage of the attacker passage 2424 to the left and then releases the shelf portion 2430. Can be handed over. Further, the large winning opening door 2413 is retracted by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the large winning opening 2005, and the attacker is circulated through any of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423. The game ball released from the left end of the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 of the passage 2424 can be accepted by the grand prize opening 2005. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

The V winning opening door 2415 is formed in the receiving space 2006 in a plate shape extending back and forth and extending left and right so that the right end is lowered, and opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The first entrance 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first entrance 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005 to the right, and always opens upward at the second entrance. It can be accepted in 2008. Further, the V winning opening door 2415 opens the first entrance 2007 by retreating by driving the V winning opening solenoid 2416, and the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005 is highly likely to be the first entrance. It can be accepted in 2007. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first inlet 2007 when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and the first inlet when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Open 2007. In other words, the V winning opening door 2415 can distribute the game balls received in the large winning opening 2005 so that they can be received in either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008.

When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2421 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, and the gate. The unit 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the large winning opening 2005 is located above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 is located below the first starting port 2002.

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 is opened even if the game ball is released from the stage 2530. It never passes. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2540) of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. The left side passage 2422, the gate passage 2421, and the right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left downstream of the right guide passage 2540, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is one of them. Will enter. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2421 in which the gate portion 2003 is arranged is opened upward below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 The game ball that has flowed down on the right side has a high probability of entering the gate passage 2421 and passing through the gate portion 2003.

Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 directly below the gate portion 2003. At this time, if the second start door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second start door 2411 and is in the second position. It will be guided to the start port 2004 side and will be accepted by the second start port 2004. The second start door 2411 is set according to the result of the normal lottery drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is "normal hit"). Since it is driven (sometimes), by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second start door 2411, etc., the game ball itself that has been drawn for "normal hit" is accepted into the second start door 2004. be able to.

After being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, the game ball received in the second start port 2004 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In this gate passage 2421, since it communicates with the lower end of the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, it enters the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. The game ball is circulated to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in a state where the second start port door 2411 has moved to the open position and the second start port 2004 can be accepted, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball that has passed through the left side passage 2422. Can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Since the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the middle of the right side passage 2423, the gate passage 2421 is connected to the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003. The entered game ball may be received in the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or has passed through the left side passage 2422 may enter the right side passage 2423 through a portion of the gate passage 2421 that communicates with the right side passage 2423. It does not always pass in front of the second starting port 2004 (second starting port door 2411).

If the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the right side passage 2423 to the attacker passage 2424.

The game ball released into the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2429 of the attacker passage, and the grand prize opening 2005 is closed from the left end of the bottom wall portion 2429 of the attacker passage. It is discharged downward from the left end of the discharge shelf portion 2430 via 2413. At this time, if the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005 is retracted and the large winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released into the attacker passage 2424 has a high probability of being the large winning opening. Accepted in 2005. The game ball received in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the receiving space 2006 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and is either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008 by the V winning opening door 2415. It is distributed to.

The game ball received in the first reception 2007 or the second reception 2008 is detected by the first reception sensor 2404 or the second reception sensor 2405, and then downwards (board holder) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is discharged to 1200 above).

The game ball discharged downward from the release shelf portion 2430 may be accepted by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 and then handed over to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game ball not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 passes through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been done. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the main effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. Can be done.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 capable of rolling the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharging it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. The stage 2530 is inclined so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center of the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Therefore, the game ball can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2530 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view slightly to the left and then discharges it downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located slightly to the left of the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. There is.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged in the upper part of the frame, and includes a logo decoration unit 2550 provided with a predetermined logo (not shown) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The logo decoration unit 2550 is attached to the rear side of the logo decoration body 2551 having a translucent property in which a predetermined logo is formed in a relief shape and the logo decoration body 2551 and can irradiate light forward. It includes a logo decoration board 2552 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The logo decoration unit 2550 can appropriately illuminate and decorate the logo decoration body 2551 by the LED of the logo decoration substrate 2552. The logo decoration unit 2550 is formed so as to be located above the main effect display device 1600 in the front view in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5.

The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly separated from the right rail 1005 on the front component 1000 so as to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball when assembled on the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls circulating on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are in the right guide passage 2540. You will be guided by entering. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball to the large winning opening 2005 that is open (open) with a high probability.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. The main effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The first effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3031 in the rear view, and the second effect drive board 3033 attached to the right side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It has.

Further, the back unit 3000 covers the rear side of the first effect drive board cover 3034 and the second effect drive board 3033, which are attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the first effect drive board 3032. It includes a second effect drive board cover 3035 attached to the back box 3010.

Further, the back unit 3000 is formed by a frame-shaped back front decoration unit 3100 attached along the outer peripheral edge at the front end of the back box 3010 and an opening 3010a on the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back-up movable production unit 3200 mounted on the upper side and the back-back movable production unit 3300 mounted on the front side of the rear wall of the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back-up movable production unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, which are attached to the swivel table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300, are provided. ..

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the swivel table 3380 of the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350, and a back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the swivel table. It is equipped with 3700. The back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 is provided with a sub-effect display device 3640 whose display screen is smaller than that of the main effect display device 1600.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. FIG. 145 (a) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 145 (b) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the back. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal display. The mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the main effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 416 and the like. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and is formed in a frame shape so as to cover substantially the entire circumference with respect to the peripheral edge of the back box 3010.

The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3101 that detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in each of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000. , The first start port sensor 3102 that detects the game ball received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, and the magnetic sensor 3103 that can detect the illegal magnetism applied from the outside in the game area 5a. , Is equipped.

The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a back front left decoration unit 3110 formed in an L shape along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010, and the right side and the upper side at the front end of the back box 3010. It is provided with a back front right decoration unit 3130, which is formed in an inverted L shape along the above.

The back front left decoration unit 3110 is attached to a translucent L-shaped left base 3111 attached along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010, and to the front side of the left base 3111. Attached to the front side of the left base 3111 at the rear side of the translucent back front left decorative body 3112 in which a relief-like decoration is formed on the front surface of the cage and the vertically extending portion of the back front left decorative body 3112. The back front left decorative substrate 3113 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface, and the left base 3111 on the rear side of the portion extending to the left and right in the back front left decorative body 3112. It is provided with a back front lower decorative substrate 3114, which is mounted on the rear side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface capable of irradiating light toward the front.

The back front left decorative unit 3110 allows a game ball to pass through a portion extending to the left and right of the back front left decorative body 3112 at a position behind the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 of the front unit 2000. It is provided with an opening 3112a. The game ball that has passed through the opening 3112a is discharged downward through between the back front left decorative body 3112 and the left base 3111. At this time, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 attached to the left base 3111, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is in the left base 3111. It is detected by the attached first start port sensor 3102. The magnetic sensor 3103 is attached to the left base 3111 at a position near the rear of the first starting port 2002.

The back front left decorative unit 3110 can illuminate the back front left decorative body 3112 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative substrate 3113 and the back front lower decorative substrate 3114. ..

The back front right decoration unit 3130 is attached to the translucent inverted L-shaped right base 3131 attached along the right side and the upper side at the front end of the back box 3010, and the front side of the right base 3131. A translucent back front right decorative body 3132 with a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface, and a rear side of the vertically extending portion of the back front right decorative body 3132 to the front side of the right base 3131. The back front right decorative substrate 3133 on which a plurality of LEDs that are attached and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface, and the right base 3131 on the rear side of the portion extending to the left and right in the back front right decorative body 3132. It is provided with a back front upper decorative substrate 3134, which is mounted on the front side of the above and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface capable of irradiating light toward the front.

The back front right decorative unit 3130 can illuminate the back front right decorative body 3132 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front right decorative substrate 3133 and the back front upper decorative substrate 3134. ..

In the state where the back front decoration unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the back front left decorative body 3112 and the back front right decorative body 3132 are placed on the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a, of the game panel 1100. It can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the transparent panel plate 1110. Thereby, the back front decoration unit 3100 can decorate the rear side of the area where the game ball flows down on the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a.

[5-9c. Back-up movable production unit]
Next, the back-up movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 152. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the back-up movable main body unit, and FIG. 150 shows the back-up elevating unit of the back-up movable effect unit disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back together with the movable main body unit on the back side. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable main body unit of the back-up movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 shows the back-up movable main body unit of the back-up movable production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view.

The back-up movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and above the opening 3010a. The back-up movable effect unit 3200 includes a back-up elevating unit 3210 installed in the back box 3010 and a back-up movable main body unit 3230 that can be raised and lowered by the back-up elevating unit 3210.

The back-up elevating unit 3210 is a circular plate-shaped elevating unit base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010 and a circle for rotatably mounting the back-up movable main body unit 3230 protruding forward from the lower right corner of the elevating unit base 3211. A columnar lifting support shaft 3212, a back-up lifting drive motor 3213 mounted on the rear surface of the lifting unit base 3211, and a rotating shaft extending forward through the lifting unit base 3211, and a back-up lifting drive. A spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 3214 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3213, and a spur gear-shaped elevating relay gear 3215 that meshes with the elevating drive gear 3214 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3211. , The actuating gear portion 3216a that meshes with the elevating relay gear 3215, the extension portion 3216b that extends outward in the radial direction from the actuating gear portion 3216a, and the columnar drive that protrudes forward from the vicinity of the tip of the extension portion 3216b. It has a pin 3216c and a flat plate-shaped elevating detection piece 3216d formed at the tip of the extension portion 3216b, and includes an elevating link gear member 3216 rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3211. There is.

Further, the back-up elevating unit 3210 penetrates back and forth on one end side, and a drive hole 3217a into which the drive pin 3216c of the elevating link gear member 3216 is rotatably inserted, and front and rear on the other end side. A rod-shaped elevating link member 3217 having an action hole 3217b into which the action pin 3231b of the back-up movable main body base 3231 in the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is rotatably inserted, and attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3211. The stopper member 3218 that regulates the rotational end of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board that are attached to the stopper member 3218. The back-up relay board 3219 that relays the connection between the 3033 and the back-up rotary drive motor 3235 and the back-up decorative board 3234 of the back-up movable main unit 3230, and the elevating link gear member 3216 that is attached to the stopper member 3218. It is equipped with a back-up elevating detection sensor 3220 capable of detecting the elevating detection piece 3216d.

The elevating unit base 3211 is formed of a metal plate. The elevating unit base 3211 includes a lower stopper portion 3211a that extends up and down and back and forth by being bent forward at a portion below and to the left of the portion to which the elevating support shaft 3212 is attached. A plate-shaped shock absorber 3221 is attached to the surface of the lower stopper portion 3211a facing to the right. The lower stopper portion 3211a is formed so as to abut the back upper movable main body base 3231 of the back upper movable main body unit 3230 via the shock absorbing material 3221 in the front view clockwise direction of the back upper movable main body unit 3230. The rotating end (the downward moving end of the free end (right end in front view) of the back-up movable main unit 3230) is regulated.

The elevating drive gear 3214 and the elevating relay gear 3215 are formed to have the same diameter, and the operating gear portion 3216a of the elevating link gear member 3216 is formed to have a larger diameter than the elevating relay gear 3215. In the elevating link gear member 3216, the extending portion 3216b extends outward in a fan shape from the operating gear portion 3216a. The stopper member 3218 has a flat plate-shaped upper stopper portion 3218a extending forward. The side surface of the extension portion 3216b of the elevating link gear member 3216 comes into contact with the downwardly facing surface of the upper stopper portion 3218a, thereby restricting the rotating end of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction. .. In other words, the upper stopper portion 3218a regulates the rotation of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction, so that the upper stopper portion 3218a moves upward to the free end of the back-up movable main body unit 3230 via the elevating link gear member 3216. The moving end (rising end) is regulated.

The back-up movable main body unit 3230 has a shallow box-like shape with the rear side open and extends to the left and right. It is arranged in front of the disc-shaped first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back surface and the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back surface, which are rotatably attached around the axis extending forward and backward at a position to the left from the right end of the base 3231. At the same time, the back upper second rotating decoration body 3233 and the back upper second rotating decoration body 3233 which are rotatably attached to the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232 at an eccentric position with the axis of the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232, and the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232. It includes a one-turn decorative body 3232 and a back-up decorative substrate 3234 attached to the rear surface of the back-up movable main body base 3231 behind the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233.

Further, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is attached to the front surface near the left end of the back-up movable main body base 3231, and the rotation shaft penetrates the back-up movable main body base 3231 and protrudes rearward. The 3235, the spur gear-shaped rotary drive gear 3236 attached to the rotary shaft of the back-up rotary drive motor 3235, and the spur gear-shaped input gear portion 3237a and the rear side of the input gear portion 3237a that mesh with the rotary drive gear 3236. The speed change relay gear 3237 having an output gear part 3237b having a diameter smaller than that of the input gear part 3237a is meshed with the output gear part 3237b of the speed change relay gear 3237 and is rotatably attached to the back-up movable main body base 3231. The spur gear-shaped first relay gear 3238, which is engaged with the first relay gear 3238, and the spur gear-shaped second relay gear 3239 which is rotatably attached to the back-up movable main body base 3231, and the second The spur gear-shaped third relay gear 3240, which meshes with the second relay gear 3239 and is rotatably attached to the back-up movable body base 3231, and the third relay gear 3240, which meshes with the third relay gear 3240, are engaged with the back-up first rotation decoration. The first rotation decorative body gear 3241 that rotates integrally with the body 3322, and the back upper movable main body base 3231 and the back upper first rotation decoration body 3232 are arranged and integrally rotate with the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233. A spur gear-shaped second rotating decorative body gear 3242 that rotates with the rotation of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is provided.

Further, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is attached to the back-up movable main body base 3231 and has a back-up rotation detection sensor 3245 for detecting the rotation position of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and a back-up first rotation decoration body 3245. Along with being arranged on the rear side of the 3232, the shaft cores extending back and forth on the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the shaft core of the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 on the front surface of the back-up movable main body base 3231. A plurality of back-up haunting decorations 3246 that are rotatably attached around, and back-up haunting decorations 3246 that are attached to the rear side of the back-up first rotating decoration 3322 and come into contact with the back-up haunting decorations 3246. The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, which rotate the decorative body 3246 to partially project the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 to the outside, and the plurality of back-up infested decorative bodies 3246 are back-up. It is provided with a plurality of return springs 3249 that are urged to rotate in a direction that does not project outward from the first rotation decoration body 3232.

Further, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 has a base cover 3250 attached to the rear side of the back-up movable main body base 3231 so as to cover the rotary drive gear 3236 and the speed change relay gear 3237 from the rear side, and a back-up decorative board 3234. It includes a board cover 3251 attached to the rear side of the back-up movable main body base 3231 so as to cover the rear side.

In the back-up movable main body base 3231, the right half extending to the left and right is formed in a disk shape having a larger diameter than the left side. The back-up movable main body base 3231 penetrates back and forth at substantially the center in the vertical direction at the left end portion, and has an elevating shaft hole 3231a rotatably attached to the elevating support shaft 3212 of the back-up elevating unit 3210 and the left end. The action pin 3231b, which protrudes forward in a columnar shape near the lower end of the portion and is rotatably inserted into the action hole 3217b of the elevating link member 3217, and the action pin 3231b, which protrudes forward in a columnar shape at substantially the center of the disk-shaped portion on the right half. The same as the first rotation support hole 3231d and the first rotation support hole 3231d for rotatably attaching the first rotation decoration body 3232 on the back surface, which penetrates back and forth at the center of the boss portion 3231c and the boss portion 3231c. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped fixed gear portion 3231e formed on the core on the outer periphery of the vicinity of the front end of the boss portion 3231c and meshing with the second rotary decorative body gear 3242.

Further, the back-up movable main body base 3231 penetrates back and forth in the disk-shaped portion on the right half, and a plurality of openings 3231f in which the first LED 3234a of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 faces forward, and the outer circumference of the disk-shaped portion. A plurality of decorative bodies 3246 rotatably mounted on the back surface, which project forward in a columnar shape from positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on a circumference having a predetermined radius centered on the first rotation support hole 3231d in the vicinity. The support pin 3231g, the immersion stopper 3231h which projects forward in the vicinity of each support pin 3231g and regulates the rotation end of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the support pin 3231g, respectively. It is provided with an appearance stopper 3231i that projects forward in the vicinity and regulates the rotation end of the back-up haunting decorative body 3246 in the clockwise direction in the front view.

The outer surface of the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back surface is formed in a variable polygonal shape, and is formed larger than the disk-shaped portion on the right half of the movable main body base 3231 on the back surface. Further, the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 is decorated in an angular spiral shape, and is opaque, which is composed of a colored translucent translucent portion and a metallic luster plating layer. Has a part of. The back-up first rotation decorative body 3232 has a first shaft portion 3232a rotatably inserted into the first rotation support hole 3231d of the back-up movable main body base 3231, which protrudes from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The uniaxial portion 3232a is provided with a second rotation support hole 3232b for rotatably attaching the second rotation decoration body 3233 on the back surface, which penetrates back and forth at an eccentric position. The first rotating decorative body gear 3241 is attached to the rear end of the first shaft portion 3232a of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. Further, in the second rotation support hole 3232b, the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 is rotatably inserted.

The back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 has a variable polygonal outer shape, and is formed smaller than the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232. More specifically, the back-up second rotating ornament 3233 is formed in a diameter approximately half the diameter of the back-up first rotating ornament 3232. Further, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 is decorated in an angular spiral shape, and is opaque, which is composed of a colored translucent translucent portion and a metallic luster plating layer. Has a part of. The back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 projects from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape, and has a second shaft portion 3233a rotatably inserted into the second rotation support hole 3232b of the back upper first rotation decoration body 3232. I have. A second rotating decorative body gear 3242 is attached to the rear end of the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233.

The back-up decorative substrate 3234 irradiates light in a direction away from the plurality of first LEDs 3234a capable of irradiating light forward and the boss portion 3231c (first rotation support hole 3231d) in the back-up movable main body base 3231. It is provided with a plurality of possible second LEDs 3234b. The plurality of first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b are mounted on the front surface, respectively. Further, the back-up decorative board 3234 includes a flat cable 3234c connected to the back-up relay board 3219 of the back-up elevating unit 3210. The flat cable 3234c is sandwiched between the back-up movable main body base 3231 and the base cover 3250.

The plurality of first LEDs 3234a of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 are in a state of facing forward from the plurality of openings 3231f of the back-up movable main body base 3231 in the state of being assembled to the back-up movable main body unit 3230, respectively. The LED 3234a can irradiate light from the rear side of the back-up first rotating decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decoration body 3233 to illuminate them.

When the plurality of second LEDs 3234b of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 are assembled to the back-up movable main body unit 3230, they are in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g in the back-up movable main body base 3231 (centered on the first rotation support hole 3231d). Two are arranged in the vicinity of the counterclockwise direction side). The second LED 3234b emits light in a state where the back-up infestation decoration 3246 is partially projected, so that the second LED 3234b protrudes outward from the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 in the back-up infestation decoration 3246b. The portion is luminescent and decorated (see FIGS. 158 (b) and 159).

In the speed change relay gear 3237, the input gear portion 3237a is formed to have a larger diameter than the rotary drive gear 3236 and the second relay gear 3239, and the output gear portion 3237b has a smaller diameter than the second relay gear 3239 and is formed with the rotary drive gear 3236. It is formed to have the same diameter. The first relay gear 3238 is formed to have the same diameter as the input gear portion 3237a of the speed change relay gear 3237. The second relay gear 3239 is formed to have the same diameter as the third relay gear 3240 and the first rotary decorative body gear 3241.

Each of the plurality of back-up haunting decorative bodies 3246 is formed in the same shape. The plurality of back-up haunting decorations 3246 include five of the first haunting decoration 3246A, the second haunting decoration 3246B, the third haunting decoration 3246C, the fourth haunting decoration 3246D, and the fifth haunting decoration 3246E. ing. The back-up haunting decorative body 3246 penetrates back and forth, and has a base 3246a that is rotatably attached by inserting a support pin 3231g of the back-up movable body base 3231 and a star that extends outward from the base 3246a. The infested decorative portion 3246b on which the mold decoration is formed, the protruding portion 3246c extending from the base 3246a in a direction different from that of the infested decorative portion 3246b, and the protruding portion 3246c projecting in a columnar shape from the tip to the front. The contact portion 3246d and the like are provided. The backside appearance decoration body 3246 is formed of a transparent member, and a part of the appearance decoration portion 3246b is decorated with a plating layer having a metallic luster. Further, the back-up haunting decorative body 3246 is provided with a triangular cross section protruding rearward and extending in an arc shape centered on the base portion 3246a on the rear surface, and also having a plurality of concentrically formed lens portions 3246e. There is.

In the state where the back-up movable main body unit 3246 is assembled, the back-up movable main body unit 3246 is assembled so that the infestation decoration portion 3246b is located between the immersion stopper 3231h and the appearance stopper 3231i in the back-up movable main body base 3231. The return spring 3249 is in contact with the immersion stopper 3231h of the back-up movable main body base 3231 due to the urging force in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 155). In this state, most of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 is located directly behind the back-up first rotation decoration 3232, and is invisible from the front (immersion position).

In the back-up infestation decoration body 3246, the contact portion 3246d is capable of contacting the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 attached to the rear side of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232. By abutting on the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 that has moved orbiting due to the rotation of the back-up first rotation decorative body 3232, the base 3246a (back-up movable main body) resists the urging force of the return spring 3249. The support pin 3231g of the base 3231) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the entire back-up infestation decoration 3246 is rotated in the clockwise direction, so that the infestation decoration portion 3246b is the back-up first rotation decoration 3232. It moves to the outside and becomes visible from the front (state of appearance position). When the back-up appearance decoration body 3246 rotates vigorously in the clockwise direction, the appearance-up decoration portion 3246b abuts on the appearance stopper 3231i of the back-up movable main body base 3231 to rotate in a further clockwise direction. Is regulated. Then, when the contact between the contact portion 3246d and the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 is released, the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 rotates in the counterclockwise direction due to the urging force of the return spring 3249. , Returns to the state of the initial immersion position.

The back-up appearance decoration body 3246 is arranged in front of the back-up decoration substrate 3234 in a state of being assembled to the back-up movable main body unit 3230, and by rotating around the base portion 3246a, the appearance and appearance decoration portion 3246b When is moved outward from the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 in the front view, the rear surface of the haunting decoration portion 3246b is irradiated with the light from the corresponding second LED 3234b of the back-up decoration substrate 3234. ing. More specifically, when the back-up infestation decoration 3246 is in the appearance position, the infestation decoration 3246b is located in front of the light irradiation direction of the second LED 3234b in the front view, and the rear surface (lens portion) of the infestation decoration 3246b. The light from the second LED 3234b is irradiated from diagonally behind the 3246e). Then, the light radiated diagonally from the rear to the lens portion 3246e composed of a plurality of triangular ridges is refracted by the rear surface of the infestation decoration portion 3246b and enters the infestation decoration portion 3246b, and the front surface and the rear surface of the plane surface are formed. After diffuse reflection between them, a part of it is radiated from the front to the front (see FIG. 159). As a result, when viewed from the front (player side), the portion of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 that protrudes outward from the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 of the infestation decoration 3246b appears to be shining. The portion can be luminescently decorated.

The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate the infestation decoration portion 3246b of the back-up infestation decoration body 3246 between an immersion position invisible from the player side and an appearance position visible from the player side. It is a thing. The first cam member 3247 includes a flat plate-shaped rotation detection piece 3247a extending rearward. The rotation detection piece 3247a is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3245 attached to the back-up movable main body base 3231, so that the rotation position of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 can be detected. When the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are assembled to the back-up movable main body unit 3230, a plurality of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are formed by rotating the back-up first rotation decorative body 3232 (in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The back-up infestation decoration 3246 can be rotated (in the front-view clockwise direction) by abutting on any of the contact portions 3246d of the back-up infestation decoration 3246.

Further, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 have a predetermined angle (about 156 degrees) in the circumferential direction on the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the first shaft portion 3232a of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. ) They are installed apart. More specifically, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are separated from each other by an angle different from the angle (72 degrees) at which the plurality (five) backside infestation decorative bodies 3246 are separated from each other. It is attached to the one-turn decorative body 3232. As a result, the timing at which the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 come into contact with the contact portion 3246d of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 can be made different, and the two back-up infestation decorations 3246 are different. It can be infested at the timing.

The back-up movable effect unit 3200 is provided with the back-up elevating unit 3210 mounted on the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the center of the front view, and is provided in the lower right corner of the back-up elevating unit 3210. The back-up movable main body unit 3230 is rotatably attached to the elevating support shaft 3212. More specifically, in the back-up movable main body unit 3230, the elevating shaft hole 3231a on the left end side is rotatably attached to the elevating support shaft 3212 of the back-up elevating unit 3210, and the lower side of the elevating shaft hole 3231a. 3231b is connected to the drive pin 3216c of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the back-up elevating unit 3210 via the elevating link member 3217.

In the back-up movable main body unit 3230, the back-up first rotation decorative body 3232 is rotatably attached to the center of the disk-shaped portion of the right half of the back-up movable main body base 3231, and the back-up second rotation The decorative body 3233 is rotatably attached to the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 at a position eccentric from its center. More specifically, in the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, the first shaft portion 3232a extending rearward is rotatably attached to the first rotation support hole 3231d of the back-up movable main body base 3231. At the rear end of the first shaft portion 3232a, the rotation from the back-up rotary drive motor 3235 is a rotary drive gear 3236, a speed change relay gear 3237, a first relay gear 3238, a second relay gear 3239, and a third relay gear 3240. The first rotary decorative body gear 3241 transmitted via the above is attached.

On the other hand, in the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233, the second shaft portion 3233a extending rearward is rotatably attached to the second rotation support hole 3232b of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232. At the rear end of the second shaft portion 3233a, a second rotary decorative body gear 3242 that meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back-up movable main body base 3231 is attached.

Further, in the back-up movable main body unit 3230, the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 is rotatably attached to a plurality of (five) support pins 3231 g protruding forward in the back-up movable main body base 3231, respectively. The back-up haunting decorative body 3246 is urged by the return spring 3249 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

[5-9c-1. Directing by the movable production unit on the back]
Next, the effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 159 and the like. FIG. 153 (a) is a front view of the back-up movable main body unit showing the back-up movable main body unit in the state of the normal ascending position, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the back-up movable main body unit in the state of the rotated descending position. It is a front view of the back-up movable production unit. FIG. 154 is a front view of the back-up movable main body unit that schematically shows the rotation of the back-up first rotating decorative body and the revolution of the back-up second rotating decorative body. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back-up movable main body unit that schematically shows the movement of the plurality of back-up haunting decorative bodies and the LEDs of the back-up decorative substrate. FIG. 156 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back-up second rotating decorative body and the back-up haunting decorative body in the back-up movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of the back-up first rotating decorative body, and FIG. 157 is a diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-up second rotation decoration body and the back-up haunting decoration body following 156 according to the rotation angle of the back-top first rotation decoration body. FIG. 158 (a) is a front view of the back-up movable main body unit shown together with the LED of the back-up decoration substrate in a state where the back-up first rotation decorative body is rotated 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT in (a). FIG. 159 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back-up haunting decorative body at the appearance position and the second LED of the back-up decorative substrate by enlarging the portion of arrow A in FIG. 158.

In the normal state, the back-up movable effect unit 3200 is in a state in which the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is extended to the left and right on the right side of the front view of the back-up elevating unit 3210. It is in the ascending position where the second rotating decorative body 3233 on the back side is moving upward. In this raised position, the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233 are located above the main effect display device 1600 in the front view, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 inside, and is visible from the player side (front) (see FIGS. 129 and 135, etc.). In the normal state, the elevating detection piece 3216d of the elevating link gear member 3216 is in a state of being detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3220.

In the normal (elevated position) state in which the back-up movable main body unit 3230 extends substantially horizontally, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is attached to the right end side of the back-up movable main body unit 3230, and the back-up first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back-up second rotation Due to the weight (own weight) of the decorative body 3233 or the like, a force is acting to rotate the right end side in the downward movement direction (front view clockwise direction) around the left end side elevating support shaft 3212. .. Further, in the back-up movable main body unit 3230, the action pin 3231b attached to the elevating link member 3217 of the back-up elevating unit 3210 is arranged below the elevating shaft hole 3231a (elevating support shaft 3212). The action pin 3231b tends to move to the left due to the force that the back-up movable main body unit 3230 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. As a result, the elevating link member 3217 attached to the action pin 3231b is pressed to the left via the action pin 3231b by the force that the back-up movable main body unit 3230 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. Force is working.

In this ascending position, the extension line connecting the centers of the drive hole 3217a and the action hole 3217b of the elevating link member 3217 passes above the center of the elevating link gear member 3216. Due to the leftward force acting on the member 3217, the elevating link gear member 3216 tries to rotate in the direction in which the drive pin 3216c inserted in the drive hole 3217a moves upward (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Will be done. At this time, since the extending portion 3216b of the elevating link gear member 3216 is in contact with the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218, the elevating link gear member 3216 can rotate further in the counterclockwise direction. Instead, the rotation of the elevating link gear member 3216 is restricted and is maintained in a stopped state.

As a result, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 does not rotate in the clockwise direction about the elevating support shaft 3212 due to its own weight, and is maintained (locked) in the raised position. Further, in this state, a force to rotate due to the own weight of the back-up movable main body unit 3230 acts on the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218 via the extension portion 3216b of the elevating link gear member 3216, and elevates and lowers. Since it does not act on the elevating relay gear 3215 side that meshes with the operating gear portion 3216a of the link gear member 3216, it also acts on the back-up elevating drive motor 3213 via the elevating relay gear 3215 and the elevating drive gear 3214. There is no such thing. Therefore, in the normal state (state of the ascending position), it is not necessary to drive the back-up elevating drive motor 3213, and the load applied to the back-up elevating drive motor 3213 can be reduced.

Further, in the back-up movable main body unit 3230, the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 attached to the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 is in a state of being detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3245. , The rotation of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 has stopped. Further, in a normal state, a plurality of (five) back-up haunting decorative bodies 3246 in the back-up movable main body unit 3230 are attached to the rear side of the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the first cam member 3247 and It is in a state of not contacting (contacting) any of the second cam members 3248. In this normal state, the plurality of back-up haunting decorative bodies 3246 are in contact with the immersive stopper 3231h, each of which regulates the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the return spring 3249. It is in an immersive position directly behind the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. Therefore, the plurality of back-up haunting decorative bodies 3246 are invisible from the player side (front). Further, in the plurality of back-up infestation decorations 3246 in which each is in the immersion position, the contact portion 3246d of each is attached to the back-up first rotation decoration 3232, and the first cam member 3247 and the first cam member 3247. It is located on the turning trajectory of the two cam member 3248.

In this normal state, when the elevating link gear member 3216 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by driving the back-up elevating drive motor 3213, the drive pin 3216c revolves so as to move downward and to the left. Therefore, the revolution of the drive pin 3216c causes the elevating link member 3217 attached to the drive pin 3216c to be pulled to the left. When the elevating link member 3217 is pulled to the left, the action pin 3231b of the back-up movable main body base 3231 in the back-up movable main body unit 3230 attached to the action hole 3217b of the elevating link member 3217 is pulled to the left. This means that the back-up movable main body unit 3230 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction around the elevating support shaft 3212.

Then, when the back-up movable main body base 3231 in the back-up movable main body unit 3230 comes into contact with the lower stopper portion 3211a of the elevating unit base 3211, the driving of the back-up movable main body 3213 is stopped, and the direction is further clockwise. The rotation to is restricted. In this state, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is in a state of being substantially extended vertically, and the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 are in a lowered position in which they are moved downward. (See FIG. 153 (b)).

Since the shock absorbing material 3221 is attached to the lower stopper portion 3211a, even if the back-up movable main body unit 3230 vigorously rotates (moves) from the ascending position to the descending position, the impact is alleviated and the back is relaxed. Damage to the upper movable main body unit 3230 can be avoided. Further, the shock absorbing material 3221 can prevent the back-up movable main body unit 3230 from bouncing back at the lower stopper portion 3211a, and can be reliably stopped at the lowered position.

In the state where the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is moved to the descending position, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 are in the center of the front surface of the main effect display device 1600 (game area 5a in front view). (Center of) (see FIG. 203). As a result, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 can be easily seen from the player side. It can be strongly attracted to the decorative body 3233, and the decoration and the movable effect described later can be enjoyed.

In this lowered position, when the back-up rotation drive motor 3235 is driven to rotate the first rotary decorative gear 3241 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back-up first is passed through the first shaft portion 3232a. The rotating ornament 3232 will rotate in the counterclockwise direction. When the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 rotates about the first shaft portion 3232a (first rotation support hole 3231d), the second rotating decorative body 3232 penetrates back and forth at an eccentric position with the first shaft portion 3232a. The rotation support hole 3232b revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a. Since the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 is rotatably attached to the second rotation support hole 3232b, the back top first rotation decoration body 3232 is centered on the first shaft portion 3232a. The second rotating decorative body 3233 on the back side revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a via the second shaft portion 3233a.

When the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a, the second rotation decoration body gear 3242 attached to the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 also becomes the first. It will revolve around the shaft portion 3232a. Since the second rotation decorative body gear 3242 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back-up movable main body base 3231 formed coaxially with the first shaft portion 3232a, the second rotation decorative body gear 3242. When the 3242 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a (fixed gear portion 3231e), the second rotating decorative body gear 3242 rolls along the outer circumference of the fixed gear portion 3231e due to the meshing of the gears. The rotary decorative gear 3242 rotates (rotates) about the second shaft portion 3233a (see FIG. 154). Therefore, when the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-up rotation drive motor 3235, the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the first shaft portion. It will revolve around 3232a.

In the back-up movable main body unit 3230, since the two first cam members 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are attached to the rear side of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 rotates. Then, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 also rotate (revolve around the first shaft portion 3232a). When the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 revolve, of the plurality (five) back-up infestation decorations 3246 in the immersion positions according to the revolution position, two diagonal back-up infestation decorations By contacting the contact portion 3246d of the 3246 and pressing the contact portion 3246d against the urging force of the return spring 3249, the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 is rotated around the support pin 3231g, and the infestation decoration portion is rotated. The 3246b can be moved to the outer appearance position in the front view from the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 (see FIG. 155 and the like).

The outer periphery of each of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 is formed in a rhombus shape, and the contact portion 3246d slides along the outer circumference of the rhombus as the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back rotates. Move. The movement of the contact portion 3246d with respect to the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 will be described in detail. It abuts near the front end of the facing side, slides backward along that side, then folds back near the rear end of that side and slides forward. Then, after moving from the front end in the rotation direction of the outer circumference of the rhombus to the side facing outward, slide to the rear side along the side facing outward, and move away from the rear end of the rear side facing outward. Make a good move.

The movement of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 due to the rotation of the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. (A) to (c) of FIG. 156 and (d) to (f) of FIG. It shows a state of being rotated by 15 degrees in the direction of. First, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3245 to drive the back-up rotation drive motor 3235 (back-up first). The rotation of the one-rotation decoration body 3232) is stopped, and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are separated from the contact portion 3246d of the plurality of backside infestation decoration bodies 3246. In this state, the first cam member 3247 approaches the contact portion 3246d of the first infestation decoration 3246A between the contact portions 3246d of the first infestation decoration 3246A and the fifth infestation decoration 3246E, respectively. It is a position. Further, the second cam member 3248 is at a substantially intermediate position between the contact portions 3246d of the third infestation decoration body 3246C and the fourth infestation decoration body 3246D.

From this normal state, when the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction together with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, the first cam member 3247 is first infested and decorated. The second cam member 3248 abuts on the abutting portion 3246d of the body 3246A, and subsequently, the second cam member 3248 hits the abutting portion 3246d of the fourth infested decorative body 3246D arranged diagonally with respect to the first infested decorative body 3246A. It will come into contact.

In the state when the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 156 (b)), the first cam member 3247 is the first haunting decorative body. The contact portion 3246d is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of the 3246A first, and the contact portion 3246d is in contact with the first cam member 3247 so as to slide backward in the middle of the front side facing the inside of the outer circumference of the rhombus. .. As a result, the first infestation decoration 3246A rotates to some extent in the clockwise direction from the immersion position with respect to the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and the star-shaped infestation decoration 3246b A part of the back surface protrudes outward from the first rotating decorative body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in a state immediately after it comes into contact with the contact portion 3246d of the fourth haunting decorative body 3246D, and slides backward near the front end of the front side facing the inside of the outer circumference of the rhombus. The contact portion 3246d is in contact with the contact portion so as to move. As a result, the fourth infestation decoration body 3246D starts rotating clockwise from the immersion position about the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249.

In the state where the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 156 (b) (the state shown in FIG. 156 (c)), the first cam member 3247 has a diamond shape. The contact portion 3246d is in contact with the outer periphery so as to slide backward on the front side facing inward, then turn back and slide forward near the front end of the side. As a result, the first infestation decoration 3246A further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and is more than half of the star-shaped infestation decoration 3246b. Projects outward from the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side facing the inside of the outer circumference of the rhombus. As a result, the fourth infestation decoration 3246D rotates to some extent clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and a part of the star-shaped infestation decoration 3246b is formed. It protrudes outward from the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side.

Subsequently, in the state where the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated by 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 156 (c) (the state of FIG. 157 (d)), the first cam member 3247 The contact portion 3246d is in contact with the outer circumference of the rhombus so as to slide backward in the middle of the front side facing the outside. As a result, the first haunting decorative body 3246A further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and becomes the appearance stopper 3231i of the back-up movable main body base 3231. It is in a state of abutting appearance position, and most of the star-shaped infestation decoration portion 3246b protrudes outward from the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is brought into contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide backward on the front side facing the inside of the outer circumference of the rhombus, then turn back and slide forward near the front end of the side. There is. As a result, the fourth infestation decoration 3246D further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and most of the star-shaped infestation decoration 3246b is back. It protrudes outward from the upper first rotating decorative body 3232.

Further, in the state where the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated by 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 157 (d) (the state of FIG. 157 (e)), the first cam member 3247 The contact portion 3246d is separated rearward from the outward-facing side of the outer circumference of the rhombus. As a result, the first infestation decoration 3246A rotates counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the urging force of the return spring 3249, and immerses in contact with the immersive stopper 3231h of the back-up movable main body base 3231. It is in the position state, and the star-shaped infestation decoration portion 3246b is located inside the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side facing the outside on the outer circumference of the rhombus. As a result, the fourth haunting decorative body 3246D further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and hits the appearance stopper 3231i of the back-up movable main body base 3231. It is in a state of contacting appearance position, and most of the star-shaped infestation decoration portion 3246b protrudes outward from the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232.

Further, in the state where the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated by 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 157 (e) (the state of FIG. 157 (f)), the first cam member 3247 It is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of the second infestation decoration 3246B (arranged diagonally with respect to the fourth infestation decoration 3246D), and is near the front end of the front side facing the inside of the outer circumference of the rhombus. The contact portion 3246d is in contact with the contact portion so as to slide rearward. As a result, the second infestation decoration 3246B starts rotating clockwise from the immersion position about the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249. On the other hand, in the second cam member 3248, the contact portion 3246d of the fourth infestation decoration 3246D is separated rearward from the side facing the outside on the outer circumference of the rhombus, and the fourth infestation decoration 3246D and the fifth infestation decoration 3246E It is located near the middle between the contact portions 3246d. As a result, the fourth infestation decoration 3246D rotates counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the urging force of the return spring 3249, and immerses in contact with the immersive stopper 3231h of the back-up movable main body base 3231. It is in a position, and the star-shaped infestation decoration portion 3246b is located inside the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232.

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 155, 158 and 159, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3234a for irradiating light toward the front on the back-up decorative substrate 3234. By appropriately causing the first LED 3234a of the above to emit light, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 can be light-emittingly decorated. When the first LED 3234a of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 is appropriately made to emit light while the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 are being rotated, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up Depending on the degree of overlap with the second rotating decorative body 3233 and the opaque part of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, a glittering and blinking luminescent decoration is given to the player. I can show you.

Further, the back-up decorative substrate 3234 has a plurality of second units that irradiate light outward in the radial direction centered on the first rotation support hole 3231d in the vicinity of each support pin 3231g in the back-up movable main body base 3231. Since the LED 3234b is provided, as shown in FIG. 158, the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back surface is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are behind the immersion position. When the upper infestation decoration 3246 is moved to the appearance position, the second LED 3234b corresponding to the back upper infestation decoration 3246 is made to emit light, so that the back upper infestation decoration 3246 in the appearance position (infestation decoration 3246b) Can be luminescently decorated.

More specifically, when the second LED 3234b of the corresponding back-up decorative substrate 3234 is made to emit light with respect to the back-up infestation decoration body 3246 at the appearance position, a part of the light diffused from the second LED 3234b is infested and decorated. On the rear side of the portion 3246b, a plurality of ridges having a triangular cross section can be reflected and refracted forward by the lens portion 3246e arranged concentrically, and the light entering the inside of the infestation decoration portion 3246b is diffusely reflected inside. After that, a part of the star-shaped infestation decoration part 3246b can be radiated forward to illuminate the decoration (see FIGS. 158 (b) and 159). As a result, the infested decorative portion 3246b of the back-up infested decorative body 3246 located outside the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 (back-up decorative substrate 3234) can be light-emitting decorated, so that the back-up infested decorative substrate is directly behind. By luminescent decoration of the haunting decoration portion 3246b on which the 3234 is not arranged, the player can be made to wonder, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In this way, according to the back-up movable effect unit 3200, the back-up elevating drive motor 3213 moves the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 between the ascending position and the lowering position. Therefore, by moving the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 to the descending position at the center of the game area 5a, the player's interest is raised to the back-up first rotation decoration. It can be strongly attracted to the body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233.

Further, with the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration 3233 in the lowered position, the back-up rotation drive motor 3235 moves the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. When rotated, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 arranged on the front side of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated counterclockwise while rotating counterclockwise around the first shaft portion 3232a. Along with being able to revolve in the direction, a plurality of back-up infestation decorations 3246 (infestation decoration portion 3246b) arranged behind the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 are placed on the back-up first rotation decoration at different timings. It can appear on the outside of 3232.

More specifically, when the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 is rotated by the back-up rotation drive motor 3235, the back-up second rotation decoration 3233 rotates on the front side of the rotating back-up first rotation decoration 3232. However, since it revolves, the player can be shown a swirling movement by the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233. Further, when the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 is rotated by the back-up rotation drive motor 3235, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate together with the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, and the first cam member Since the distance from the rotation center of the portion where the contact portion 3246d of the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 abuts on the outer peripheral surfaces of the 3247 and the second cam member 3248 changes, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 By guiding the abutting portion 3246d away from the center of rotation by the second cam member 3248, the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 resists the urging force of the return spring 3249 via the abutting portion 3246d, and the base portion 3246a 3246b can be moved to the appearance position on the outside of the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side of the front view, and a plurality of decorative parts 3246b can be moved to the outside of the rotating first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side. It is possible to show the player a movement in which the back-up infested decorative body 3246 (infested decorative portion 3246b) appears and disappears.

Further, when the second LED 3234b of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 is made to emit light in a state where the infestation decoration portion 3246b of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 is located outside the back-up first rotation decoration 3232, the light is oblique. The lens portion 3246e of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 is irradiated from the rear, and the light incident from the lens portion 3246e is diffusely reflected in the infestation decoration 3246b and then partly diffused and radiated forward. When viewed from the person's side, the infestation decoration portion 3246b protruding to the outside of the first rotation decoration body 3232 on the back side appears to be shining, and the appearance decoration part 3246b can be light-emittingly decorated. It is possible to make it easier to notice the appearance of the infested decorative body 3246 (infested decorative portion 3246b). On the other hand, when the first LED 3234a of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 is made to emit light, the back-up first rotating decoration 3232 and the back-up second rotating decoration 3233 that are moving in a swirling manner can be light-emittingly decorated.

As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that swirls and scatters stars, which can give a strong impact to the player and is good for the player. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 are made to emit light, the haunting decorative portion 3246b shines from the shining swirl of the back upper second rotating decoration body 3233 and the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232. Since it is possible to show the player the effect of popping out (movable effect and light emission effect), the movement of multiple decorative objects and the effect of light can be shown to the player, and the effect becomes monotonous. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and at the same time, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and a sense of expectation for the player's game (occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous). Can be changed to conviction, and the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the back-up movable effect unit 3200, under the normal state, the back-up movable effect unit 3200 is located at the ascending position on the upper right side of the main effect display device 1600 near the peripheral edge of the front-view game area 5a. The back upper first rotation decorative body 3232 rotatably attached to the back upper movable main body base 3231 of the upper movable main body unit 3230 is arranged in a state where the rotation is stopped. In this state, since the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 is arranged on the front side of the back upper first rotation decoration body 3232, the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 and the back upper first rotation decoration body 3232 become , While appearing to overlap in the front and back, multiple (five) back-up infestation decorations 3246 are in the immersion position directly behind the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 by the urging force of the return spring 3249. The back-up haunting decoration 3246 cannot be seen because it is blocked by the back-up first rotation decoration 3232, and only the decoration by the back-up second rotation decoration 3233 and the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 is clarified. I can show you. In this state, when the first LED 3234a of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 is made to emit light, a plurality of back-up infestation decorations 3246, back-up first rotation decorations 3232, and back-up first rotating decorations 3246 located on the front side of the first LED 3234a are emitted. Since each of the two-rotation decorations 3233 has translucency, the light from the first LED 3234a can be radiated to the player side through them, and the back-up second rotation decoration seen from the player side. The body 3233 and the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 can be light-emittingly decorated. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the decoration of the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 and the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, and at the same time, decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a and inside the game area 5a ( The appearance of the pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

Further, the back-up movable main body base 3231 to which the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233, and a plurality of back-top infestation decoration bodies 3246 are attached is mounted on the back-up of the back-up elevating unit 3210. When the elevating drive motor 3213 moves from the ascending position to the descending position, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 becomes the center position of the game area 5a. The second rotating decorative body 3233 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be attracted to the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233, and what to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 is rotated by the back-up rotation drive motor 3235 and the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back-up decoration substrate 3234 are made to emit light, the back-up second rotation decoration 3233 and the back The appearance and appearance decoration part 3246b pops out while shining from the shining swirl by the upper first rotating decoration body 3232, or the back top appearance decoration body 3246 is sucked in while shining in the shining and gurgling swirl. (Movable effect and light emission effect) can be shown to the player. In this way, when the production is performed using the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, the plurality of back-top infestation decoration bodies 3246, and the back-top decoration substrate 3234, the conventional pachinko machine can perform the effect. It is possible to show the player the movement of multiple ornaments that cannot be seen and the effect of light, which can prevent the effect from becoming monotonous and make it difficult for the player to get bored. A strong impact can be given, and the player's expectation for the game (occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous) can be changed to conviction, which greatly entertains the player and suppresses the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, a plurality of back-up haunting decorative bodies 3246 (appearing decoration portion 3246b) appear on the outside of the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 at different timings and are luminescently decorated, so that a plurality of luminescent-decorated back-up haunting decorations appear and disappear. Since the decorative body 3246 brightens the area around the back-up first rotation decorative body 3232, it is possible to surely make the player aware that a plurality of back-up infested decorative bodies 3246 have appeared, and the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. In addition to being able to play reliably, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, increase the player's expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 can be light-emitting-decorated, the back-up appearance decoration body 3246 is back-up by the first LED 3234a when it is in the immersion position. By luminescent decoration of the first rotating decoration body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decoration body 3233, the player can pay attention to the back upper first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233, respectively. In this state, the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 is rotated by the back-up rotation drive motor 3235 to make the back-up haunting decoration 3246 appear, and the second LED 3234b emits light from the back-up haunting decoration 3246b. By decorating it, it is possible to surely show the appearance of the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 to the player, and it is possible to surely exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, as described above, since the plurality of back-up infestation decorations 3246 appearing on the outside of the back-up first rotation decoration 3232 can be light-emitting decorated, the back-up infestation decoration 3246 (infestation decoration portion) that has appeared When the 3246b) is light-emittingly decorated, the back-up infestation decoration 3246 is light-emittingly decorated even though the decorative substrate provided with the LED is not provided on the rear side of the back-up infestation decoration 3246. It is possible to make the player wonder, and to attract the player's attention to the infested decorative body 3246 and entertain the light emitting decoration.

Further, light is emitted from the second LED 3234b of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 attached to the back-up movable main body base 3231 to the lens portion 3246e on the rear surface of the infestation decoration portion 3246b projecting to the outside of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232. 3246b is made to emit light and decorate, and only the back-up infestation decoration 3246 is moved. Therefore, a decorative substrate equipped with an LED behind the back-up infestation decoration 3246. Compared with the case where the You can enjoy the movement (movable effect) of the decorative body 3246. Further, since the back-up decorative substrate 3234 is not attached to the moving back-up infested decorative body 3246, the wiring of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 does not repeatedly bend and become tired even if the back-up infested decorative body 3246 is moved. , It is possible to prevent disconnection, and it is possible to reliably illuminate the backside infested decorative body 3246, and it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted and causing discomfort to the player due to the disconnection. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 revolves while rotating on the front side of the rotating back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 revolves. Since the luminous decorated infestation decoration part 3246b of the plurality of back-up infestation decorations 3246 appears on the outside of the rotation decoration 3232, it can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's attention. At the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Further, since the above-mentioned effects are exhibited, the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back-up can be suitably used for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which an effect suggesting a special lottery result is executed. It is possible to provide an effect unit (back-up movable effect unit 3200) including a first rotating decorative body 3232, a plurality of back-up infestation decorative bodies 3246, and a back-up decorative substrate 3234.

Further, since the infested decorative portion 3246b of the back-up infested decorative body 3246 is made to appear and disappear by the rotation (revolution) of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, the back-up infested decorative body 3246 is infested. It is not necessary to separately provide the driving means for rotating the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the driving means for rotating the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, and the space can be secured by that amount. The rotating decoration 3232 and the back-up haunting decoration 3246 can be enlarged, and the back-up first rotating decoration 3232 and the back-up haunting decoration 3246 can be made conspicuous so that the effect can be fully exerted. Can be done. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the driving means for driving the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232, the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233, and the back-up infestation decoration body 3246, respectively, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 It is possible to reduce the control load on the movable effect using the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back-up infestation decorative body 3246, and it is possible to prevent overload and surely enjoy the movable effect.

Further, since the outer peripheral surfaces of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are designed so that the appearance timings of the appearance decoration portions 3246b of the plurality of back-up appearance decorations 3246 are different from each other, the back-up first rotation decoration is formed. It is possible to reduce the monotonous movement by changing the movement of the 3232 and the plurality of haunting decoration portions 3246b, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the return spring 3249 urges the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 in the direction of the immersion position, the proposed outer peripheral surfaces of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are backed by the urging force of the return spring 3249. It is possible to make the contact portion 3246d of the upper infestation decorative body 3246 a contact surface, and the configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the guide portion for guiding the contact portion 3246d is a groove or a ridge. It is possible to reduce the increase in the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the space required for the appearance mechanism of the backside appearance decoration body 3246 to make it easier to secure the space. It is possible to increase the size of the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back-up infestation decorative body 3246 to make it easier to attract the attention of the player.

Further, the back-up infestation decoration body 3246 is rotated around the base portion 3246a so that the infestation decoration portion 3246b appears and disappears, and the infestation decoration portion 3246b appears and disappears while drawing an arc trajectory. Since the visible position of the infestation decoration portion 3246b appearing on the outside of the one-rotation decoration body 3232 changes, the locus of light extending in an arc can be shown to the player by the infestation decoration portion 3246b decorated with light emission. The movement of the back-up haunting decorative body 3246 can be made conspicuous so that the player can easily notice the movement, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted. It is possible to give a sense of unity to the movement of the decorative portion 3246b, and it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side and the plurality of infested decorative portions 3246b make a dynamic movement. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the infested decorative portion 3246b of the back-up infested decorative body 3246 is made to appear and disappear by rotating, it becomes infested (sliding) as compared with the case where the back-up infested decorative body 3246 is slid. Such resistance can be reduced. Therefore, when the back-up first rotation decorative body 3232 is rotated by the drive of the back-up rotation drive motor 3235, the infestation decoration portion 3246b of the back-up infestation decoration body 3246 can be surely infested, and the effect of the movable effect is produced. Can be surely exhibited. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a problem that the backside haunting decorative body 3246 is stuck due to resistance (sliding resistance), it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the occurrence of the problem, and the player can be affected by the interruption of the game. It is possible to avoid feeling uncomfortable and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the movement range of the back-up infestation decoration 3246 can be regulated by the immersion stopper 3231h and the appearance stopper 3231i provided in the back-up movable main body base 3231, the back-up infestation decoration 3246 can be quickly infested. However, it does not move beyond the immersive position or the appearance position, and the back-up infestation decoration 3246 can be reliably moved between the immersive position and the appearance position.

Further, when the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233 are rotated, the outer circumferences of the respective rotating decorative bodies 3332 and the second rotating decorative body 3233 are formed in a variable polygonal shape, which is a non-circular shape. Can be clearly recognized as being rotating, and the player can be made to pay attention to the rotation (movable effect) of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233. Further, when the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233 are rotated, the respective shaft cores (first shaft portion 3232a and second shaft portion 3233a) are eccentric to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player appear to be rotating while rattling, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[5-9d. Back and rear movable production unit]
Next, the back-rear movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 168. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the back-rear movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 shows the back-rear movable effect unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable effect unit disassembled into a fixed side unit side and a swivel table side, and FIG. 164 shows a back-rear movable effect unit with a fixed side unit side and a swivel table side. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the swivel table side of the back-rear movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the swivel table side of the back-rear movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the swivel table side of the back-rear movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 168 disassembles the swivel table side of the back-rear movable effect unit for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind.

The back-rear movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The back-rear movable effect unit 3300 includes a back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 attached to the back box 3010, a back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the swivel table 3380 of the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350, and a rear-rear left movable effect unit 3400. The back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 on the swivel table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the upper side of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500. The back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 includes a back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and a back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 attached to the lower side of the swivel table 3380. The back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 is provided with a sub-effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than the display screen of the main effect display device 1600.

[5-9e. Back and center movable production unit]
Next, the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the back-rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 172. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing a swivel configuration of a swivel table in the back-rear central movable effect unit in the front view of the back-rear movable effect unit. The rear-rear central movable effect unit 3350 is attached to the front side of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 passes through the frame from the front. It is formed in a frame shape so that it can be visually recognized. The back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 is an annular swivel table that is rotatably mounted around a fixed axis 3360 mounted in the back box 3010 and a front side of the fixed side unit 3360. 3380 and. The back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 has a back-rear left movable effect unit 3400, a back-rear right movable effect unit 3500, a back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and a back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700 attached to the swivel table 3380. Then, they can be swiveled around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the game area 5a (main effect display device 1600).

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the fixed side unit 3360 of the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 has an annular table accommodating portion 3361a for accommodating the swivel table 3380 from the front, and also has a table accommodating portion. A unit base 3361 having a square opening 3361b penetrating back and forth inside the 3361a, and a swivel table 3380 attached to the unit base 3361 and housed in the table accommodating portion 3361a can be moved forward. A plurality of regulated table supporters 3362 and a plurality of columnar guides which are attached apart from each other in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference of the table accommodating portion 3361a and project forward from the front end of the table accommodating portion 3361a. A plurality of guide bushes 3364 that are rotatably fitted to the pin 3363 and each guide pin 3363 and whose outer peripheral surface can come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the swivel table 3380 housed in the table accommodating portion 3361a, and a unit. A pair of guide rollers 3365, which are rotatably attached to the outside of the lower end of the table accommodating portion 3361a in the base 3361 and the outer peripheral surface of the swivel table 3380 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface, are provided.

A plurality of fixed-side units 3360 are attached to the unit base 3361, and a plurality of (three in this case) swivel detection sensors 3366 for detecting the swivel position of the swivel table 3380 and a table accommodating portion on the front surface of the unit base 3361. Attached to the outside of 3361a, the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600. It includes a drive motor and a decorative board provided in the lower movable effect unit 3700, and three table-based relay boards 3637 that relay the connection with the sub-effect display device 3640.

Further, the fixed side unit 3360 is a spur gear-shaped drive mounted on the rotating shafts of the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 attached to the lower left corner of the front view of the front surface of the unit base 3361 and the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370. It has a gear 3371, a large-diameter spur gear-shaped input gear 3372a that meshes with the drive gear 3371, and a spur gear-shaped output gear 3372b that rotates integrally with the input gear 3372a and has a smaller diameter than the input gear 3372a. , The swivel gear 3372 rotatably attached to the unit base 3361 and the output gear 3372b of the swivel gear 3372, and the swivel table 3380 housed in the table accommodating portion 3361a of the unit base 3361. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped swivel pinion gear 3373 that meshes with the swivel gear 3384 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3361 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

The unit base 3361 of the fixed side unit 3360 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape corresponds to the inside of the back box 3010, and is provided with an annular table accommodating portion 3361a so as to form the outer shape and contact the four sides. There is. The table accommodating portion 3361a is composed of a rear wall portion formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width on the front surface of the general surface of the unit base 3361, and a tubular peripheral wall portion protruding forward from the outer periphery of the rear wall portion. ing. The table accommodating portion 3361a can accommodate the swivel table 3380 inside the peripheral wall portion. The opening 3361b of the unit base 3361 is formed to have a size corresponding to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 163 and the like, the unit base 3361 has a relief-shaped three-dimensional decoration formed on the inner front surface of the table accommodating portion 3361a.

In front view, the table supporters 3362 are provided on the upper side and the lower side, respectively, with respect to the vertically extending axes passing through the center of the annular table accommodating portion 3361a, and two on each of the left and right sides. ing. That is, six table supporters 3362 are provided, and each of them is arranged near the apex of the hexagon in contact with the table accommodating portion 3361a.

A plurality (here, eight) of guide pins 3363 are provided along the outer periphery of the table accommodating portion so as to project forward from the front end of the peripheral wall portion of the annular table accommodating portion 3361a. The plurality of guide pins 3363 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the vertically extending axes passing through the center (swivel center) of the table accommodating portion 3361a. The four guide pins 3363 arranged on the right side of the vertically extending axis passing through the center of rotation are 35 degrees, 60 degrees, 120 degrees in the clockwise direction from the upper apex (upper end) of the table accommodating portion 3361a. It is equipped at 142 degrees, respectively. More specifically, the guide pin 3363 located at an angle of 35 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is such that the guide pin 3363 adjacent to the table accommodating portion 3363 is separated from the guide pin 3363 at an angle of 25 degrees. , The guide pins adjacent in the counterclockwise direction are separated at an angle of 70 degrees. Further, the guide pin 3363 located at an angle of 60 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 60 degrees, and is counterclockwise. Adjacent guide pins in the clockwise direction are separated at an angle of 25 degrees. Further, the guide pin 3363 located at an angle of 120 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 22 degrees, and is counterclockwise. Adjacent guide pins in the clockwise direction are separated at an angle of 60 degrees. Further, the guide pin 3363 located at an angle of 142 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 76 degrees, and is counterclockwise. Adjacent guide pins in the clockwise direction are separated at an angle of 22 degrees.

In other words, the two guide pins 3363 arranged on the uppermost side on both the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 70 degrees in the turning direction. Further, the two guide pins 3363 arranged closest to each other on both the upper and lower sides with respect to the horizontally extending axis passing through the turning center are separated from each other at an angle of 60 degrees in the turning direction. Further, the two guide pins 3363 arranged at the lowermost positions on both the left and right sides are separated from each other at an angle of 76 degrees in the turning direction. The two diagonally upper guide pins 3363 on both the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 25 degrees in the turning direction, and the two diagonally lower guide pins 3363 on both the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 22 degrees in the turning direction. There is.

These guide pins 3363 are formed so as to come into contact with the side sides of the slide frame 3630 when the slide frame 3630 of the back / rear / upper movable effect unit 3600, which will be described later, is in the retracted position, and are attached to the slide frame 3630. The movement of the effect display device 3640 in the turning direction can be restricted. If the angle between the two adjacent guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees or more, the slide frame 3630 of the back / rear / upper movable effect unit 3600 can be positioned between the two guide pins 3363. When the distance between the two guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees, the range of the swivel angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) located between them is 0 degrees, and the distance between the two guide pins 3363 is 70 degrees. When the degree is, the range of the turning angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) located between them is ± 5 degrees, and when the distance between the two guide pins 3363 is 76 degrees, it is between them. The range of the turning angle of the positioned slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is ± 8 degrees.

On the other hand, when the angle of the distance between the two adjacent guide pins 3363 is smaller than 60 degrees, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 of the back-rear-upward movable production unit 3600 comes into contact with the guide pins 3363, and the slide frame 3630 ( The movement of the sub-effect display device 3640) to the retracted position can be restricted. Therefore, due to the plurality of guide pins 3363, the back-up movable effect unit is placed at a position directly above the turning center (first turning position), a position directly to the right of the turning center (second turning position), and directly below the turning center. Only at the position (third turning position), the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is regulated so that it can move to the backward position, and the range of the turning angle in the turning direction is regulated at each position. can do.

A pair of guide rollers 3365 are provided on both the left and right sides of the table supporter 3362 arranged immediately below the turning center. The guide roller 3365 is a ball bearing.

The swivel detection sensor 3366 detects the swivel position of the swivel table 3380 by detecting the detection piece 3385 of the swivel table 3380. The swivel detection sensor 3366 includes a first swivel detection sensor 3366a that detects that the swivel table 3380 is located at the first swivel position, and a second that detects that the swivel table 3380 is located at the second swivel position. It is composed of a swivel detection sensor 3366b and a third swivel detection sensor 3366c that detects that the swivel table 3380 is located at the third swivel position.

The swivel table 3380 of the back-rear central movable production unit 3350 has a circular main body 3381 having a size that can be accommodated in the table housing 3361a of the unit base 3361 and an open front side, and a main body 3381. A through-hole 3382 that penetrates the bottom wall in the front-rear direction, and an annular flange portion 3383 that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 3381 in a flat plate shape and has an outer diameter larger than that of the table accommodating portion 3361a. Detected by the swivel gear 3384, which protrudes forward from the front surface of the flange portion 3383 and whose gear teeth facing outward in the radial direction are arranged in an arc shape, and the swivel detection sensor 3366, which protrudes outward from the flange portion 3383. A flat plate-shaped detection piece 3385 and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3385 are provided.

The swivel table 3380 is formed in an annular shape by a main body portion 3381, a through port 3382, and a flange portion 3383, and the rear side of the flange portion 3383 is housed in the table accommodating portion 3361a of the unit base 3361. In the swivel table 3380, the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 3383 comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the guide bush 3364 fitted in the guide pin 3363 and the outer peripheral surface of the guide roller 3365, respectively, so that the swivel table 3380 is in contact with the fixed side unit 3360. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends back and forth. In the swivel table 3380, the table supporter 3362 is slidably abutted on the front surface of the flange portion 3383, and the front end of the table accommodating portion 3361a (peripheral wall portion) is slidable on the rear surface of the flange portion 3383. It is designed to come into contact. As a result, the swivel table 3380 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the fixed-side unit 3360.

The swivel gear 3384 of the swivel table 3380 is clockwise from a position rotated about 30 degrees clockwise from the upper apex with respect to the vertically extending axis passing through the center of the annular swivel table 3380. It is formed so as to extend in an arc shape up to a position at an angle rotated by about 280 degrees in the direction. In the state of being assembled to the rear-rear central movable production unit 3350, the swivel pinion gear 3373 is meshed with the swivel gear 3384 from the outside, and the swivel rear swivel drive motor 3370 swivels via the drive gear 3371 and the swivel speed change gear 3372. When the pinion gear 3373 is rotated, the swivel table 3380 can be rotated via the swivel gear 3384.

Further, the swivel table 3380 is provided symmetrically on the upper side of the front surface of the main body 3381 on the upper side of the through hole 3382 with an axis extending vertically extending through the center of swivel in between, and extends linearly vertically. It includes a pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 and a plurality of guide bosses 3387 that project forward in a columnar shape between the pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381. The pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 mesh with the slide gear 3620 attached to the slide plate 3610 of the back-rear-upward movable effect unit 3600, which will be described later, and are attached to the slide frame 3630 via the slide plate 3610. It is used to move the effect display device 3640 between the retracted position and the projected position. Further, a plurality of (four) guide bosses 3387 are provided symmetrically with an axial line extending vertically extending through the center of rotation in between, and two guide bosses are provided at intervals of upper and lower sides, respectively. The plurality of guide bosses 3387 are for movably attaching the slide plate 3610 of the back-rear-upward movable effect unit 3600, which will be described later.

[5-9e-1. Production by the back and center movable production unit]
Next, the effect using the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is an explanatory view schematically showing the turning of the turning table in the counterclockwise direction in the back-rear central movable effect unit. FIG. 171 is an explanatory view schematically showing the clockwise rotation of the swivel table in the back-rear central movable effect unit, and FIG. 172 schematically shows the clockwise rotation of the swivel table following from FIG. 171. It is explanatory drawing.

In the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350, under normal conditions, the detection piece 3385 of the swivel table 3380 is detected by the first swivel detection sensor 3366a attached to the upper left of the three swivel detection sensors 3366. (See FIGS. 170 (a) and 171 (a)). That is, the swivel table 3380 is in the first swivel position. In this normal state, when the swivel pinion gear 3373 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 via the drive gear 3371 and the swivel speed change gear 3372, the swivel table 3380 is turned counterclockwise. It can be rotated up to a rotation angle of 80 degrees in the direction (see FIG. 170 (b)).

On the other hand, when the swivel pinion gear 3373 is rotated in the front counterclockwise direction by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 from the normal state, the swivel table 3380 can be rotated in the clockwise direction. By rotating the swivel table 3380 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the swivel table 3380 can be brought into the state of the second swivel position (see FIG. 171 (b)). In this state of the second turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the second turning detection sensor 3366b arranged at the upper right of the front view.

When the swivel table 3380 is further rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the second swivel position, the swivel table 3380 can be brought into the state of the third swivel position (see FIG. 172 (c)). In this state of the third turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the third turning detection sensor 3366c arranged at the lower right of the front view. The swivel table 3380 can be further rotated 10 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the third swivel position (see FIG. 172 (d)).

As described above, according to the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400, the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3380 attached to the swivel table 3380. The lower movable effect unit 3700 is rotated around a turning center (center of the main effect display device 1600) within a predetermined angle range (within a range of 80 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to 190 degrees in the clockwise direction). Can be made to.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of back-rear left movable production unit and back-rear right movable production unit]
Next, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 174 shows the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in the back unit behind. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 175 disassembles the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit into a back rear left movable decorative unit, a back rear right movable decorative unit, a back rear left slide unit, and a back rear right slide unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 176 shows a back rear left movable effect unit and a back rear right movable effect unit, a back rear left movable decorative unit, a back rear right movable decorative unit, a back rear left slide unit, and It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling the back and rear right slide unit.

The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are attached to the front surface of the swivel table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 installed in the back box 3010. The back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 include a back-rear left movable decorative body 3410 and a back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510, respectively. The right movable decorative unit 3501 and the back rear center movable production unit 3350 are attached to the front of the swivel table 3380, respectively, and the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are moved away from the turning center. It includes a back-rear left slide unit 3460 and a back-rear right slide unit 3560 that move each of them between a separate position and an approach position close to the center of rotation.

The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (the surface of the panel plate 1110). It includes a plurality of back-back left-rotating ornaments 3410 and back-back-right-rotating ornaments 3510 that can rotate about an axis along the surface. The back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 are the back-rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back-rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. By rotating the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear-right-rotating decorative body 3510, the parts visible from the player side (front side) can be changed to change the decoration.

Further, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 have an axis extending vertically extending through the turning center on the front surface of the turning table 3380. It is installed symmetrically on the border. The back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 move the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 away from the center (swivel center) of the swivel table 3380 and the peripheral edge of the swivel table 3380. It can be slid and moved in a straight line between the separation position located in the vicinity and the approach position close to the center of the swivel table 3380.

The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 rotate together with the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 because they are attached to the swivel table 3380. The back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 can rotate around the center of rotation (center of the main effect display device 1600).

[5-9f-1. Back left movable decorative unit]
The back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 139. FIG. 177 is a front view of the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in the back unit and the back rear left movable decorative unit unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit unit, and FIG. 178 is a back rear left movable effect unit. It is a perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit in the back rear right movable effect unit, and FIG. 179 shows the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit from the back. FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 181 is a back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative unit, the back rear right movable decorative unit, the back rear left rotating decorative body, the back rear right rotating decorative body, and the rotary connecting mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 183 shows an exploded perspective of the back-rear left movable decorative unit and the back-rear right movable decorative unit, which are disassembled from the back-rear left-rotating decorative body, the back-rear right-rotating decorative body, and the rotary connecting mechanism. It is a figure. FIG. 184 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary connecting mechanism in an assembled state, and FIG. 184 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary connecting mechanism. FIG. 185 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear left movable decoration unit in the back rear left movable effect unit from the left side, and FIG. 185 (b) is an explanatory view showing the back rear left movable decoration unit in the back rear left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a body unit from the front. FIG. 186 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear left rotating decorative body in the back rear left movable decorative body unit of the back rear left movable effect unit.

As shown in the figure, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 includes a plurality of (here, four) back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 having predetermined decorations. The plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 are, from the bottom, the first back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410A, the second back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410B, the third back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410C, and the fourth back-rear rear-rotating decorative body 3410C. It is said to be a counterclockwise decorative body 3410D. Each of these back-rear left-handed decorative bodies 3410 is formed in substantially the same shape.

The back-rear left-handed decorative body 3410 bulges in a semi-cylindrical shape and extends diagonally in a disk shape from the ends of the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3411a that imitate the body portion of the spotlight. A decorative body 3411 having a second decorative portion 3411b that imitates the lens portion of the above, and a third decorative portion 3411c that extends flat on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3411a and has a predetermined character. The decorative body 3411 includes a shaft portion 3412 that protrudes from each of the two side surfaces intersecting with the end portion of the second decorative portion 3411b.

The decorative body body 3411 of the back-rear counterclockwise rotating decorative body 3410 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with a metallic luster. The decorative body 3411 is formed so that when the first decorative portion 3411a is turned to the front, the second decorative portion 3411b can be visually recognized in an oblique state. Although not shown, the third decorative portion 3411c of the decorative body main body 3411 is individually decorated with one character so as to be one word by the four back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410.

In the four back-rear left-handed decorative bodies 3410, each shaft portion 3412 has a predetermined radius so that the second decorative portion 3411b faces the center side with the first decorative portion 3411a facing the front. It is arranged along an arc.

The back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is attached to the front side of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base 3420 that extend in an arc shape with a predetermined width, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back-rear left decorative substrate 3421 and a transparent back-rear left base cover 3422 attached to the back-rear left base 3420 so as to cover the front side of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3421.

The back rear left base 3420 is slidably inserted into the slide mounting portion 3420a which is slidably attached to the upper part by the slide shaft 3462 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the slide guide 3436 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 at the lower part. A columnar slide pin 3420b to be formed, and a pair of elongated hole-shaped slide slits 3420c formed vertically symmetrically with the center in the vertical direction as a boundary near the left end in the front view and penetrating the front and back and extending vertically. A detection piece 3420d, which protrudes upward from the upper part in a flat plate shape and is detected by the slide detection sensor 3474 of the rear left slide unit 3460, is provided. The sliding pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 in the back rear left slide unit 3460 are slidably inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c in the back rear left base 3420.

The back-rear left decorative substrate 3421 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410, and these four LEDs form a shaft portion 3412 of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410. In between, two are placed each. That is, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear left decorative substrate 3421 are arranged inside and outside the arc in which the four back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 are arranged in a row, respectively. The LED of the back left decorative substrate 3421 is a full-color LED.

Further, the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 has a rear side of each of the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410A and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410B. A bearing base 3423 that is rotatably supported and attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422, an upper shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B, and a third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C. 3424 in the bearing base that rotatably supports the rear side of each of the lower shaft portions 3412 and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422, and the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C. And a bearing base 3425 mounted on the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422, which rotatably supports the rear side of each of the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D. There is.

Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A, and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422 and is attached to the front surface. The front side of each of the first bearing cover 3426 which is decorated, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A, and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B. The second bearing cover 3427, which is mounted on the front surface of the bearing base 3423 and is decorated on the front surface, and the upper shaft portion 3412 and the second back-rear left-handed rotating decoration body 3410B. The third bearing cover 3428 which is attached to the front surface of the bearing base 3424 and is decorated on the front surface while rotatably supporting the front side of each of the lower shaft portions 3412 of the rear left rotation decorative body 3410C. And, the front side of each of the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D is rotatably supported, and the bearing base 3425. The fourth bearing cover 3429, which is attached to the front surface of the vehicle and is decorated on the front surface, and the upper shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decorative body 3410D are rotatably supported and the back rear left base cover 3422. It is provided with a fifth bearing cover 3430, which is attached to the front surface of the bearing and is decorated on the front surface.

Further, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is attached to the front side of the back rear left base cover 3422 on the rear side of the first bearing cover 3426, and the rotating shafts are the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base cover 3422. The back rear left drive motor 3431 protruding between the two, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3432 attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left drive motor 3431, and the back rear left base 3420 that mesh with the drive gear 3432. A spur gear-shaped relay gear 3433 rotatably attached to the above, a vertically extending drive rack gear 3434a that meshes with the relay gear 3433, an operating rack gear lower 3434b extending vertically above the drive rack gear 3434a, and It has an operating rack gear upper 3434c extending up and down above the operating rack gear lower 3434b, and the back rear left base cover so that the operating rack gear lower 3434b and the operating rack gear upper 3434c are located on the front side of the back rear left base cover 3422. It includes a back-rear left drive rack 3434 that is slidably mounted up and down by 3422.

Further, the rear rear left movable decorative unit 3401 has a driven gear portion 3435a that meshes with the operating rack gear lower 3434b of the rear rear left drive rack 3434, and a columnar body portion 3435b that protrudes forward from the driven gear portion 3435a. A transmission gear member having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3435c formed at the front end of the body portion 3435b and rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422. Formed at the lower 3435, the driven gear portion 3436a that meshes with the upper 3434c of the operating rack gear of the back rear left drive rack 3434, the columnar body portion 3436b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3436a, and the front end of the body portion 3436b. The transmission gear member 3436c, which has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3436c and is rotatably attached around the axis extending forward and backward on the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422, and the first back rear The upper shaft portion 3412 of the counterclockwise decorative body 3410A and the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back-rear left rotating decorative body 3410C are respectively rotatably attached to the upper shaft portion 3412, and the transmission gear portion 3435c of the transmission gear member lower 3435. The transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear member 3436 and the rotary gear 3437 in the shape of a bevel gear, each of which is meshed with the transmission gear portion 3436c, are provided.

Further, the rear left movable decorative unit 3401 has a gear portion 3438a extending in an arc shape that meshes with the drive gear 3432, and a detection piece 3438b extending in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3438a. The back rear left base 3420 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the back rear left base 3420, and the back rear left base 3420 is mounted on the front surface of the back rear left base 3420 so as to detect the detection gear member 3438 and the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438. It is equipped with a detection sensor 3439.

Further, the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 includes an upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410A, a lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410B, and a third. It is provided with a rotation connecting mechanism 3450 that connects the upper shaft portion 3412 of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D so as to be rotatable and transmittable. .. The rotary connection mechanism 3450 includes two (pair) arm portions 3451 projecting from the tip of the shaft portion 3412, and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the arm portions 3451.

To elaborate on the rotary coupling mechanism 3450, the two arm portions 3451 project from the end of the shaft portion 3412 in the circumferential direction with the same gap in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center in the shaft portion 3412. The width of is narrower than the gap. Further, the spider 3452 is inserted into the four arm portions 3451 with the arm portions 3451 of the other shaft portion 3412 inserted into the gaps between the two arm portions 3451 in one shaft portion 3412. It has four cylindrical rod-shaped transmission portions 3452a that protrude from the enclosed inner side between the arm portions 3451 and each other.

In the assembled state of the back-rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, four back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 are arranged vertically, and the second back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410B are arranged in a row. The respective shaft portions 3412 are arranged along the horizontal line passing between the three back-rear left-handed decorative bodies 3410C and with respect to the arc having a center on their right side. Further, the shaft portions 3412 of each of the four back-rear left-handed decorative bodies 3410 are arranged at the same positions in the front-rear direction. That is, each of the shaft portions 3412 is arranged on the same plane parallel to the plane of the game area 5a. Further, in the assembled state, the four back-rear left-handed decorative bodies 3410 are attached so as not to be movable in the extending direction of the shaft portion 3412, respectively.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, the transmission gear portion 3435c of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear member upper 3436 each have the bearing base lower 3423 and the bearing base upper 3425, respectively. Each one is exposed forward through the penetration. In front of the transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the transmission gear member upper 3436, the shaft portions 3412 of the two adjacent back-rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are connected to each other by the rotary connection mechanism 3450. Are connected by.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401, the front side of the back rear left drive motor 3431 is covered with the first bearing cover 3426, and the two rotary connecting mechanisms 3450 are covered by the second bearing cover 3427 and the second bearing cover 3427. Each of them is covered with a four-bearing cover 3429, which improves the appearance of the rear left movable production unit 3400.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. In the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, under a normal state, four back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 move the first decorative portion 3411a of the decorative body main body 3411 forward (front). It is in the facing state (the state of the first production position). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 186 (a), the back rear left drive rack 3434 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. Then, the relay gear 3433 is engaged near the upper end of the drive rack gear 3434a of the rear left drive rack 3434, and the driven gear portion 3435a of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the driven gear portion 3435a of the transmission gear member lower 3435 near the upper end of the operating rack gear lower 3434b and the operating rack gear upper 3434c. The driven gear portion 3436a of the transmission gear member 3436 is meshed with each other. Further, the back-rear left rotation detection sensor 3439 detects the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438.

From this normal state, when the relay gear 3433 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by the back rear left drive motor 3431 via the drive gear 3432, the drive rack gear 3434a meshing with the relay gear 3433 causes the back rear. The left drive rack 3434 will slide upward. When the rear left drive rack 3434 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3435a of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the driven gear portion 3436a of the transmission gear member upper 3436 meshing with the operating rack gear lower 3434b and the operating rack gear upper 3434c, respectively. , The lower 3435 of the transmission gear member and the upper 3436 of the transmission gear member each rotate in the counterclockwise direction at the same speed.

When the lower 3435 of the transmission gear member and the upper 3436 of the transmission gear member each rotate in the counterclockwise direction, the respective rotary gears 3437 meshing with the respective transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3436c are counterclockwise in the bottom view. It will rotate in the clockwise direction. As a result, the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C are moved forward through the shaft portion 3412 to which the rotation gear 3437 is attached, and the disk-shaped second decoration 3411b is moved forward. It will rotate around each shaft portion 3412 so as to move.

Then, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A is rotatably connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B by the rotation connection mechanism 3450. , Because the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C is rotationally transmitted to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D by the rotation connection mechanism 3450. The rotation of the first back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410C is rotated to the second back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth back-back-left-handed rotation via the respective rotation connecting mechanisms 3450. It is transmitted to the decorative body 3410D, and the second back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3410D are in the same direction as the first back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3410C. It will rotate almost at the same time.

The rotation transmission by the rotation connecting mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft portion 3412 on the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C side is rotated via the rotation gear 3437, the tip thereof The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 abuts on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmission portion 3452a is the tip of the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back back left rotation decoration body 3410D. By abutting on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D will rotate.

At this time, the shaft portion 3412 on the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C side, the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B, and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D side. Since the shafts 3412 of the above extend in different directions, the plane passing through the center of the four transmission portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 is the central axis of the two shafts 3412 having different extending directions. The four transmission portions 3452a slide relatively between the arm portions 3451 in the extending direction of the arm portion 3451 so as to maintain a state of being aligned with the plane including the bisectors of the corners. It becomes. As a result, the rotation of the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C is smoothly transmitted, and the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back rear rear. The shaft portion 3412 on the counterclockwise decorative body 3410D side can be rotated.

In this way, the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A, the second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B, and the third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A are provided by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 capable of transmitting rotation. Since the four back rear left rotation decorations 3410D are connected to each other, the four back rear left rotation decorations 3410 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction at the same speed by driving the back rear left drive motor 3431.

When the relay gear 3433 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the back rear left drive motor 3431 in order to slide the back rear left drive rack 3434 upward, the gear portion 3438a meshing with the drive gear 3432 is changed. Through this, the detection gear member 3438 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view.

Then, when the detection gear member 3438 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction and the detection piece 3438b is in a non-detection state by the back-rear left rotation detection sensor 3439, the drive of the back-rear left drive motor 3431 is stopped. And, the four back-rear counterclockwise rotating decorative bodies 3410 stop in a state where each of the second decorative parts 3411b is directed forward (front) (the state of the second effect position rotated by about 62 degrees from the normal state). (See FIG. 186 (b)). In this state, the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3411b that imitates the lens of the spotlight is in a state of facing forward, so that four round decorations are lined up, and the decoration is different from the normal state. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

On the other hand, when the back-rear left drive rack 3434 is slid to the upper moving end by the back-rear left drive motor 3431 via the drive gear 3432 and the relay gear 3433, the four back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 are usually displayed. With respect to the state of (see FIG. 186 (c)), the state is rotated (reversed) by about 180 degrees around each shaft portion 3412 (state of the third effect position). In this state, the third decorative portion 3411c decorated with letters faces forward (front), and the words and phrases formed by the decoration of the four letters can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. At the same time, it is possible to show the player a decoration different from the normal state (see FIG. 189 (c)).

When returning the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 to the normal state, the back-rear left drive motor 3431 can be returned to the normal state by rotating the back-rear left drive motor 3431 in the opposite direction to the above.

In this way, the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 has its respective axes within an angle range of about 180 degrees in which the four back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 are inverted from the normal state by the back-rear left drive motor 3431. It can be rotated in the same direction at the same time around the portion 3412. This makes it possible to change (change) the decoration facing forward in various ways. Further, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3421, the four back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 are independently emitted and decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9f-2. Back and right movable decorative unit]
The back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 in the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 184, 187, 188, and the like. FIG. 187 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable effect unit from the front, and FIG. 187 (b) is an explanatory view showing the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a unit from the right side surface. FIG. 188 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back-rear right rotating decorative body in the back-rear right movable decorative body unit of the back-rear right movable effect unit.

As shown in the figure, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 includes a plurality of (here, four) back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 having predetermined decorations. The plurality of back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are, from the bottom, the first back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510A, the second back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510B, the third back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510C, and the fourth back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510C. It is said to be a right-handed decorative body 3510D. Each of these back-back right-handed decorative bodies 3510 is formed in substantially the same shape.

The back-rear right-handed decorative body 3510 bulges in a semi-cylindrical shape and extends diagonally from the ends of the first decorative portion 3511a and the first decorative portion 3511a that imitate the body portion of the spotlight in a disk shape. A decorative body body 3511 having a second decorative portion 3511b that imitates the lens portion of the above, and a third decorative portion 3511c that extends flat on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3511a and has a predetermined character. It includes a shaft portion 3512 that protrudes from each of the two side surfaces intersecting the end portion of the second decorative portion 3511b in the decorative body main body 3511.

The decorative body body 3511 of the back-rear clockwise rotating decorative body 3510 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with a metallic luster. The decorative body body 3511 is formed so that when the first decorative portion 3511a is turned to the front, the second decorative portion 3511b can be visually recognized in an oblique state. Although not shown, the third decorative portion 3511c of the decorative body main body 3511 is individually decorated with one character so as to be one word by the four back-back-right rotating decorative bodies 3510.

In the four back-rear right-handed decorative bodies 3510, each shaft portion 3512 has a predetermined radius so that the second decorative portion 3511b faces the center side with the first decorative portion 3511a facing the front. It is arranged along an arc.

The back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is attached to the front side of the flat back rear right base 3520 extending in an arc shape with a predetermined width and the back rear right base 3520, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back-rear right decorative substrate 3521 and a transparent back-rear right base cover 3522 attached to the back-rear right base 3520 so as to cover the front side of the back-rear right decorative substrate 3521.

The back rear right base 3520 is slidably inserted into the slide mounting portion 3520a which is slidably attached to the upper part by the slide shaft 3562 of the back rear right slide unit 3560 and the slide guide 3563 of the back rear right slide unit 3560 at the lower part. A columnar slide pin 3520b to be formed, and a pair of elongated hole-shaped slide slits 3520c formed vertically symmetrically with the center in the vertical direction as a boundary near the left end in the front view and penetrating the front and back and extending vertically. A detection piece 3520d, which protrudes upward from the upper part in a flat plate shape and is detected by the slide detection sensor 3574 of the rear right slide unit 3560, is provided. The sliding pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 in the back rear right slide unit 3560 are slidably inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c in the back rear right base 3520.

The back-rear right decorative substrate 3521 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510, and these four LEDs form a shaft portion 3512 of the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510. In between, two are placed each. That is, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decorative substrate 3521 are arranged inside and outside the arc in which the four back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged in a row, respectively. The LED on the back right decorative substrate 3521 is a full-color LED.

Further, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 has a rear side of each of the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B. The bearing base bottom 3523 which is rotatably supported and attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B, and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C. The bearing base 3524, which rotatably supports the rear side of each of the lower shaft portions 3512 and is attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522, and the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C. And a bearing base 3525 that rotatably supports the rear side of each of the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotating ornament 3510D and is attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522. There is.

Further, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, and is attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522, and is attached to the front surface. The front side of each of the first bearing cover 3526 which is decorated, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A, and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B. The second bearing cover 3527, which is mounted on the front surface of the bearing base 3523 and is decorated on the front surface, and the upper shaft portion 3512 and the first The third bearing cover 3528 which is attached to the front surface of the bearing base 3524 and is decorated on the front surface while rotatably supporting the front side of each of the lower shaft portions 3512 of the rear right rotation decoration body 3510C. And, the front side of each of the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D is rotatably supported, and the bearing base 3525. The fourth bearing cover 3529, which is attached to the front surface of the vehicle and is decorated on the front surface, and the upper shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotating decorative body 3510D are rotatably supported and the back rear right base cover 3522. It is provided with a fifth bearing cover 3530, which is attached to the front surface of the bearing and is decorated on the front surface.

Further, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is attached to the front side of the back rear right base cover 3522 on the rear side of the first bearing cover 3526, and the rotating shafts are the back rear right base 3520 and the back rear right base cover 3522. The back-rear right drive motor 3531 protruding between the two, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3532 attached to the rotating shaft of the back-rear right drive motor 3531, and the back-rear right base 3520 that mesh with the drive gear 3532. A spur gear-shaped relay gear 3533 that is rotatably attached to the above, a vertically extending drive rack gear 3534a that meshes with the relay gear 3533, an operating rack gear lower 3534b that extends vertically above the drive rack gear 3534a, and It has an operating rack gear upper 3534c extending up and down above the operating rack gear lower 3534b, and the back rear right base cover so that the operating rack gear lower 3534b and the operating rack gear upper 3534c are located on the front side of the back rear right base cover 3522. It is equipped with a back-rear right drive rack 3534, which is slidably attached up and down by 3522.

Further, the rear rear right movable decorative unit 3501 includes a driven gear portion 3535a that meshes with the lower rear 3534b of the operating rack gear of the rear rear right drive rack 3534, and a columnar body portion 3535b that protrudes forward from the driven gear portion 3535a. A transmission gear member having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3535c formed at the front end of the body portion 3535b and rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth on the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522. Formed at the lower 3535, the driven gear portion 3536a that meshes with the upper 3534c of the operating rack gear of the rear rear right drive rack 3534, the columnar body portion 3536b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3536a, and the front end of the body portion 3536b. The transmission gear member 3536c, which has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3536c, is rotatably attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522 around an axis extending forward and backward, and the first back rear. The upper shaft portion 3512 of the right-handed decorative body 3510A and the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back-rear right-handed decorative body 3510C are respectively rotatably attached to the upper shaft portion 3512, and the transmission gear portion 3535c of the lower 3535 of the transmission gear member member. The transmission gear portion 3536c of the transmission gear member 3536 and the rotary gear 3537 in the shape of a bevel gear, each of which is meshed with the transmission gear portion 3536c, are provided.

Further, the rear right movable decorative unit 3501 has a gear portion 3538a extending in an arc shape that meshes with the drive gear 3532, and a detection piece 3538b extending in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3538a. The back rear right base 3520 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the back rear right base 3520, and the back rear right base 3520 is mounted on the front surface of the back rear right base 3520 so as to detect the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538. It is equipped with a detection sensor 3539.

Further, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 includes an upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, a lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B, and a third. It is provided with a rotation connection mechanism 3450 that connects the upper shaft portion 3512 of the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D so as to be rotatable and transmittable. .. The rotary connection mechanism 3450 has the same configuration as the rotary connection mechanism 3450 of the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the assembled state of the back-rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, four back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged one above the other in the front view, and the second back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510B and the second back-back right rotating decorative body 3510B are arranged. The respective shaft portions 3512 are arranged along the horizontal line passing between the three back-right rotating ornaments 3510C and with respect to the arc having a center on their left side. Further, the shaft portions 3512 of each of the four back-rear right-handed decorative bodies 3510 are arranged at the same positions in the front-rear direction. That is, each of the shaft portions 3512 is arranged on the same plane parallel to the plane of the game area 5a. Further, in the assembled state, the four back-rear right-handed decorative bodies 3510 are attached so as not to be movable in the extending direction of the shaft portion 3512, respectively.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501, the transmission gear portion 3535c of the transmission gear member lower 3535 and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the transmission gear member upper 3536 each have the bearing base lower 3523 and the bearing base upper 3525, respectively. Each one is exposed forward through the penetration. In front of the transmission gear portion 3535c and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the transmission gear member lower 3535 and the transmission gear member upper 3536, the shaft portions 3512 of the two adjacent back-rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are connected to each other by the rotary connection mechanism 3450. Are connected by.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501, the front side of the back rear right drive motor 3531 is covered with the first bearing cover 3526, and the two rotary connecting mechanisms 3450 are covered with the second bearing cover 3527 and the second bearing cover 3450. Each of them is covered with a four-bearing cover 3529 to improve the appearance of the back-right movable production unit 3500.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188. In the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, under a normal state, four back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 move the first decorative portion 3511a of the decorative body main body 3511 forward (front). It is in the facing state (the state of the first production position). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188 (a), the back rear right drive rack 3534 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. Then, the relay gear 3533 is engaged near the upper end of the drive rack gear 3534a of the rear right drive rack 3534, and the driven gear portion 3535a of the transmission gear member lower 3535 and the driven gear portion 3535a of the transmission gear member lower 3535 near the upper end of the operating rack gear lower 3534b and the operating rack gear upper 3534c. The driven gear portion 3536a of the transmission gear member 3536 is meshed with each other. Further, the back-to-right rotation detection sensor 3539 detects the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538.

From this normal state, when the relay gear 3533 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the rear right drive motor 3531 via the drive gear 3532, the drive rack gear 3534a meshing with the relay gear 3533 causes the back. The rear right drive rack 3534 will slide upward. When the rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3535a of the transmission gear member lower 3535 and the driven gear portion 3536a of the transmission gear member upper 3536 meshing with the operating rack gear lower 3534b and the operating rack gear upper 3534c, respectively. , The lower 3535 of the transmission gear member and the upper 3536 of the transmission gear member rotate in the clockwise direction at the same speed, respectively.

When the lower 3535 of the transmission gear member and the upper 3536 of the transmission gear member each rotate in the clockwise direction, the respective rotary gears 3537 meshing with the respective transmission gear portion 3535c and the transmission gear portion 3536c rotate clockwise in the bottom view. It will rotate in the direction. As a result, the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C are moved forward through the shaft portion 3512 to which the rotation gear 3537 is attached, and the disk-shaped second decoration 3511b is moved forward. It will rotate around each shaft 3512 so as to move.

Then, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotating decoration body 3510A is rotatably connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotating decoration body 3510B by the rotation connecting mechanism 3450. , Because the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C is rotationally transmitted to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D by the rotation connection mechanism 3450. The rotation of the first back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510C is rotated via the respective rotation connecting mechanisms 3450 to the second back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510B. It is transmitted to the decorative body 3510D, and the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotating decorative body 3510D are in the same direction as the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C. It will rotate almost at the same time.

The rotation transmission by the rotation connecting mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft portion 3512 on the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C side is rotated via the rotation gear 3537, the tip thereof The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 abuts on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmission portion 3452a is the tip of the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration 3510D. By abutting on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the second back rear right rotating decoration body 3510B and the fourth back back right rotating decoration body 3510D will rotate.

At this time, the shaft portion 3512 on the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C side, the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D side. Since the shafts 3512 of the above extend in different directions, the plane passing through the center of the four transmission portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 is the central axis of the two shafts 3512 having different extending directions. The four transmission portions 3452a slide relatively between the arm portions 3451 in the extending direction of the arm portion 3451 so as to maintain a state of being aligned with the plane including the bisectors of the corners. It becomes. As a result, the rotation of the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C is smoothly transmitted, and the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back rear rear. The shaft portion 3512 on the right-handed decorative body 3510D side can be rotated.

In this way, the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A, the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B, and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C and the first by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 capable of transmitting rotation. Since the four back rear right rotating decorations 3510D are connected to each other, the four back rear right rotating decorations 3510 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction at the same speed by driving the back rear right drive motor 3531.

When the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back rear right drive motor 3531 in order to slide the back rear right drive rack 3534 upward, the gear portion 3538a that meshes with the drive gear 3532a. The detection gear member 3538 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

Then, when the detection gear member 3538 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the detection piece 3538b is in a non-detection state by the back rear right rotation detection sensor 3539, the drive of the back rear right drive motor 3531 is stopped. Then, the four back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 stop in a state in which each second decorative portion 3511b is directed forward (front) (a state in which the second effect position is rotated by about 62 degrees from the normal state). (See FIG. 188 (b)). In this state, the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3511b that imitates the lens of the spotlight is in a state of facing forward, so that four round decorations are lined up, and the decoration is different from the normal state. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

On the other hand, when the back-rear right drive rack 3534 is slid to the upper moving end by the back-rear right drive motor 3531 via the drive gear 3532 and the relay gear 3533, the four back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are usually displayed. With respect to the state of (see FIG. 188 (c)), the state is rotated (reversed) by about 180 degrees around each shaft portion 3512 (state of the third effect position). In this state, the third decorative portion 3511c decorated with letters faces forward (front), and the words and phrases formed by the decoration of the four letters can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. At the same time, it is possible to show the player a decoration different from the normal state (see FIG. 189 (c)).

When returning the plurality of back-rear right-handed decorative bodies 3510 to the normal state, the back-back right drive motor 3531 can be returned to the normal state by rotating in the opposite direction to the above.

In this way, the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 rotates the four back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 by the back-rear right drive motor 3531 within an angle range of about 180 degrees, which is reversed from the normal state. It can be rotated in the same direction at the same time around the portion 3512. This makes it possible to change (change) the decoration facing forward in various ways. Further, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear right decorative substrate 3521, the four back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are independently emitted and decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9f-3. Directing by the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit]
Next, with respect to the movable effect using the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, mainly with reference to FIG. 189. I will explain. FIG. 189 (a) shows the back-rear left movable decoration unit and the back-rear right movable decoration unit and the back-rear right movable decoration unit in the back-rear left movable decoration unit and the back-back right movable decoration unit. It is a front view which shows in the state of the normal 1st effect position, (b) is the front view which shows the state which the back-back left-rotating decorative body and the back-back right-rotating decorative body are rotated to the 2nd effect position, ( c) is a front view showing a state in which the back-rear left-rotating decorative body and the back-rear-right-rotating decorative body are rotated to the third effect position.

The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The main effect display device 1600 faces forward from between (see FIG. 135 and the like). The back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are normally provided with four back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410, respectively, as shown in FIG. 189 (a). The back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 is in the state of the first effect position with the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3511a facing forward, respectively. In this state, in the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521, the four LEDs corresponding to the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are made to emit light to emit light. The entire rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 can be light-emitting decorated with various colors.

From this normal state, the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right drive motor 3531 are used to move the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 in the direction in which their inner ends face forward. When rotated about 62 degrees around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b in the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 move forward. It will be in the state of the second production position facing. In this state, the player can see the decoration in which the four round second decorative portions 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b are arranged on the circumference, respectively. In this second effect position, when the LEDs inside the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521 are made to emit light, the disc-shaped back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are formed. The second decorative portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b can be light-emitting decorated, and the player can be shown a light-emitting effect as if light is emitted from a spotlight.

From the state of the second effect position, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 are used to make the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 face the front, respectively. Approximately 118 around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 in the direction in which the portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b face the outside of the arc in which the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 are arranged. When rotated by a degree (rotated by 180 degrees from the state of the first effect position), the third decorative portion 3511c decorated with characters in the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 turned to the front. It will be in the state of the third production position. In this state, the phrase formed by the decoration of each of the four letters can be shown to the player, and the phrase can suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player. Further, in the state of the third effect position, in the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521, four LEDs corresponding to the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are displayed. By emitting light, the third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be made to emit light in various colors.

In the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated separately, respectively. A variety of effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the rotation and the luminous decoration.

As described above, according to the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the adjacent back rear left rotation decoration A plurality of backs in which the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the body 3410 and the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3510 extend in different directions, and the respective shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512 are arranged on the same plane. The rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are provided, and the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the adjacent back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are connected to each other from the universal shaft joint. Because it is connected so that rotation can be transmitted from the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C are connected by the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531. When the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C are rotated, the other second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B is rotated via the rotation connection mechanism 3450. And the rotation is transmitted to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D, the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D, and a plurality of backs. The rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 can be rotated at the same time.

As a result, the number of the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right drive motor 3531 with respect to the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be reduced as much as possible. The space required for the left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the space required for the plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 is relatively small. Can be widened to. Therefore, since it is possible to widen the space of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510, the rotation range of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 is increased. To make the movement more enjoyable, to make the back-back left-rotating decoration 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decoration 3510 larger to make them stand out, and to make the back-back left-turning decoration 3410 and the back-back right-turning decoration more conspicuous. Since the number of bodies 3510 can be increased to increase the impact when rotated, the effect of movement and decoration of a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be further enhanced. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A, the third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C, the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A, and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C are used as the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back. When rotated by the rear right drive motor 3531, a plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back rear right rotation decorations 3510, each of which has a shaft portion 3412 and a shaft portion 3512 extending in different directions via a rotation connection mechanism 3450, are formed. Since it can be rotated at the same time, it is possible to show the player a sense of unity (movable production) while the movements of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are disturbed. It is possible to further enhance the effect of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510. At this time, since the shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512 of the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510 are arranged on the same plane, a plurality of shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512 are arranged on the same plane. It is possible to make it easier for the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 to be recognized as belonging to the same group, and a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies. Even if the 3510 rotates at the same time, it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, and the movements (movable effect) of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 that rotate at the same time are enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, two (pair) arm portions 3451 are projected from the tips of the shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 of the two adjacent back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear-right-rotating decorative body 3510, respectively. Since the number of arm portions 3451 is minimized, the gap between the arm portions 3451 in the circumferential direction is made as wide as possible and inserted without increasing the outer peripheral diameter of the arm portions 3451. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 can be made thick enough to have sufficient strength. Therefore, by making the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 as thick as possible, the damage of the spider 3452 can be reduced, so that the game is interrupted due to the damage during the game and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to suppress the rotation connection mechanism 3450 (universal shaft joint) from becoming large in size, the space for the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 is relative. Because it can be widened, the rotation range of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be increased to make the movement more enjoyable, or the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back. It is possible to make the rear right rotation decoration 3510 larger and make it stand out, or increase the number of back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and back rear right rotation decoration 3510 to increase the impact when rotating. , It is possible to further enhance the effect of the movement and decoration of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game. ..

Furthermore, since the rotation is transmitted via the spider 3452, the time lag of the rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring is compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by using the rubber and the spring. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be rotated at the same time. Therefore, when a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated by the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-back right drive motor 3531, the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back are used. Since the rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 rotates at the same time, the plurality of back-back-left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510 rotate with a delay in order, resulting in an unnatural feeling for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and to entertain the movements of the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorations 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorations 3510 that have a sense of unity to the player, and suppress the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is provided with the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A, the third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C, the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A, and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C. The side surfaces of the shaft portion 3412 and the arm portion 3512 of the shaft portion 3512, the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B, the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D, the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear rear right. A universal shaft joint (rotational connection mechanism 3450) that transmits rotation between two shafts 3412 and 3512 by simply sandwiching it between the shaft 3412 of the rotary decoration 3510D and the side surface of the arm 3451 of the shaft 3512. Because it is possible to assemble, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and ease the labor required for assembly compared to the case where a general universal joint or constant velocity shaft joint is adopted as a universal shaft joint. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine.

[5-9f-4. Back left slide unit]
Next, the back rear left slide unit 3460 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. FIG. 190 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit, and FIG. 190 (b) is a rear view left movable effect. It is a perspective view which looked at the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the unit and the back rear right movable production unit from the back. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 shows the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit disassembled and viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 193 is an explanation showing the movements of the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit by the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit. It is a figure.

The back rear left movable effect unit 3400's back rear left slide unit 3460 is attached to the swivel table 3380 in the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, and the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is centered on the swivel table 3380 (swivel). It moves (slides) linearly between the separation position away from the center) and the approach position close to it. As shown in the figure, the back rear left slide unit 3460 has a frame-shaped back rear left unit base 3461 attached to the swivel table 3380 and both left and right ends attached to the upper front surface of the back rear left unit base 3461. It is provided with a columnar slide shaft 3462 extending to the left side and a box-shaped slide guide 3436 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the rear left unit base 3461 and extending upward to the left and right.

The back rear left unit base 3461 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 has a left side extending in an arc shape from the vicinity of the upper portion to the lower end along the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380, and the upper portion is linear to the right of the lower end. It is formed in a deformed C shape that extends to. A slide shaft 3462 is attached to a portion of the rear left unit base 3461 that extends linearly at the top. The back rear left unit base 3461 is formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the height of the leftmost protruding portion (the height of the center of the arc) of the left side surface formed in an arc shape, and is formed in the front-rear direction. It has a circular through hole 3461a penetrating through. Each base portion 3465a (gear portion 3465d) of the pair of slide arms 3465 described later is inserted into the two through holes 3461a arranged one above the other.

The slide shaft 3462 is slidably attached to the slide mounting portion 3420a of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401. The slide guide 3464 is slidably inserted with the slide pin 3420b of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401.

Further, the back rear left slide unit 3460 is attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 at a position coaxial with the two through holes 3461a. The arm mounting member 3464 having a pair of columnar mounting shafts 3464a and the pair of mounting shafts 3464a in the arm mounting member 3464 are rotatably mounted from the front, respectively. It includes a pair of slide arms 3465 that slide the body unit 3401 between the detached position and the approached position.

The slide arm 3465 has a base portion 3465a rotatably attached to the mounting shaft 3464a of the arm mounting member 3464 and an arm portion 3465b extending outward from the front end of the base portion 3465a along the front surface of the back rear left unit base 3461. A sliding pin 3465c that protrudes forward from the tip of the arm portion 3465b in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the slide slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401, and the base portion. A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3465d formed on the outer periphery of the 3465a is provided. Further, of the pair of slide arms 3465, the lower slide arm 3465 includes a pulley portion 3465e on which the second belt 3471 is wound around the rear end of the base portion 3465a.

Further, the back rear left slide unit 3460 is attached below the slide guide 3464 in the lower front portion of the back rear left unit base 3461, and the rotating shaft penetrates the back rear left unit base 3461 and protrudes rearward. Spur gear-shaped drive gear 3467 attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left slide drive motor 3466, back rear left slide drive motor 3466, and spur gear-shaped driven gear portion 3468a that meshes with the drive gear 3467. A drive pulley 3468 having a pulley portion 3468b that rotates integrally with the driven gear portion 3468a and rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461, and a drive pulley on the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461. A relay pulley 3469 that is rotatably attached at an intermediate position between the 3468 and the lower slide arm 3465 and has two pulley portions 3469a arranged in the front-rear direction, and a pulley portion 3468b and a relay pulley of the drive pulley 3468. An endless annular first belt 3470 wound around a pulley portion 3469a on the rear side of 3469, and a pulley portion 3469a on the front side of the relay pulley 3469 and a pulley portion 3465e on the lower slide arm 3465. It is equipped with an endless annular second belt 3471.

The relay pulley 3469 is rotatably attached to the back rear left unit base 3461 at a position separated from the straight line connecting the pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465 and the drive pulley 3468 to the left in the front view. Therefore, the first belt 3470 wound around the drive pulley 3468 and the relay pulley 3469 and the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469 and the pulley portion 3465e of the slide arm 3465 have different directions. The rotation transmission path by the first belt 3470 and the second belt 3471 is bent in a dogleg shape with the relay pulley 3469 as a boundary. As a result, the first belt 3470 and the second belt 3471 are accommodated in the back rear left unit base 3461 formed in a modified C shape and are not visible from the front side.

Further, the back rear left slide unit 3460 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461, and is a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear that meshes with the gear portion 3465d in the lower slide arm 3465. The second transmission gear 3473, which meshes with 3472 and the first transmission gear 3472 and also meshes with the gear portion 3465d in the upper slide arm 3465 and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear left unit base 3461. A slide detection sensor 3474, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 and detects the slide position of the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401, is provided. The first transmission gear 3472 and the second transmission gear 3473 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401.

Subsequently, the slide (movement) of the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 by the back rear left slide unit 3460 will be described in detail. The back rear left slide unit 3460 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 is inserted into the slide guide 3436 with the slide pin 3420b of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401, and then inserted into the slide shaft 3462. , Attach the slide mounting part 3420a of the back left base 3420. At this time, the sliding pins 3465c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3465 arranged vertically are inserted into the slide slits 3420c arranged vertically on the back rear left base 3420. As a result, the back rear left slide unit 3460 can move the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 in the left-right direction without swinging in the front-rear direction by the slide shaft 3462 and the slide guide 3436.

In the normal state of the back rear left slide unit 3460, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), a pair of slide arms 3465 have an arm portion 3465b extending horizontally from the base portion 3465a to the left. .. In this state, the sliding pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 is closest to the arcuate left surface of the back rear left unit base 3461. That is, the sliding pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 are in a state farthest from the center (turning center) of the arc forming the left side surface.

Since each of the sliding pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 is inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c of the back rear left base 3420, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is under a normal state. It is in the state of the separation position farthest from the turning center. In this normal state, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is located directly in front of the back rear left unit base 3461. Further, in a normal state, the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401.

From this normal state, when the drive gear 3467 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by the back-rear left slide drive motor 3466, the drive pulley 3468 is turned counterclockwise by the driven gear portion 3468a meshing with the drive gear 3467. It will rotate in the direction. Then, as the drive pulley 3468 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the relay pulley 3469 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the first belt 3470 wound around the pulley portion 3468b of the drive pulley 3468. Further, the pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469, and the lower slide arm 3465 has its own base. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the axis of 3465a.

When the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission gear 3472 that meshes with the gear portion 3465d of the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the clockwise direction, and this first transmission The second transmission gear 3473 that meshes with the gear 3472 rotates counterclockwise, and the upper slide arm 3465 passes through the gear portion 3465d of the upper slide arm 3465 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3473. Will rotate clockwise around the axis of its base 3465a. Therefore, the lower slide arm 3465 rotates counterclockwise, and the upper slide arm 3465 rotates clockwise at the same speed in opposite directions.

When the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate in opposite directions, each of the sliding pins 3465c revolves around the axis of its own base 3465a with a predetermined radius (radius of the length of the arm 3465b). , The positions of the respective sliding pins 3465c in the left-right direction move to the right. When the sliding pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 revolves, the sliding pin 3465c slides in the slide slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420 and presses the back rear left base 3420 to the right through the slide slit 3420c. Then, the entire rear left movable decorative unit 3401 moves (slides) to the right. Then, the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 moves to the right while the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state.

When the pair of slide arms 3465 are rotated 180 degrees from the normal state, the drive of the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 is stopped, and the movement of the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 to the right is stopped. In this state, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is located farthest to the right from the arcuate left side surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is in a position (approaching position) closest to the center of the arc on the left side surface (center of the swivel table 3380) of the back rear left unit base 3461. In this approaching position, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is located inside the back rear left unit base 3461 formed in a modified C shape. Further, in the approaching position, the slide detection sensor 3474 is in a non-detection state.

When moving the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 in the approaching position to the separation position, the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is driven in the opposite direction to the above by driving the back-rear left slide drive motor 3466. Can be moved to the left from the approaching position, and then when the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back rear left base 3420, the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 is stopped to move the back rear left. The decorative unit 3401 can be returned to the separated position.

Further, with the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 moved to a detached position or an approaching position, the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 causes the sliding pins 3465c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3465 to approach each other. Each slide arm 3465 is rotated so that each sliding pin 3465c is brought into contact with the end of the slide slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420 on the side close to each other. As a result, the movement to the right at the separation position and the movement to the left at the approach position are restricted (locked), respectively, and the rear left movable decorative unit 3401 cannot be slid at the separation position or the approach position. Can be locked to.

In this way, by driving the back rear left slide drive motor 3466, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 can be moved between the separation position and the approach position, and can be stopped at an arbitrary position between them. Can be done.

Further, the back rear left is provided by the sliding pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c formed at positions symmetrical with respect to the center in the vertical direction of the back rear left base 3420. The base 3420 (back rear left movable decorative unit 3401) is moved between the separation position and the approach position. That is, when the back-rear left rotating decoration body 3410 (back-rear left movable decoration unit 3401) is moved between the approaching position and the separating position via the back-rear left base 3420, the sliding of the pair of slide arms 3465 Since the moving pin 3465c applies a force to the central portion of the back rear left base 3420 in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the moving direction) to move the back rear left base 3420, the rotation table 3380 is rotated. Even if the back rear left base 3420 is moved while the back rear left base 3420 is changed in the direction of movement, the force for moving the back rear left base 3420 is still the back rear left base 3420 (back rear left). By acting near the position of the center of gravity of the movable decorative body unit 3401), the back rear left base 3420 can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the back rear left base 3420 can be smoothly moved. Therefore, regardless of the orientation of the back rear left base 3420 (back rear left movable decorative unit 3401) due to the rotation of the swivel table 3380, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base 3420 can be smoothly inserted without rattling. Since the back-rear left-handed decorative body 3410 can be moved together between the approaching position and the distant position, the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 can be moved without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. You can enjoy the movement of the back-to-back left-handed decorative body 3410.

Further, the shape of the slide arm 3465 for moving the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is such that the arm portion 3465b from the base portion 3465a at the center of rotation to the sliding pin 3465c is extended in a rod shape from the base portion 3465a only in one direction. Due to the shape, the slide arm 3465 can be made as small as possible, the slide arm 3465 can be made inconspicuous, and when the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is moved to the separated position, the slide arm can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to prevent a part of the 3465 from unnecessarily protruding from the back rear left unit base 3461 to the center side (inside) of the game area 5a, and a part of the slide arm 3465 from the back rear left unit base 3461 inward. By projecting, it is possible to block the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and prevent the effect image from becoming difficult to see or the appearance in the game area 5a from deteriorating.

[5-9f-5. Back right slide unit]
Next, the back rear right slide unit 3560 in the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. The back rear right movable effect unit 3500's back rear right slide unit 3560 is attached to the swivel table 3380 in the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is centered on the swivel table 3380 (swivel). It moves (slides) linearly between the separation position away from the center) and the approach position close to it. As shown in the figure, the back rear right slide unit 3560 has a frame-shaped back rear right unit base 3651 attached to the swivel table 3380 and both left and right ends attached to the upper front surface of the back rear right unit base 3651. It is provided with a columnar slide shaft 3562 extending to the left and right, and a box-shaped slide guide 3563 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the rear right unit base 3651 and extending upward to the left and right.

The back rear right unit base 3651 of the back rear right slide unit 3560 has a right side extending in an arc shape from the vicinity of the upper portion to the lower end along the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380, and the upper portion is linear to the left from the lower end. It is formed in a deformed shape that extends to. A slide shaft 3562 is attached to a portion of the rear right unit base 3651 that extends linearly at the top. The back rear right unit base 3651 is formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the height of the rightmost protruding portion (the height of the center of the arc) of the right side surface formed in an arc shape, and is formed in the front-rear direction. It has a circular through hole 3651a penetrating through. Each base portion 3565a (gear portion 3565d) of the pair of slide arms 3565, which will be described later, is inserted into the two through holes 3651a arranged one above the other.

The slide shaft 3562 is slidably attached to the slide mounting portion 3520a of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501. The slide guide 3563 is slidably inserted with the slide pin 3520b of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501.

Further, the back rear right slide unit 3560 is attached to the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3651, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the back rear right unit base 3651 at a position coaxial with the two through holes 3651a. The arm mounting member 3564 having a pair of columnar mounting shafts 3564a and the pair of mounting shafts 3564a in the arm mounting member 3564 are rotatably mounted from the front, respectively, and by rotating, the back rear right movable decoration. It includes a pair of slide arms 3565 that slide the body unit 3501 between the detached position and the approached position.

The slide arm 3565 has a base portion 3565a rotatably attached to the mounting shaft 3564a of the arm mounting member 3564 and an arm portion 3565b extending outward from the front end of the base portion 3565a along the front surface of the back rear right unit base 3651. A sliding pin 3565c that protrudes forward from the tip of the arm portion 3565b in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the slide slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 and the base portion. A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3565d formed on the outer periphery of the 3565a is provided. Further, of the pair of slide arms 3565, the lower slide arm 3565 is provided with a pulley portion 3565e on which the second belt 3571 is wound around the rear end of the base portion 3565a.

Further, the back rear right slide unit 3560 is attached below the slide guide 3563 in the lower front portion of the back rear right unit base 3651, and the rotating shaft penetrates the back rear right unit base 3651 and protrudes rearward. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3567 attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear right slide drive motor 3566, a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion 3568a that meshes with the drive gear 3567, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion 3568a. A drive pulley 3568 having a pulley portion 3568b that rotates integrally with the driven gear portion 3568a and rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3651, and a drive pulley on the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3651. A relay pulley 3569 which is rotatably attached at an intermediate position between the 3568 and the lower slide arm 3565 and has two pulley portions 3569a arranged in the front-rear direction, and a pulley portion 3568b and a relay pulley of the drive pulley 3568. The endless annular first belt 3570 wound around the pulley portion 3569a on the rear side of the 3569, and the pulley portion 3569a on the front side of the relay pulley 3569 and the pulley portion 3565e on the lower slide arm 3565. It is equipped with an endless annular second belt 3571.

The relay pulley 3569 is rotatably attached to the back rear right unit base 3651 at a position away from the straight line connecting the pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565 and the drive pulley 3568 to the right in the front view. Therefore, the first belt 3570 wound around the drive pulley 3568 and the relay pulley 3569 and the second belt 3571 wound around the relay pulley 3569 and the pulley portion 3565e of the slide arm 3565 have different directions. The rotation transmission path by the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3571 is bent in a dogleg shape with the relay pulley 3569 as a boundary. As a result, the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3571 are housed in the back rear right unit base 3651 formed in a deformed shape so as not to be seen from the front side.

Further, the back rear right slide unit 3560 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3651, and is a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear that meshes with the gear portion 3565d in the lower slide arm 3565. The second transmission gear 3573, which meshes with the first transmission gear 3572 and the gear portion 3565d on the upper slide arm 3565, and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear right unit base 3651. And a slide detection sensor 3574 which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the back rear right unit base 3651 and detects the slide position of the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501. The first transmission gear 3572 and the second transmission gear 3573 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501.

Subsequently, the slide (movement) of the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 by the back rear right slide unit 3560 will be described in detail. The back rear right slide unit 3560 in the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 is inserted into the slide guide 3563 with the slide pin 3520b of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 and then inserted into the slide shaft 3562. , Attach the slide mounting part 3520a of the back right base 3520. At this time, the sliding pins 3565c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3565 arranged vertically are inserted into the slide slits 3520c arranged vertically on the back rear right base 3520. As a result, the back rear right slide unit 3560 can move the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 in the left-right direction without swinging in the front-rear direction by the slide shaft 3562 and the slide guide 3563.

In the normal state of the back rear right slide unit 3560, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), a pair of slide arms 3565 are in a state in which the arm portion 3565b extends horizontally from the base portion 3565a to the right. .. In this state, the sliding pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 is closest to the arcuate right surface of the back rear right unit base 3651. That is, the sliding pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 are in a state farthest from the center (turning center) of the arc forming the right side surface.

Since each of the sliding pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 is inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c of the back rear right base 3520, under normal conditions, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 It is in the state of the separation position farthest from the turning center. In this normal state, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is located directly in front of the back rear right unit base 3651. Further, in a normal state, the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501.

From this normal state, when the drive gear 3567 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back rear right slide drive motor 3566, the drive pulley 3568 is rotated clockwise by the driven gear portion 3568a meshing with the drive gear 3567. It will rotate in the direction. Then, as the drive pulley 3568 rotates in the clockwise direction, the relay pulley 3569 rotates in the clockwise direction via the first belt 3570 wound around the pulley portion 3568b of the drive pulley 3568, and further. The pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction via the second belt 3571 wound around the relay pulley 3569, and the lower slide arm 3565 is the axis of its own base portion 3565a. It will rotate clockwise around the core.

When the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction, the first transmission gear 357 that meshes with the gear portion 3565d of the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and this first transmission The second transmission gear 3573 that meshes with the gear 3572 rotates clockwise, and the upper slide arm 3565 passes through the gear portion 3565d of the upper slide arm 3565 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3573. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the axis of its own base 3565a. Therefore, the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the upper slide arm 3565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, respectively, in opposite directions at the same time.

When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate in opposite directions, each of the sliding pins 3565c revolves around the axis of its own base 3565a with a predetermined radius (radius of the length of the arm portion 3565b). , The positions of the respective sliding pins 3565c in the left-right direction will move to the left. When the sliding pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 revolves, the sliding pin 3565c slides in the slide slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520 and presses the back rear right base 3520 to the left through the slide slit 3520c. Then, the entire back-right movable decorative unit 3501 moves (slides) to the left. Then, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 moves to the left until the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state.

When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state, the drive of the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 is stopped, and the movement of the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 to the left is stopped. In this state, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is located farthest to the left from the arcuate right side surface of the back rear right unit base 3651 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is in the state of being closest to the center of the arc (center of the swivel table 3380) on the right side of the back-rear right unit base 3651 (approaching position). In this approaching position, the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is located inside the back-rear right unit base 3651, which is formed in a deformed shape. Further, in the approaching position, the slide detection sensor 3574 is in a non-detection state.

When moving the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 in the approaching position to the separation position, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is driven by driving the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 in the opposite direction to the above. Can be moved to the right from the approaching position, and then when the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the back rear right base 3520, the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 is stopped to move the back rear right. The decorative unit 3501 can be returned to the separated position.

Further, with the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 moved to a detached position or an approaching position, the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 moves the sliding pins 3565c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3565 toward each other. Each slide arm 3565 is rotated so that each sliding pin 3565c is brought into contact with the end of the slide slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520 on the side close to each other. As a result, the movement to the left at the separation position and the movement to the right at the approach position are restricted (locked), and the back-right movable decorative unit 3501 cannot be slid at the separation position or the approach position. Can be locked to.

In this way, by driving the back-rear right slide drive motor 3566, the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 can be moved between the separation position and the approach position, and can be stopped at an arbitrary position between them. Can be done.

Further, the back rear right is provided by the sliding pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c formed at positions symmetrical with respect to the center in the vertical direction of the back rear right base 3520. The base 3520 (back-right movable decorative unit 3501) is moved between the separation position and the approach position. That is, when the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 (back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501) is moved between the approaching position and the separating position via the back rear right base 3520, the sliding of the pair of slide arms 3565 Since the moving pin 3565c applies a force to the central portion of the back rear right base 3520 in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the moving direction) to move the back rear right base 3320, the rotation table 3380 is rotated. Even if the back rear right base 3520 is moved while the back rear right base 3520 is changed in the direction of movement, the force for moving the back rear right base 3520 is still the back rear right base 3520 (back rear right). By acting near the position of the center of gravity of the movable decorative body unit 3501), the back rear right base 3520 can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the back rear right base 3520 can be smoothly moved. Therefore, regardless of the orientation of the back rear right base 3520 (back rear right movable decorative unit 3501) due to the rotation of the swivel table 3380, the back rear right base 3520 and the back rear right base 3520 can be smoothly inserted without rattling. Since the back-back right-handed decorative body 3510 can be moved together between the approaching position and the distant position, the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. You can enjoy the movement of the back-to-back left-handed decorative body 3410.

Further, the shape of the slide arm 3565 for moving the back-right movable decorative unit 3501 is such that the arm portion 3565b from the base portion 3565a at the center of rotation to the sliding pin 3565c is extended in a rod shape only in one direction from the base portion 3565a. Due to the shape, the slide arm 3565 can be made as small as possible, the slide arm 3565 can be made inconspicuous, and when the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is moved to the separated position, the slide arm can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to prevent a part of the 3565 from unnecessarily protruding from the back rear right unit base 3651 to the center side (inside) of the game area 5a, and a part of the slide arm 3565 from the back rear right unit base 3651 to the inside. By projecting, it is possible to block the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and prevent the effect image from becoming difficult to see or the appearance in the game area 5a from deteriorating.

[5-9f-6. Directing by the back left slide unit and the back right slide unit]
Next, the movable effect using the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 (a) is a front view showing the back rear left movable decorative unit and the back rear right movable decorative unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in the state of the normal separation position. In b), the back-rear left movable effect unit, the back-rear right movable effect unit, the back-rear left slide unit, and the back-rear right slide unit move the back-rear left movable decorative unit and the back-rear right movable decorative unit to the approaching position. It is a front view which shows in the state.

The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are arranged symmetrically with an axis extending vertically as a boundary. Under normal conditions, the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 are movable back-rear left by the back-rear left slide unit 3460 and the back-rear right slide unit 3560, as shown in FIG. 194 (a). The decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are in the separated positions, respectively.

In the normal state, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are positioned at separate positions by the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560. The rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are separated from each other, and the display of the main effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side between them is displayed. The screen forms a square space facing forward (see FIG. 135 and the like).

In this normal state, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 and the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 are in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction. Through the frame formed by the back rear left unit base 3461 and the back rear right unit base 3651, the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side is displayed in good condition in front (player side). ), And the left and right sides of the main effect display device 1600 can be decorated with the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 to improve the appearance.

From the normal state, by driving the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 in the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right When the movable decorative body unit 3501 is moved from the separated position to the approaching position, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are brought into close contact with each other (see FIG. 194 (b)).

When the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are moved to the approaching positions, a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are provided respectively. However, on the front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the state is such that they are lined up on the circumference of the same radius, and by blocking the effect image of the main effect display device 1600, the player's interest is turned left behind. It can be attracted to the body 3410 and the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3510.

[5-9 g. Back and back movable production unit]
Next, the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back-back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear-upward movable effect unit in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit, disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front together with the swivel table. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-rear-upward movable production unit in a unit for each main configuration and looked at from the back together with a swivel table.

The back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper front surface of the swivel table 3380 in the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300. The back-rear-upward movable effect unit 3600 is a flat plate-shaped slide plate 3610 that is vertically movable between a pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 on the upper side of the through hole 3382 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the swivel table 3380. And a pair of spur gear-shaped slide gears 3620 that are rotatably attached to the rear surfaces of the slide plate 3610 near both left and right ends and mesh with a pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 of the swivel table 3380. The slide frame 3630 and the slide frame 3630 are provided with a pair of vertically extending movable rack gears 3631 that are meshed with the slide gear 3620, respectively, and are attached to the front surface of the slide plate 3610 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The sub-effect display device 3640, which is attached and capable of displaying the effect image, and the slide plate 3610, which are attached to the outside of the pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the swivel table 3380, move the slide plate 3610 in the vertical direction. It includes a pair of back-back-up-up slide drive units 3650.

The slide plate 3610 is arranged apart from each other on the left and right, penetrates back and forth, and extends vertically, and is paired with a pair of plate side guide slits 3611 into which the guide boss 3387 of the swivel table 3380 is slidably inserted. Multiple (four) guide pins 3612 protruding forward in a columnar shape from positions separated vertically from the positions separated vertically on both outer sides of the plate-side guide slit 3611, and upper and lower on both outer sides in the left-right direction of the plurality of guide pins 3612, respectively. It includes a pair of drive rack gears 3613 extending to the left side, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3614 projecting to the left of the drive rack gear 3613 on the left side in the front view. The slide plate 3610 is slidably attached to the swivel table 3380 in the vertical direction by inserting the guide boss 3387 of the swivel table 3380 into the plate side guide slit 3611. The drive rack gear 3613 is formed so that the gear teeth project forward.

The slide plate 3610 is bent like a crank in a plan view so that the portion of the drive rack gear 3613 protrudes forward. The slide plate 3610 has a rear surface portion behind the drive rack gear 3613 that protrudes forward from the inner general surface, and extends the slide gear 3620 to the front and rear of a portion that is partially bent like a crank. It is rotatably attached around the axis extending back and forth so that it is exposed from the sloping part to the front side (inside).

The slide frame 3630 is formed near both left and right ends on the rear surface, and extends back and forth between a pair of movable rack gears 3631 extending up and down and a pair of movable rack gears 3631 that mesh with the slide gears 3620 in the left-right direction. It also includes a frame-side guide slit 3632, which extends vertically and into which the guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is slidably inserted. The slide frame 3630 is formed in a box shape for accommodating the sub-effect display device 3640, and has an opening 3633 in which the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 faces forward and a transparent portion that decorates the outer periphery of the opening 3633. It is provided with a back-rear upper frame-shaped decorative body 3634 having light property, and a back-rear upper frame-shaped decorative board 3635 which is arranged on the rear side of the back-rear upper frame-shaped decorative body 3634 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing.

The pair of movable rack gears 3631 of the slide frame 3630 are formed so that the gear teeth project outward in the left-right direction. The pair of movable rack gears 3631 are formed so as to face the fixed rack gear 3386 of the swivel table 3380 in the assembled state, and mesh with a portion of the slide gear 3620 exposed to the front side of the slide plate 3610. do. Further, the slide frame 3630 is slidably attached to the slide plate 3610 in the vertical direction by inserting the guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 into the frame side guide slit 3632.

The sub-effect display device 3640 is a 7-inch full-color liquid crystal display device having a smaller display screen than the main effect display device 1600.

The rear rear upper slide drive unit 3650 is a motor bracket 3651 attached to both lateral sides of a pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the swivel table 3380, and side surfaces of the motor bracket 3651 facing outward in the lateral direction. The slide plate 3610 is attached to the rotating shafts of the back-rear upper drive motor 3652 and the back-rear upper drive motor 3652, in which the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction penetrates the motor bracket 3651 and protrudes inward. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3653 that meshes with the drive rack gear 3613 of the above, and a motor cover 3654 that is attached to the front surface of the swivel table 3380 so as to cover the front side of the motor bracket 3651 and the back rear upper drive motor 3652.

Further, of the pair of back-rear-upper slide drive units 3650, the back-rear-upper slide drive unit 3650 on the left side of the front view includes a slide detection sensor 3655 that detects the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610. The slide detection sensor 3655 is attached to the motor bracket 3651. By detecting the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655, the slide position of the sub-effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630 can be detected.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-back-upward movable effect unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the sub-effect display device is set to the retracted position farthest from the turning center in the back-rear-upward movable effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which made it a position by the schematic structure, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the state which made the sub-effect display device the most prominent protruding position to the turning center by the schematic structure. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view of the swivel table side of the back-rear movable effect unit showing the sub-effect display device of the back-rear upper movable effect unit in the normal retracted position, and FIG. 197 (b) is the sub-effect display device. It is a front view of the swivel table side in the back-rear movable production unit which shows the state which is the protruding position.

In the normal state, the back-rear-upward movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is in the retracted position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is most raised (farthest from the turning center of the turning table 3380) (FIG. 196). (A) and FIG. 197 (a) and the like). In this retracted position, the drive gear 3653 of the back-rear-upper slide drive unit 3650 is engaged near the lower ends of the pair of drive rack gears 3613 of the slide plate 3610. Further, in this state, the pair of slide gears 3620 rotatably attached to the slide plate 3610 are located near the upper end of the fixed side rack gear 3386 on the swivel table 3380 and near the lower end of the movable side rack gear 3631 on the slide frame 3630. , Each is in mesh.

Further, in the retracted position, the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3655 provided in the back rear upper slide drive unit 3650 on the left side. In this retracted position, as shown in the figure, a part of the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) protrudes outward from the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380 in the front view.

Further, in the retracted position, the guide boss 3387 of the swivel table 3380 is in contact with the lower end of the plate side guide slit 3611 in the slide plate 3610, and below the frame side guide slit 3632 in the slide frame 3630. The guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is in contact with the end on the side. As a result, further sliding (movement) of the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) upward is restricted.

In this retracted position, when the drive gear 3653 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the pair of back-rear-upward drive motors 3652, the slide plate 3610 is moved by the drive rack gear 3613 that meshes with the drive gear 3653. Slide downward (to approach the center of the swivel table 3380). When the slide plate 3610 slides downward, the pair of slide gears 3620 attached to the slide plate 3610 also slide (move) downward together. At this time, since the fixed side rack gear 3386 of the swivel table 3380 is meshed with the pair of slide gears 3620 from the outside in the left-right direction, when the center of the slide gear 3620 slides downward, the meshed fixed side The rack gears 3386 rotate the slide gears 3620 (the slide gear 3620 on the left side in the front view is in the clockwise direction, and the slide gear 3620 on the right side in the front view is in the counterclockwise direction).

In each of these pair of slide gears 3620, the movable rack gear 3631 of the slide frame 3630 is engaged from the side opposite to the fixed rack gear 3386, so that the slide plate 3610 slides downward on the left side in the front view. When the slide gear 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction and the slide gear 3620 on the right side of the front view rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the slide frame 3630 is moved by the movable rack gear 3631 meshing with each slide gear 3620. It will slide downward at twice the speed of the slide plate 3610. In other words, the slide frame 3630 slides downward by twice the slide distance of the slide plate 3610. Since the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached to the slide frame 3630, the sub-effect display device 3640 slides downward (on the swivel center side of the swivel table 3380) together with the slide frame 3630.

When the slide frame 3630 slides downward via the slide plate 3610 by the pair of back-rear-upward drive motors 3652, the portion located outside the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380 in the front view becomes the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380. The slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) slides into the through-hole 3382 of the swivel table 3380 in front view (see FIG. 196 (b)).

Then, when the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is in the protruding position (close to the turning center of the turning table 3380) at the lowest position, the driving of the pair of back-rear-up driving motors 3652 is stopped ( (See FIG. 196 (c) and FIG. 197 (b)). In this protruding position, substantially the entire display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630 is located in the through hole 3382 of the swivel table 3380 in the front view. Further, in the protruding position, the guide boss 3387 of the swivel table 3380 is in contact with the upper end of the plate side guide slit 3611 in the slide plate 3610, and the upper end of the frame side guide slit 3632 in the slide frame 3630. The guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is in contact with the portion. As a result, further slide (movement) of the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) downward is restricted.

In order to return from the protruding position to the retracted position, a pair of back-rear-upward drive motors 3652 rotate each drive gear 3653 in the direction opposite to the above, and the slide frame is passed through the slide plate 3610. The 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) can be slid upward, and the drive of the pair of back-rear-upward drive motors 3652 is stopped based on the detection of the detection piece 3641 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655. It can be returned to the retracted position.

The back / rear / upper movable effect unit 3600 can stop the sub effect display device 3640 at an arbitrary position between the retracted position and the protruding position by the pair of back / rear / upper drive motors 3652.

In this way, the back / rear / upper movable effect unit 3600 approaches the sub-effect display device 3640, which has a smaller display screen than the main effect display device 1600, to the retreat position and the turning center away from the center (turning center) of the turning table 3380. It can be slid to and from the protruding position. In other words, the back-rear-upward movable effect unit 3600 places the sub-effect display device 3640 between a position outside the main effect display device 1600 (backward position) and a front side (protruding position) of the main effect display device 1600. Because it can be moved with, the effect image (main effect image) by the main effect display device 1600 can be made to stand out, or the effect image (sub effect image) by the sub effect display device 3640 can be made to stand out according to the slide position of the sub effect display device 3640. ) Can be made to stand out, and the main effect image and the sub effect image can be entertained for the player.

[5-9g-1. Production by the back-rear center movable production unit and the back-rear upper movable production unit]
Next, with respect to the effect (movable effect) using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back-rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, mainly with reference to FIGS. 198 to 201. Will be explained in detail. FIG. 198 is a front view of a back-rear movable effect unit showing a state in which the sub-effect display device is in a swivelable position at the first swivel position in a schematic configuration. FIG. 199 is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit showing the movable range of the sub-effect display device at the first turning position in a schematic configuration. FIG. 200 is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit showing the movable range of the sub-effect display device at the second turning position in a schematic configuration. FIG. 201 is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit showing the movable range of the sub-effect display device at the third turning position in a schematic configuration.

The sub-effect display device 3640 of the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back-rear movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the swivel table 3380 of the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350, and the swivel table 3380 is attached to the swivel table 3380 passing through the swivel center. It is possible to slide between the retracted position away from the center of the swivel (center of swivel) and the protruding position close to the center of swivel. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, a part of the slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached is located outside the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380 in the front view. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the protruding position, the entire slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached is located inside the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380 in the front view, and the sub-effect display device is located inside. The 3640 is located inside the opening 3361b of the unit base 3361.

The back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 is a range (turning regulation range) between the rearward position and the position where the outer circumference of the slide frame 3630 of the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 coincides with the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380 in the front view. ), The swivel range of the swivel table 3380 is restricted (see FIG. 198). In the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350, the turning position where the turning range of the turning table 3380 is regulated is the first turning position where the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 (sub-effect display device 3640) is located directly above the turning center. The second turning position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is located just to the right of the turning center (the position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned at an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the first turning position), and the sub-effect just below the turning center. It is provided with three turning positions: a third turning position where the display device 3640 is located (a position where the display device 3640 is turned at an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the front view). The sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) can slide to the retracted position (within the turning regulation range) only when it is located at any of the three turning positions by turning the turning table 3380.

Further, when the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 is within the range (swivelable range) between the position where the outer circumference of the slide frame 3630 coincides with the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380 in the front view and the protruding position. , The regulation of the turning range of the turning table 3380 is lifted, and the turning table 3380 (sub-effect display device 3640) can freely turn between the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position. Yes (see Figure 198).

Under normal conditions, the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is located at the first turning position directly above the turning center of the turning table 3380 by the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350, and the sub-effect display device 3640 is set. , It is located in a retracted position away from the turning center by the back-back-upward slide drive unit 3650 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

In this normal state, since the slide frame 3630 is located within the turning regulation range, the turning range of the sub-effect display device 3640 (swing table 3380) is ± by the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. It is regulated to be able to turn only within the range of the turning angle of 5 degrees (see FIG. 199). Further, in the state of the first turning position, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be slid up and down between the retracted position and the protruding position. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position in this first turning position, the upper half of the opening 3361b (main effect display device 1600) can be covered, and the sub-effect display device 3640 can be covered. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image displayed on the screen.

At the second turning position, which is turned clockwise from the first turning position at a turning angle of 90 degrees, as shown in FIG. 200, the sub-effect display device 3640 is located to the right of the turning center, and the opening is open. It is in a state of extending vertically on the right side of 3361b (main effect display device 1600). When the slide frame 3630 is slid into the swivel regulation range on the retracted position side at the second swivel position, the sub-effect display device 3640 (swivel table 3380) is swiveled by the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. It becomes impossible. In this second turning position state, by setting the sub-effect display device 3640 to the retracted position, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be expanded to the right by the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640. , It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image by the wide screen.

At the third turning position, which is turned clockwise from the second turning position at a turning angle of 90 degrees, as shown in FIG. 201, the sub-effect display device 3640 is located directly below the turning center, and the display thereof. The screen is extended to the left and right. When the slide frame 3630 is slid into the swivel regulation range on the retracted position side at the third swivel position, the sub-effect display device 3640 (swivel table 3380) is moved by the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. It is regulated to be able to turn only within the turning angle of ± 7 degrees. By reciprocating the swivel table 3380 within this swivel angle range, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be swung left and right, and the player can enjoy the physically swirling effect image. can. Further, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position in the state of the third turning position, the lower half of the opening 3361b (main effect display device 1600) can be covered, and the sub-effect display device can be covered. The effect image displayed on the 3640 can be entertained by the player.

In this way, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be moved to various positions around the swivel center of the swivel table 3380 by the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600. The movement of the effect display device 3640 can be entertained by the player.

[5-9h. Back and bottom movable production unit]
Next, the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable effect unit in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit, and FIG. 202 (b) is a back-rear-lower movable effect unit in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit. Is a perspective view seen from behind. The back rear lower movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower front portion of the swivel table 3380 in the back rear central movable effect unit 3350 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300.

The back-rear movable production unit 3700 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the swivel table 3380, and has a unit body 3701 having a translucent geometric pattern decoration on the front surface and a center of the unit body 3701 in the left-right direction. It is attached to the rear surface, and the rotating shaft is attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear lower drive motor 3702 and the back rear lower drive motor 3702, whose rotating shaft penetrates the unit body 3701 and protrudes forward, and the outer shape is spur gear-shaped. The back rear lower rotating decorative body 3703 formed in, the back rear lower decorative board 3704 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 3701, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back rear lower decorative board 3704. A board cover 3705 attached to the unit main body 3701 so as to cover the rear side of the central portion in the left-right direction of the unit is provided.

The unit main body 3701 of the back-rear movable effect unit 3700 is composed of an arc along the outer circumference of the swivel table 3380 and a string connecting both ends of the arc. The unit main body 3701 has a circularly recessed decoration in the center in the left-right direction, and star-shaped decorations are formed on both the left and right sides and near the left and right ends thereof. The back-rear lower rotation decoration 3703 is housed in a circular recess in the center of the unit main body 3701, and is rotated around an axis extending back and forth through the center of the back-rear lower drive motor 3702.

The back rear lower decorative substrate 3704 can illuminate the front surface of the unit main body 3701 and the back rear lower rotating decorative body 3703 by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

According to the back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700, the back-rear lower rotation decoration body 3703 can be rotated by the back-rear lower drive motor 3702. At this time, when the LED of the back rear lower decorative substrate 3704 is appropriately made to emit light, the outer shape of the back rear lower rotating decorative body 3703 is formed in a gear shape, so that the light from the rear is blocked by the tooth portion of the gear. It can be made to appear to be blinking by passing through or passing through, and the player's interest can be attracted to the back-back lower rotating decoration 3703.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 206 to 211. FIG. 203 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-up first rotation decoration body and the back-up second rotation decoration body of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the descending position. FIG. 204 shows the back rear left movable effect unit, the back rear right movable effect unit, the back rear left movable decorative unit, and the back rear right movable decoration with the swivel table in the back rear movable effect unit in the first turning position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the body unit was moved from the detached position to the approaching position. FIG. 205 shows the back rear left movable effect unit, the back rear right movable effect unit, the back rear left movable decorative unit, and the back rear right movable decoration with the swivel table in the back rear movable effect unit in the third turning position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the body unit was moved from the detached position to the approaching position. FIG. 206 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sub-effect display device in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit is moved to the protruding position in the normal first turning position. FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sub-effect display device in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit is swiveled from the first swivel position to the second swivel position in the protruding position. FIG. 208 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sub-effect display device is moved from the state of FIG. 207 to the retracted position.

Further, FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sub-effect display device in the back-rear movable effect unit of the back unit is moved from the second turning position to the third turning position in the protruding position. FIG. 210 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sub-effect display device is moved from the state of FIG. 209 to the retracted position. FIG. 211 shows the back-rear left-rotating decorative body and the back-rear-right rotation in the back-rear left movable decorative unit and the back-rear right movable decorative unit of the back-rear left movable effect unit and the back-rear right movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 205. While putting the decorative body in the state of the third effect position, the back upper first rotation decoration body and the back upper second rotation decoration body of the back upper movable production unit are moved to the lower position to move the back upper first rotation decoration body and the back side upper rotation decoration body and the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the upper second rotation decoration body is rotated.

Under normal conditions, the game board 5 is decorated on the back front of the back unit 3000 through a transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) on the outside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 as shown in FIGS. 129 and 135. The decoration of unit 3100 is visible. Further, within the frame (inside) of the center accessory 2500, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side (front).

Further, in the normal state, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 in the back-up movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is in the raised position, and the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Then, on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 in the back-up movable effect unit 3200, the back-up first rotating decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decoration body 3233 can be seen.

Further, in a normal state, the swivel table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is in the state of the first turning position, and the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and The back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are in a state of being separated from the turning center of the swivel table 3380, respectively. Therefore, through the frame of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 of the back-rear left movable production unit 3400 can be seen on the left side of the main effect display device 1600, and the right side of the main effect display device 1600. A plurality of back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 of the back-rear right movable production unit 3500 can be seen. The back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 of the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 respectively have the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3511a forward. It is in the state of the first production position toward.

Further, in a normal state, the back-rear movable effect unit 3700 of the back-rear movable effect unit 3300 located behind the stage 2530 can be seen through the transparent center accessory 2500 and the transparent panel plate 1110. In this normal state, the sub-effect display device 3640 in the back-rear-upward movable effect unit 3600 of the back-rear movable effect unit 3300 is located at the retracted position, and the logo decoration unit of the center accessory 2500 arranged on the front side. It is hidden by 2550 and is invisible.

The game board 5 is a back front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 3100, back-up movable production unit 3200, back-back center movable production unit 3350, back-back left movable production unit 3400, back-back right movable production unit 3500, back-back upper movable production unit The 3600 and the back / rear / lower movable effect unit 3700 perform a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 135, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body With the 3233 located on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, the first LED 3234a of the back upper decoration substrate 3234 is appropriately emitted to emit light, and the back upper first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back upper second rotation decoration are appropriately emitted. When the body 3233 is light-emittingly decorated, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233, and the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up Attention can be paid to the upper right corner of the game area 5a where the second rotating decorative body 3233 is located. As a result, the player is made to think that there may be something good in the area on the right side in the game area 5a, and the game ball is hit so that the game ball is distributed on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to promote the driving operation (so-called right-handed hitting) and enjoy the driving operation of the game ball.

Further, as an effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3200, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by the drive of the back-up elevating drive motor 3213, and the back-up first rotation decorative body 3232 And the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 is moved from the ascending position on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 on the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 to the descending position on the front surface of the main effect display device 1600 in the center of the game area 5a ( See FIG. 203). As a result, the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back-up second rotating decorative body 3233 having a variable polygonal outer shape are located substantially in the center of the front side of the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600. Since the effect image displayed on the screen is blocked, it is possible to make the effect stand out from the player side, and it is possible to perform an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

Then, in this state, when the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the back-up rotation drive motor 3235, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 is arranged on the front side of the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232. The second rotating decorative body 3233 revolves in the counterclockwise direction around the first shaft portion 3232a while rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and is arranged behind the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side. It is possible to show a movable effect in which the plurality of back-up haunting decorative bodies 3246 project to the outside of the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232 at different timings. As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that swirls and scatters stars, which can give a strong impact to the player and is good for the player. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

At this time, by appropriately causing the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back-up decorative substrate 3234 to emit light, the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body 3233 glitter and the back-top infestation decoration. It is possible to show the effect that the body 3246 (appearance decoration portion 3246b) scatters while shining, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted.

Subsequently, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300, for example, in a normal state, the back rear left Back rear left slide unit 3460 and back rear right slide unit 3560 in the movable production unit 3400 and the back rear right movable production unit 3500 by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566. When the unit 3401 and the back-rear right movable decoration unit 3501 are moved to the approaching positions close to the turning center of the swivel table 3380, respectively, as shown in FIG. 204, the back-rear left movable decoration is formed in an arc shape. The body unit 3401 and the back-right movable decorative body unit 3501 are located on the front side near both the left and right ends of the main effect display device 1600, and the player is provided with an effect that covers the left side and the right side of the main effect display device 1600. I can show you.

In this state, on the front surface of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, a part of the annulus is formed by the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 arranged on the left and right. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can pay attention to the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501. Further, in this state, the central portion of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 faces forward in a circular shape from between the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 arranged side by side. The rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 can be used to entertain the effect image framed in a circle.

Further, in this state, although not shown, a plurality of back-rear left rotations are performed by the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right drive motor 3531 in the back-rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back-rear right movable decoration unit 3501. The second decorative portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b of the decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-handed rotating decorative body 3510 from the first effect position in which the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3511a are directed forward, respectively. Is appropriately rotated to the second effect position facing forward, or to the third effect position facing forward, respectively, the third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c (see FIG. 189). As a result, the decoration modes of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 are changed, so that a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the swivel table 3380 is set as the third turning position, and the back rear upper movable effect is produced. With the sub-effect display device 3640 of the unit 3600 in the retracted position, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are moved to close positions close to the turning center of the swivel table 3380, respectively. (See FIG. 205). In this state, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 is below the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 that cover the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. positioned. As a result, even if both the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are covered by the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501, the sub effect display arranged below the back rear left movable decorative unit unit 3501. The decrease in the display area can be compensated for by the display screen of the device 3640, and the decorations of the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 and the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 are produced. The effect of the image can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Even in the state of FIG. 205, the player can change the decoration by rotating the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 by the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right drive motor 3531. Can be entertained.

Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the swivel table 3380 is set as the third turning position, and the back rear upper movable effect is produced. With the sub-effect display device 3640 of the unit 3600 in the retracted position (state in FIG. 208), the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are approached to the turning center of the swivel table 3380, respectively. Move to the approaching position. Although not shown, in this state, the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 formed in an arc shape is located below the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, which is above the center of the main effect display device 1600. At the same time, the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 which is also formed in an arc shape is located above the stage 2530, which is lower than the center of the main effect display device 1600, and is in a state of being located above the stage 2530. It is possible to show the player an effect that covers the upper side and the lower side of the.

In this state, on the front surface of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, a part of the annulus is formed by the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 arranged vertically. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can pay attention to the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501. Further, in this state, the central portion of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 faces forward in a circular shape from between the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 arranged vertically. The rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 can be used to entertain the effect image framed in a circle.

Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, although not shown, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear By moving only one of the right movable decorative unit 3501 from the separated position to the approaching position, it is possible to show the player an effect that covers only one side of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. .. As a result, various effects can be presented to the player by appropriately selecting the back-rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back-rear right movable decorative unit 3501 to be moved between the separated position and the approaching position. , It is possible to entertain the game by making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Subsequently, as an effect using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back-rear movable effect unit 3300, for example, the swivel table 3380 is set as the first swivel position and the sub-effect display device. In the normal state with the 3640 in the retracted position, the back-rear-upward drive motors 3652 provided in the pair of back-rear-upward slide drive units 3650 in the back-rear-upward movable production unit 3600 each place the drive gears 3653 on the right side. When the slide frame 3630 is rotated clockwise in the visual direction and the slide frame 3630 is slid through the slide plate 3610 from the retracted position away from the turning center of the turning table 3380 to the protruding position close to the turning center, the slide frame 3630 and the slide frame 3630 are obtained. Together, the sub-effect display device 3640 moves to the protruding position (downward).

At this time, the sub-effect display device 3640, which was hidden behind the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 in the retracted position, gradually moves downward from the lower end of the logo decoration unit 2550 from the player side. By stopping at the protruding position, the upper half of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side is covered (see FIG. 206). As a result, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be made visible from the player side, and the player's interest is focused on the effect image (sub-effect image) displayed on the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640. It is possible to perform an effect that can be attracted.

As a result, a sub-effect display device 3640 different from the main effect display device 1600 appears, which makes the player think that an important effect image is displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640. It is possible to entertain the effect image displayed on the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640. In addition, the appearance of the sub-effect display device 3640 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest.

When the sub-effect display device 3640 is being moved from the retracted position to the protruding position or moved to the protruding position at the first turning position, the back-rear turning drive motor 3370 of the fixed side unit 3360 in the back-rear central movable production unit 3350 causes the sub-effect display device 3640 to move. The swivel table 3380 may be reciprocated within a range of a predetermined swivel angle. As a result, the sub-effect display device 3640 that can be seen from the player side swings left and right by reciprocating, and the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640 physically swings. The production can be shown to the player. As a result, since the sub-effect display device 3640 is swaying together with the displayed effect image, the movement of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. At this time, by swinging the sub-effect display device 3640 so as to be related to the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, the player can be further entertained, and the interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, as an effect using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600, the slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached is swiveled by a pair of back-rear upper drive motors 3652. The swivel table 3380 is rotated 90 degrees to the second swivel position in the front-view clockwise direction by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 while being positioned within the possible range (see FIG. 207). As a result, the sub-effect display device 3640 visible under the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 turns around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). Can be shown to the player.

By turning the sub-effect display device 3640 located within the swivel range from the first turning position to the second turning position, the horizontally long sub-effect display device 3640 becomes vertically long, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the right half of the display screen is covered, the player can entertain the change in the orientation of the sub-effect display device 3640. At this time, if the sub-effect display device 3640 is swiveled while, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as the effect image on the display screen of the sub-effect display means, the character moves (turns) together with the sub-effect display device 3640. ) The effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. Further, by moving (turning) the character (sub-effect display device 3640), it is possible to make the player think that the game state shifts to another stage (for example, it develops from the normal reach effect). , It is possible to raise the expectation for the next state and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

After turning the sub-effect display device 3640 to the second turning position, the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) located within the swivel range is moved to the retracted position by the pair of back-rear-upward drive motors 3652. Then, the sub-effect display devices 3640 are lined up on the right side of the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 208). As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect using the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide the player with a lot of information about the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. .. Alternatively, by displaying the effect images constituting one image by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is expanded to the right. Can be shown to the player, and the wide screen extending to the left and right allows you to enjoy a powerful production image.

Further, in the state where the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the second turning position and the backward position, as shown in FIG. 208, the sub-effect display device 3640 is located near the right end of the game area 5a, and thus is centered. The sub-effect display device 3640 can be suitably used for displaying an effect image that prompts the operation of driving the game ball so that the game ball is distributed on the right side of the accessory 2500, and the operation of driving the game ball by the player. Can be entertained.

Further, as an effect using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600, the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached by the pair of back-rear upper drive motors 3652 in the state of the second turning position. With the slide frame 3630 positioned within the swivel range, the swivel table 3380 is rotated 90 degrees to the third swivel position in the front-view clockwise direction by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 (see FIG. 209). ). As a result, the sub-effect display device 3640 that covers the right side of the main effect display device 1600 shows the player an effect of turning around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). be able to.

By turning the sub-effect display device 3640 located within the swivel range from the second turn position to the third turn position, the vertically long sub-effect display device 3640 is in a horizontally long state, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the lower half of the display screen is covered, the player can entertain the change in the orientation of the sub-effect display device 3640. At this time, if the sub-effect display device 3640 is swiveled while, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as the effect image on the display screen of the sub-effect display means, the character moves (turns) together with the sub-effect display device 3640. ) The effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. Further, by moving (turning) the character (sub-effect display device 3640), it is possible to make the player think that the game state shifts to another stage (for example, it develops from the normal reach effect). , It is possible to raise the expectation for the next state and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

After the sub-effect display device 3640 is swiveled to the third swivel position, the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) located within the swivel range is moved to the retracted position by the pair of back-rear-upward drive motors 3652. Then, the sub-effect display devices 3640 are lined up under the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 210). As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect using the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 arranged vertically. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide the player with a lot of information about the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. .. Alternatively, by displaying the effect images constituting one image by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, the effect image as if the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is expanded downward can be displayed. It can be shown to the player, and the vertically long screen that extends vertically allows you to enjoy a powerful production image.

When the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the third turning position and in the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 210, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 is displayed after the stage 2530 through the transparent center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 1110. You can see it on the side. Therefore, by displaying an effect image pointing to the stage 2530 or the first start port 2002 on the sub effect display device 3640 according to the game state, the player can see the game ball aiming at the first start port 2002. It is possible to encourage the driving operation and entertain the driving operation of the game ball.

Further, at the third turning position, the turning table 3380 may be reciprocally rotated within a predetermined turning angle range by the back-back turning drive motor 3370 of the fixed-side unit 3360 in the back-back central movable effect unit 3350. As a result, the sub-effect display device 3640 that can be seen under the main effect display device 1600 swings left and right by reciprocating, and the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640 physically swings. It is possible to show the player the effect to be performed. As a result, since the sub-effect display device 3640 is swaying together with the displayed effect image, the movement of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed, and the sub-effect display device 3640 is located in front of the sub-effect display device 3640. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the starting port 2002. At this time, by swinging the sub-effect display device 3640 so as to be related to the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, the player can be further entertained, and the interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

As an effect using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600, although not shown, in addition to the above, from the first turning position to the third turning position at the second turning position. The sub-effect display device 3640 may be turned without stopping. Alternatively, the sub-effect display device 3640 may be swiveled in an appropriate direction between any of the first swivel position, the second swivel position, and the third swivel position, and the sub-effect display device 3640 may be swiveled at any position. It may be appropriately moved between the retracted position away from the center and the protruding position close to the turning center. In this way, by using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be moved to various positions and various movements can be made. , Various effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Subsequently, as an effect using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700, for example, with the swivel table 3380 in the first turning position, the back of the back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700. When the back rear lower rotation decoration 3703 is rotated by the rear lower drive motor 3702, the player can see the back rear lower rotation decoration 3703 that can be seen behind the stage 2530 through the transparent center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 1110. (See Fig. 206, etc.). As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the rotating back-rear lower-rotating decorative body 3703, so that the player can also see the center accessory 2500 on the stage 2530 and the first starting port 2002 on the front side. It is possible to attract the attention of the player, to encourage the player to drive the game ball aiming at the first starting port 2002, and to entertain the driving operation of the game ball.

Further, when the back rear lower rotation decorative body 3703 is rotated by the back rear lower drive motor 3702 of the back rear lower movable production unit 3700 with the swivel table 3380 in the second turning position, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 The player can be shown the effect of rotating the back-back lower rotating ornament 3703, which is visible above the warp entrance 2520, through the transparent center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 1110 (see FIGS. 207 and 208). As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the rotating back-rear lower rotating decoration body 3703, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can be attracted to the player. On the other hand, the game ball can be urged to hit left through the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the driving operation of the game ball can be enjoyed.

Subsequently, as an effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 and the back-back movable effect unit 3300, for example, the turning table 3380 is placed at the third turning position and the sub-effect display device of the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600. With the 3640 in the retracted position, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are moved to close positions close to the turning center of the swivel table 3380, and then the back rear left movable. The third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c face the front of the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 of the decorative body unit 3401 and the back-back right movable decorative body unit 3501, respectively. While rotating to the state of the three effect positions, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 of the back-up movable effect unit 3200 is moved from the ascending position to the descending position to move the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-up second rotation decoration body. Rotate the 3233 (see FIG. 211).

As a result, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be moved to the back rear left of the back upper movable effect unit 3200, the back upper first rotation decorative body 3232, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500. It is covered by the decorative unit 3401 and the back-right movable decorative unit 3501, which can strongly attract the player's attention to the center of the game area 5a and display the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. By covering it, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good (for example, the start of a "big hit" game), and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 211, the back-up first rotating decorative body 3232, the back-back left movable decorative body unit 3401, and the back-back right movable decorative body unit 3501 covering the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. Since the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 faces forward on the lower side, the effect image of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be shown even if the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 cannot be seen. Can also entertain the player.

As an effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 and the back-back movable effect unit 3300, in FIG. 211, the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated to the third effect position. However, it can be in the state of being in the first effect position or in the state of being rotated to the second effect position. By appropriately selecting the position, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of production.

Further, as an effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 and the back-back movable effect unit 3300, FIG. 211 shows the state of the swivel table 3380 in the third swivel position, but the first swivel position or the second swivel position or the second. It can also be in a turning position, and various patterns can be shown to the player.

As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decorative unit 3100, the back top movable effect unit 3200, and the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300, It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700. By combining them appropriately, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, a door frame side effect display device 460 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511, and a main effect. It includes a display device 1600 and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the sub effect display device 3640. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by rotating the handle 302.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first start port sensor 3102 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3101 that detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and the large that detects the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005. The first entrance sensor 2404 that detects the game ball received in the first entrance 2007 after being detected by the winning opening sensor 2403 and the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the second entrance after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403. Detection signals from the second inlet sensor 2405 that detects the game ball received in 2008, the magnetic sensor 3103 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively. Will be done.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals to the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the V winning port solenoid 2416. The drive signal can be output, and the status display 1401, normal symbol display 1402, normal hold display 1403, first special symbol display 1404, and first special hold number display of the function display unit 1400 can be output from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to the device 1405, the second special symbol display 1406, the second special hold number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3102, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet sensor 2405 are not included. While the contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3101. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3102 and the second start port sensor 2402, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3102, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving The detection of the game ball by the entrance sensor 2404 and the second entrance sensor 2405 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet sensor 2405 also use proximity switches having high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3101 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3101 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 255 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. The 803, the ball guidance unit 820, and the ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. NS.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 of the foul cover unit 270 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage 831d and the payout passage 832d of the payout device 830 to indicate that the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate), and a number is displayed. When "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" (specifically, a defect has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 270 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). , When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "7" is displayed. When "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330, and this signal. Is input to and displayed on the ball loan return display unit 330.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. It is provided with a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 255 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 300, a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 302, and a single-shot button that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the operation sensor 312 is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game region 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 302. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is balled. One ball is received in the sending unit 250, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launching device 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 255 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a door frame side effect based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes a display device 460, a main effect display device 1600, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub effect display device 3640.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive drive the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. The game board side drive data for transmitting to the board 3033 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board. Door-side drive data for transmitting to one effect drive board 3032 and second effect drive board 3033, and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3, and a door frame. For the frame decoration drive board, the door side drive light emission data composed of the door side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each of the decorative boards of 3 and the door side drive light emission data. Display control of control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. In addition to transmitting data from the unit serial I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various movable effect units provided on the game board 5 are the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is input to the peripheral control MPU via. Further, the detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 440 of the effect operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and makes various effects from the upper speaker 573 and the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control so that the combined music and sound effects flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the upper speaker 573 on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the movable body drive command and the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 output a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LEDs of the respective decorative boards provided in the door frame 3. , A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received lighting / blinking command on the game board side is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 send a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3 and each drive motor provided in the game board 5. And so on.

[6-4. Production display control unit]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. Display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 ( (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various screen data displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, and an image ROM that is stored in this image ROM. It is equipped with an image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display a door frame side effect display device. Drawing control is performed on the 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes control data (display) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. A plurality of schedule data corresponding to the command), the control data (display command) and the corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and the order of the screens drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Is stipulated. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data displays screen data drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub-effect display device 3640 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which various data are transferred is specified in.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the door frame side effect display device 460, main effect display device 1600, And the drawing data to be displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub-effect display device 3640. Further, when the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP displays an executing signal to that effect. Output to. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" is a line buffer that holds drawing data for one line that draws the left and right directions of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, and this line. This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one line held in the buffer to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This will affect the speed of drawing on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. For example, when displaying various characters on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, the data for drawing each person is referred to as "sprite". Call. As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites") is set, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect. It is drawn on the display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a length of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a main scan and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting one direction thereof. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, the door frame side effect is performed as the main scan. When viewed from the front of the display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, outputs are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is drawn. Is input, based on the drawing data for the next line, the main scanning is from left to right when viewed from the front of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. The data is sequentially output to the pixels for one line.

[7. Game content]
Next, the content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, that is, a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top. Will be done. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central top of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the top is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 are the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and so on.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the left shelf portion 2202 of the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is closed. Is in the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. NS.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball drawn by the "normal hit" at the gate portion 2003 will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " "Medium hit", "Small hit", "Probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit", "Character hit (V winning opening (first entrance 2007) can accept game balls" A lottery will be held for the results of the special lottery that will generate "hits)", etc. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". "15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second jackpot (for example, per accessory)", etc. be.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of games are played from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout control board 951. The ball is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where a game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "per character", the first entrance 2007 for a predetermined time after the large winning opening 2005 makes it possible to accept the game ball in a predetermined pattern. When the game ball is accepted into the (V winning opening) and the game ball is received at the first entrance 2007, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. NS. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the main effect display device 1600 (or the sub effect display device 3640). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the main effect display device 1600 (sub effect display device 3640), the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the main effect display device 1600 is a pattern in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is changed to display the patterns in a variable manner. The rows are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three design rows is stopped and displayed so that the designs of the three design rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the result of the special lottery.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 (No. 3) in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. (2) Production operation unit 400A, 3rd production operation unit 400B, etc.) Operation button 410, door frame side production display device 460 (door frame side 2nd production display device 460A, decorative rotating body unit 530, etc.), back unit 3000 Back front decoration unit 3100, back top movable production unit 3200, back rear movable production unit 3350, back rear center movable production unit 3350, back rear left movable production unit 3400, back rear right movable production unit 3500, back rear upper movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3600, the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to prevent a person's interest in the game from diminishing.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The main effect display device 1600 in the present embodiment uses the effect display means of the present invention as a guide pin 3363 of the unit base 3361 of the fixed side unit 3360 in the back rear central movable effect unit 3350 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment. The slide frame 3630 of the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 is used as the turning control means of the present invention, the guide bush 3364 and the guide roller 3365 in the present embodiment are used as the guide roller of the present invention, and the back-back turning drive motor 3370 in the present embodiment is used. Each corresponds to the turning drive means of the present invention.

Further, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment are back rear left. The rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are used for the decorative body of the present invention, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 in the present embodiment are used for the shutter of the present invention, and the back rear left base in the present embodiment. The slide slit 3420c of the 3420, the slide slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520, the sliding pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465, the sliding pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565, and the slide frame 3630 of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 are of the present invention. Each corresponds to an opening / closing control means.

Further, the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521 in the present embodiment are the decorative substrates of the present invention, and the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the third bearing cover 3428, and the third bearing cover 3428 in the present embodiment are used. The fourth bearing cover 3492, the fifth bearing cover 3430, the first bearing cover 3526, the second bearing cover 3527, the third bearing cover 3528, the fourth bearing cover 3529, and the fifth bearing cover 3530 are used in the decorative cover of the present invention. The back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 in the embodiment correspond to the rotary drive means of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the drive gear 3432 and the drive gear 3532, the relay gear 3433 and the relay gear 3533, the back rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534, the driven gear portion 3435a and the transmission gear member of the transmission gear member lower 3435 in the present embodiment. The driven gear portion 3535a of the lower 3535, the driven gear portion 3436a of the transmission gear member upper 3436, and the driven gear portion 3536a of the transmission gear member upper 3536 are used in the transmission mechanism of the present invention, and the drive gear 3432 and the drive gear 3532 in the present embodiment are relayed. Gear 3433 and relay gear 3533, back rear left drive rack 3434 and back rear right drive rack 3534, transmission gear member lower 3435 and transmission gear member lower 3535, transmission gear member upper 3436 and transmission gear member upper 3536, rotary gear 3437 and rotation. The gear 3537 is attached to the rotary drive mechanism of the present invention, and the working rack gear lower 3434b, the working rack gear upper 3434c, the working rack gear lower 3534b, and the working rack gear upper 3534c in the present embodiment are attached to the working rack gear of the present invention. The 3450 corresponds to the universal shaft joint of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 in the present embodiment are slid on the rotating action member of the present invention in the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565 of the present embodiment. The pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c are attached to the working part of the present invention, and the pulley part 3465e and the pulley part 3565e in the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565 of the present invention are attached to the working part of the present invention. The drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 are used for the opening / closing drive means of the present invention, the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 in the present embodiment are used for the drive belt of the present invention, and the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3471 in the present embodiment are used. The second belt 3571 corresponds to the working belt of the present invention.

Further, the movable side rack gear 3631 of the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 in the present embodiment is used as the infested rack gear of the present invention, and the sub-effect display device 3640 in the present embodiment is used as the sub-effect display means of the present invention. The rear upper drive motor 3652 corresponds to the haunting drive means of the present invention, respectively.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rotation stop position of the swivel table 3380 is set to the specific swivel position (first swivel position, second swivel position, third swivel position) in the front view game area 5a. After setting the state of (any), the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 attached to the front surface of the swivel table 3380 are set to the separated positions, and the sub effect display device 3640 is set. By setting the retracted position, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the unit base 3361 is displayed between the pair of back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3321. Through the opening 3361b and the through hole 3382 of the swivel table 3380, it can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in a good state, and the player can be entertained by the effect image by the main effect display device 1600. In this state, since the sub-effect display device 3640 is located adjacent to the main effect display device 1600 in the front view, the main effect display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640 form one screen. By displaying such an effect image, it is possible to show the player a large effect image that combines the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, and the powerful effect image surprises and entertains the player. (However, in this embodiment, the first turning position is excluded). Further, since the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 are located on both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and the back-rear right bases 3520 are placed in front of each of them. It is possible to decorate both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600 by the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510, and the appearance in the game area 5a is improved by the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of.

In this state, when the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 are rotated by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a. The relay pulley 3469 and the relay pulley 3569 are rotated by the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 wound around the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568, and the relay pulley 3469 and the relay pulley 3569 are wound around the relay pulley 3469 and the relay pulley 3569. The pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e are rotated by the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571, and together with the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, are in the vicinity of the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501. The arranged slide arm 3465 and slide arm 3565 rotate, and the sliding pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c of the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565 revolve, and the sliding pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c revolve. As a result, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 move from the separated position to the approaching position. In this way, when the pair of back rear left bases 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved from the separation position to the approach position by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566, the pair of back rear left bases are moved. The base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 are located in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 to block the effect image, and the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 are in front of each other. Since the position changes by moving to the center side of the visual game area 5a, the player's interest is focused on the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 and the back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520, respectively. It can be strongly attracted to the plurality of attached back-back left-rotating decorations 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorations 3510, making the player think that there is something good for the game. Expectations can be raised.

Since the pair of back-rear left base 3420 and back-rear right base 3520 can be moved separately between the approaching position and the separating position, by moving only one of them, the main effect display device 1600 can be moved. , Show the player a movable effect that hides or hides only one side in the left-right direction, only one side in the up-down direction, and only one side in the diagonal direction. After the back rear right base 3520 moves to the approaching position, the other back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the approaching position to show the player a movable effect that hides the main effect display device 1600. be able to. Then, even if the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 are moved as described above, the sub-effect display adjacent to the main effect display device 1600 by the pair of back-rear left base 3420 and back-rear right base 3520. Since the display screen of the device 3640 is not obstructed, the effect image of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be shown to the player, and the effect image by the sub-effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. Further, if one of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 is moved to the approaching position side, the sub-effect display device 3640 cannot move from the retracted position to the protruding position side. The sub-effect display device 3640 does not move freely, and the effect using the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 and the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 is not uncomfortable. Can be entertained.

Further, when the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right drive motor 3531 attached to the respective shutters are driven according to the game state, the front of the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520, respectively. Of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in an arc shape, the first back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410A and the first back-back rear-rotating decorative body 3410A and the first back-back rotating decorative body are arranged every other. It meshes with the rotary gear 3437 and the rotary gear 3537 attached to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the right rotation decoration body 3510A, the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C, and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C. The transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3535c, the transmission gear portion 3436c and the transmission gear portion 3536c provided with the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the transmission gear member lower 3535, and the transmission gear member upper 3436 and the transmission gear member upper 3536 are on the back left. The shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 project via the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, which are rotated via the drive rack 3434, the back rear right drive rack 3534, and the like, and to which the rotary gear 3437 and the rotary gear 3537 are attached. Decorative body 3411 and decorative body 3511 (first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A, first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C, and third back rear right rotating decorative body The 3510C) rotates about the shaft cores of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, and at the same time, the shaft portion 3412 to which the rotary gear 3437 and the rotary gear 3537 are attached and the shaft portion 3512 adjacent to the shaft portion 3512. Since the 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 are connected by the rotation connecting mechanism 3450 so as to be rotatable, the rotation of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 is transmitted even if the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 extend in different directions. The second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D and the fourth back rear rear are adjacent to each other via the rotation connection mechanism 3450. The right-handed decorative body 3510D will also rotate.

In this way, with respect to the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in a row, the drive from the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right drive motor 3531 is back-rear left. Rotation is transmitted every other rotation through the drive rack 3434, the back rear right drive rack 3534, the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the transmission gear member upper 3536, and the like, and adjacent to each other. The second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B and the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B, the fourth back rear left rotation decoration 3410D, and the fourth back rear right through the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. Since the rotary decoration body 3510D is rotated, a plurality of back-rear left-hand rotations in which the direction in which the rotation axis extends is different by being arranged in an arc shape by one back-rear left drive motor 3431 and back-rear right drive motor 3531. The decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decorative body 3510 can be simultaneously rotated by the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531, and the shaft cores of the respective shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 are rear rear. Since it extends along the surfaces of the left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, when the plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 are stopped at appropriate rotation angles, they become three-dimensional. The front-facing parts of the formed decorative body 3411 and the decorative body 3511 will be changed, and the appearance of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 seen from the player side will be changed. Can be changed.

Further, depending on the game state, the slide gear 3620 is rotated by the back-rear upper drive motor 3652 via the slide plate 3610, and the slide frame is interposed via the movable rack gear 3631 of the slide frame 3630 that meshes with the slide gear 3620. When the sub-effect display device 3640 attached to the 3630 is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the sub-effect display device 3640 is located in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, and the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 is displayed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect image of the sub-effect display device 3640, and the effect image of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. Further, when the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 are displaying an effect image that constitutes one screen, if the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the backward position to the protruding position, the display screen is displayed. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the protruding position to the backward position, the player can be shown the effect of increasing the display screen. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position side from the retracted position, the sub-effect display device (slide frame 3630) causes the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 to approach positions from the separated positions. Since it cannot be moved to the side, it is possible to prevent the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 from moving without permission, and the player can enjoy the effect using the sub effect display device 3640 without discomfort. be able to.

Further, when the swivel pinion gear 3373 is rotated by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 via the drive gear 3371 and the swivel speed change gear 3372 according to the gaming state, the swivel gear 3384 meshing with the swivel pinion gear 3373 causes the swivel pinion gear 3373 to rotate. The swivel table 3380, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending back and forth toward the front surface of the unit base 3361, rotates. On the outside of the swivel table 3380, a plurality of guide pins 3363 as swivel control means extending forward from the unit base 3361 at intervals along the outer circumference are provided, and the swivel table 3380 is at a specific swivel position. The sub-effect display device 3640 can be moved to the retracted position only when the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, and the rotation of the swivel table 3380 is restricted by the rotation regulating means (guide pin 3363) when the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position. In order to rotate the swivel table 3380, it is necessary to move the sub-effect display device 3640 from the retracted position to the protruding position side (swivelable range) to some extent. Therefore, when the swivel table 3380 rotates when the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, the sub-effect display device 3640 once moves in the direction of the turning center (protruding position) and then rotates. Therefore, the movement makes it possible to attract the player's attention to the sub-effect display device 3640 and draw attention to it, and the sub-effect display device 3640, the back rear left base 3420, and the back rear right base 3520 are swiveled by the swivel table 3380. It is possible to make it difficult to overlook, and it is possible to surely entertain the production by the sub-effect display device 3640 or the like and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Then, as the swivel table 3380 rotates, the sub-effect display device 3640 attached to the swivel table 3380, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520, and the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear A plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 attached to the front surfaces of the right bases 3520 are centered on the center of the swivel table 3380, that is, near the center of the main effect display device 1600. As a result, the whole turns around the axis extending back and forth, and a pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520, sub effect display device 3640, and a plurality of back rear left around the main effect display device 1600. The rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-back right rotating decoration body 3510 can be swiveled around. Therefore, the positions in which the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged in a row in the game area 5a are left or right, upper or lower, or diagonally upper or diagonally lower. The pachinko machine 1 can be changed in various ways, the decoration (appearance) in the game area 5a can be changed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. .. Further, by stopping the rotation of the swivel table 3380 at various specific swivel positions and moving the sub-effect display device 3640 to the retracted position, a pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and backs that move between the approaching position and the separating position. Since the moving direction of the rear right base 3520 can be changed according to a specific turning position such as a left-right direction, a vertical direction, or an oblique direction, the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 can be used. The main effect display device 1600 can be opened and closed from various directions, so that the player is less likely to get bored. Further, by rotating the swivel table 3380, the position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is arranged with respect to the main effect display device 1600 can be set to the left side or right side of the main effect display device 1600, the upper side or the lower side, or diagonally. It can be changed in various ways, such as on the upper side or diagonally lower side.

In this way, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can rotate the plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510, or the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear. The right slide drive motor 3566 opens and closes a pair of back rear left bases 3420 and back rear right bases 3520 with a plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back rear right rotation decorations 3510, and back rear upper drive motors 3652. The sub-effect display device 3640 is moved by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370, and the back-rear left-rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotation decoration body 3510 are swiveled together with the sub-effect display device 3640 and a pair of shutters. Therefore, by appropriately combining these movements, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored. The stage production can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

The production by these will be described in detail. For example, by stopping the rotation of the swivel table 3380 at the first swivel position or the third swivel position and moving the sub-effect display device 3640 to the retracted position, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 The moving direction (the direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position) is the horizontal direction, and the player can be shown a movable effect of opening and closing the main effect display device 1600 from the left-right direction. Further, in this state, the sub-effect display device 3640 that moves between the retracted position and the protruding position by setting the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 at the separated positions is the main effect display device 1600. It is possible to show an effect of moving in the vertical direction, such as between the upper side and the front side of the above, or between the lower side and the front side, and at the third turning position, the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device. When the effect image that constitutes one screen is displayed by the 3640, the sub effect display device 3640 can show the player an effect that spreads to the lower side of the main effect display device 1600.

Further, by stopping the rotation of the swivel table 3380 at the second swivel position and moving the sub-effect display device 3640 to the retracted position, the movement directions of the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 are vertical. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movable effect of opening and closing the main effect display device 1600 from the vertical direction. Further, in this state, by setting the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 to separate positions, the sub-effect display device 3640 is placed between the right side and the front side of the main effect display device 1600. When the effect that moves in the left-right direction can be shown and the effect image that constitutes one screen is displayed by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, the sub effect display device 3640 is used. Main effect display device 1600 It is possible to show the player an effect that spreads to the right side.

In this way, the main effect display device 1600 can be opened and closed from various directions by the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 according to the specific rotation position for stopping the rotation of the swivel table 3380, or the main effect display device 1600 can be used. On the other hand, since the sub-effect display device 3640 can be arranged in various directions, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 in the separated positions and the sub-effect display device 3640 in the retracted position are swivel tables. By rotating by 3380, the player can be excited depending on at which specific turning position the rotation of the swivel table 3380 is stopped, and after the swivel table 3380 has stopped rotating, a pair of back rear left bases 3420 The player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the back and rear right base 3520 moves to the approaching position, or whether or not the sub-effect display device 3640 moves to the protruding position.

Further, in the state where the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position and the restriction by the guide pin 3363 is released (the state in the position within the swivelable range), the swivel table 3380 is rotated to rotate the sub-effect display device 3640. And the effect image (for example, another character) displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 is rotating around the effect image (for example, a certain character) displayed on the main effect display device 1600. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player by the production that has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machine. Further, in this state, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned, if the main effect display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640 are used to display an effect image that constitutes one screen, the sub-effect display device 3640 is displayed. As the display device 3640 turns, the outer shape of the display screen by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 changes, so that the player can be made to wonder and pay attention to the effect image. , The effect using the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 can be further enjoyed.

Further, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position side to release the regulation by the guide pin 3363, or when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position while rotating the swivel table 3380, the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position. It is possible to show the player the effect that the display device 3640 moves in an arc shape toward the center side. Further, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position side to the protruding position while reciprocating the swivel table 3380 within a predetermined rotation angle range, the sub-effect display device 3640 moves in a zigzag shape toward the center side. It is possible to show the player the effect to be performed. Further, when moving the sub-effect display device 3640 to the protruding position, the swivel table 3380 can be rotated to an arbitrary position with respect to the rotation direction of the swivel table 3380, and then moved toward the protruding position. Therefore, the pattern of the movement (effect) of the sub-effect display device 3640 in the direction toward the rotation center of the swivel table 3380 can be diversified, and the player can be less likely to get bored. Then, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position side to the protruding position, the sub-effect display device 3640 approaches the rotation center of the swivel table 3380, so that the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the front side of the main effect display device 1600. Therefore, half of the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600 can be blocked by the sub effect display device 3640, and the player's interest is attracted to the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640. You can entertain the production image. Further, since the sub-effect display device 3640 can be moved from the protruding position to the retracted position side by moving in the opposite direction to the above, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of effects.
Further, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 are individually approached when the swivel table 3380 stops rotating at a specific swivel position and the sub-effect display device 3640 moves to the retreat position. Since it is possible to move between the and the separated position, by moving only one of them, only one side of the main effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction, only one side in the vertical direction, and only one side in the diagonal direction can be moved. Show the player a movable effect that hides or makes the whole visible, or after one back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 move to the approaching position, the other back rear left base 3420 and back rear It is possible to show the player a movable effect that hides the main effect display device 1600 by moving the right base 3520 to an approaching position. Therefore, does only one of the pair of back-rear left base 3420 and back-rear right base 3520 move in a state where the swivel table 3380 stops rotating at the specific swivel position and the sub-effect display device 3640 moves to the retracted position? In addition to being able to excite the player by moving both, one back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 move, and then the other back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 move. The player can be excited depending on whether or not it is.

Further, a plurality of back-rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back-rear right rotation decorations 3510 are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 that are swiveled by the swivel table 3380. Therefore, when the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right-hand drive motor 3531, the back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear rear It is possible to change (change) the decoration that can be seen from the front of the right-handed decorative body 3510, and it is possible to greatly change the appearance in the game area 5a, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes it hard to get bored. At the same time, the appearance in the game area 5a can be changed, so that the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to be played can easily select the pachinko machine 1. Further, since the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520, as described above. The movable effect of the movement of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 is a plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back rear right rotation attached to the front of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. It can be said that it is an overall movable effect of the decorative body 3510, and it is possible to exert the same effect as that of the movement of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 described above.

Therefore, whether or not the sub-effect display device 3640 moves, whether or not the swivel table 3380 rotates, whether or not the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 move, and moreover, a plurality of backs. Since various production branch points can be provided in the flow of a series of movable effects such as whether or not the rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 rotate, the branch points of the branch points can be provided. Each time, the player can be throbbing and throbbing, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player's expectation for the game can be raised, and the decline in the player's interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, as the effect image to be displayed on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 when performing the movable effect as described above, for example, a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right by a predetermined character. An effect image in which the rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated around the main effect display device 1600, and an effect image in which the sub effect display device 3640 is moved between the protruding position and the retracted position by a predetermined character. An effect image in which a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorations 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorations 3510 are moved between an approaching position and a separation position by a predetermined character, or a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorations. By displaying on the main effect display device 1600 or the like an effect image in which a predetermined character is moved by the rotation or movement of the 3410 and the back-rear right rotation decorative body 3510, a collaborative effect of the movable effect and the effect image is produced. Can be shown to the player, and the player can be further entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In this way, the movement of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566, and the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531. The rotation of the plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 attached to the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, respectively, and the sub-effect display by the back rear upper drive motor 3652. Movement of device 3640, sub-effect display device 3640 by back-rear swivel drive motor 3370, pair of back-rear left base 3420 and back-rear right base 3520, and a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 By appropriately combining the rotation of the back and rear, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and also a movable effect using the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. It is possible to make the player more entertaining, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the sub-effect display means can be moved from the retracted position to the protruding position only when the pair of back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 are separated from each other, the pair of back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear left base 3420 and Since the back-rear right base 3520 and the sub-effect display device 3640 are positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction, the sub-effect display device 3640, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420, and the back-rear right base 3520 (plural back-rear left rotation decorations). It is possible to suppress a widening of the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510), and the sub-effect display device 3640, a pair of back-back left bases 3420, and a back-back right base 3520 are provided. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 from becoming relatively small, and back-back-left-turning. By making the decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 as large as possible to make them stand out, the decorative effect of the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be fully exerted. Can be done.

Further, when at least one of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 is moved from the separation position to the approach position side, the sub-effect display device 3640 may move from the backward position to the protrusion position side. Therefore, the swivel table 3380 stops rotating at a specific swivel position (first swivel position) such that the sub effect display device 3640 is located above the main effect display device 1600 (above the rotation center of the swivel table 3380). When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position, and then the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the approaching position side, the sub-effect display is displayed by the load of the sub-effect display device 3640. Even if a force that tries to move the device 3640 downward acts, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 that are moving toward the approaching position prevent the sub-effect display device 3640 from moving downward. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display device 3640 from moving downward without permission, it is possible to prevent the sub-effect display device 3640 from moving unnaturally and giving the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to surely enjoy the production by the sub-effect display device 3640 or the like and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 moving to the approach position side can prevent the sub effect display device 3640 from moving downward, the sub effect display device 3640 does not move arbitrarily. It is not necessary to keep driving the back-rear upper drive motor 3652 as described above, and it is possible to prevent the back-rear upper drive motor 3652 from being damaged due to an overload and prevent the game from being interrupted. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position side, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 cannot move from the detached position to the approaching position side. When the movement direction of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 is set to the vertical direction (including the diagonal direction) by the swivel table 3380, the sub-effect display device 3640 is located on the protruding position side. In the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 located on the upper end side in the moving direction, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved by the load of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. Even if a force for moving downward acts, the sub-effect display device 3640 moving to the protruding position side can prevent the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 from moving downward. .. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 from moving downward without permission, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 move unnaturally, and the player It is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to surely enjoy the production by the back rear left base 3420, the back rear right base 3520 and the like, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the sub-effect display device 3640 moving to the protruding position side can prevent the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 from moving downward, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and the back-rear left base 3420 It is not necessary to keep driving the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 so that the back rear right base 3520 does not move freely, and the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide due to overload. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 3566 from being damaged and prevent the game from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since it is provided with a plurality of guide pins 3363, a slide frame 3630, a back rear upper drive motor 3652, etc. as a turning regulating means for restricting the rotation of the swivel table 3380, the swivel table 3380 by the back rear swivel drive motor 3370 is provided. The back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 make the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right while the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position after stopping the rotation of. When the base 3520 is moved, or when the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are rotated by the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531, the position of the center of gravity changes. Even if the swivel table 3380 is to be rotated in the rotation direction due to the generation of vibration, the swivel table 3380 can be restricted from rotating by the swivel regulating means. It is possible to prevent the entire rotating decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510, or the pair of back rear left bases 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 from unstable movements, and a plurality of back rear left rotating decorations. The body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 can be rotated in a stable state, and the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 can be moved in a stable state, and a plurality of backs can be moved. It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort to the rotation of the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 and the movement of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, which is entertaining to the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the rotation of the swivel table 3380 can be regulated by a plurality of guide pins 3363, a slide frame 3630, a back rear upper drive motor 3652, etc. as the swivel regulating means, the plurality of back rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 and the back The rotation regulating means may receive a rotation moment for rotating the rotation table 3380 by the load of the rear right rotation decoration body 3510, the back rear left drive motor 3431, the back rear right drive motor 3531, the sub effect display device 3640, and the like. Therefore, when the rotation of the swivel table 3380 is stopped, a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510, back-rear left drive motors 3431, back-rear right drive motors 3531, and sub-effect display It is not necessary to apply a force that cancels the rotational moment due to the load of the device 3640 or the like from the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 to the swivel table 3380, and it is possible to prevent the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 from being loaded. It is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the load.

Further, by projecting the guide pin 3363 forward from the unit base 3361, the guide pin 3363 is brought into contact with the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) at the retracted position to regulate the turning, and the plurality of guide pins 3363 are arranged. The protruding intervals of the sub-effect display devices 3640 are regulated within different turning angles by appropriately differentiating them at a plurality of specific turning positions (first turning position, second turning position, and third turning position). Therefore, the sub-effect display device 3640 cannot be turned by the guide pin 3363 or is within a predetermined turning angle range according to the specific turning position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is swiveled. It is possible to make a reciprocating turn in the turning direction with. More specifically, for example, at the second turning position, the two guide pins 3363 are separated in the turning direction by substantially the same width as the slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached, and the two guide pins 3363 are separated from each other. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position so as to be inserted between the two guide pins 3630, the portion of the slide frame 3630 that protrudes outward from the swivel table 3380 is sandwiched between the two guide pins 3363. The sub-effect display device 3640 can be restricted (locked) so that it cannot turn. Further, the distance between the two guide pins 3363 in the turning direction at the first turning position and the third turning position is wider than the width of the slide frame 3630 so as to be inserted between the two guide pins 3363. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position, a gap of a predetermined size is provided between the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) and the two guide pins 3363. Only the sub-effect display device 3640 can be swiveled in the turning direction, and the sub-effect display device 3640 can be regulated so that it can be swiveled only within a predetermined turning angle range. In this way, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be made non-turnable by the guide pin 3363 or can be reciprocally turned in the turning direction within a predetermined turning angle range according to the specific turning position. Depending on the specific turning position where the effect display device 3640 is located, different movements in the turning direction can be shown to the player, and the various effects make it difficult for the player to get bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, except for the specific turning position (first turning position, second turning position, and third turning position), the slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached shows the distance between the two guide pins 3363 in the turning direction. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved in the backward position at the turning position between the two guide pins 3363, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 becomes the guide pin 3363. The movement to the retracted position is restricted by contacting the two guide pins, and the sub-effect display device 3640 does not invade between the two guide pins 3363. Therefore, even if another member is attached to a portion (a portion other than the specific turning position) between the two guide pins 3363 having a narrow interval, the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) does not come into contact with the sub-effect display device. Since another member can be attached to the portion, as other members, a back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 for rotating the swivel table 3380, a swivel detection sensor 336, and the like can be attached to the portion, as described above. It is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 that exerts an action effect.

Further, when the swivel table 3380 is in the specific swivel position, the rotation is regulated by the swivel regulating means (guide pin 3363). That is, the sub-effect display device 3640 may be moved between the protruding position and the retracted position, or the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 may be moved between the approaching position and the separating position. Since the turning position (effect execution position) for rotating the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 is limited to a specific turning position, the effect can be executed at any turning position. It is possible to suppress the increase of the production pattern as compared with the case of setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disgusted by having too many production patterns, and an appropriate number of production patterns can be prevented. It is possible to entertain the player and reduce the load on the effect control, prevent the game from being interrupted due to the overload, and surely entertain the above-mentioned effect. can.

Further, since the slide gear 3620 for moving the sub-effect display device 3640 between the protruding position and the retracted position is rotated around the axis extending back and forth, the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved. The depth of the mechanism (back rear upper slide drive unit 3650) in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible, and it is possible to easily prepare for the pachinko machine 1 having a limited depth.

Further, since the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be rotated by the back-rear left-hand drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right-hand drive motor 3531, the back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and each back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and It is not necessary to equip the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 with the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531, respectively, and the space required for the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can be provided as much as possible. It can be narrowed, and the space required for the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be relatively widened. Therefore, for example, since the space of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be relatively widened, the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be relatively widened. The rotation range of the back and rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 can be made larger and more conspicuous, and the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and Since the number of back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be increased to increase the impact when rotated, it depends on the movement and decoration of a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510. The effect of the effect can be further enhanced, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the swivel table 3380 and the unit base 3361 have a through hole 3382 and an opening 3361b that are larger than the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, they are arranged behind the unit base 3361. Since the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the opening 3361b of the unit base 3361 and the through hole 3382 of the swivel table 3380, the unit base 3361 and the swivel table 3380 can be viewed. Compared with the case where the main effect display device 1600 is visually recognizable through a transparent part composed of transparent members, the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a clear state. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, the slide slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420, the slide slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520, and the slide of the slide arm 3465 as an opening / closing restricting means for restricting the movement of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. Since the moving pin 3465c, the sliding pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565, the slide frame 3630, the back rear upper drive motor 3652, and the like are provided, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 can be moved by the opening / closing restricting means. By restricting, even if the swivel table 3380 is rotated or a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated, the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520 Because it is possible to prevent the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520, and a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510, there is a sense of discomfort. It can be made difficult to give, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Further, the swivel table 3380 can be rotated, the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated, and the movement directions of the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 can be moved up and down. Even if the rotation of the swivel table 3380 is stopped so as to be in the direction, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are restricted by the opening / closing regulating means, so that the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base are restricted. It is not necessary to keep applying force to the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 so that the 3520 does not move freely, and the back rear left slide. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 from being loaded, and it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to overload.

Further, the swivel table 3380 can be rotatably mounted around the axis extending in the front-rear direction by the plurality of guide bushes 3364 and the guide rollers 3365 attached to the unit base 3361, and the back-back swivel drive motor 3370 allows the swivel table 3380 to be rotatably mounted. When the swivel pinion gear is rotated, the swivel table 3380 can be rotated around the axis extending back and forth by the swivel gear meshing with the swivel pinion gear. It can be surely embodied. Further, since the plurality of guide bushes 3364 and the guide rollers 3365 are brought into contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380 and the swivel table 3380 is rotatably attached around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the plurality of guide bushes 3364 and the guide rollers are mounted. Of the 3365, a plurality of guide bushes 3364 and guide rollers 3365 arranged below the rotation center of the swivel table 3380 can support the load applied to the swivel table 3380, so that the swivel table 3380 is sub-produced. Even if the display device 3640, a pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520, and a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are attached to increase the weight, the swivel table 3380 By distributing and supporting the load applied to the guide bush 3364 and the guide roller 3365, the load acting on the guide bush 3364 and the guide roller 3365 can be reduced to prevent damage, and the swivel table 3380 can be smoothly rotated. It is possible to surely produce the desired action and effect. Further, since the swivel table 3380 is rotatably attached by a plurality of guide bushes 3364 and guide rollers 3365 that are in contact with the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380, it is not necessary to provide a rotation shaft at the rotation center of the swivel table 3380. Since there is nothing that interferes with the main effect display device 1600 arranged behind the swivel table 3380, the main effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front in good condition, and the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. The pachinko machine 1 having the main effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the swivel table 3380 can be surely embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be provided. can.

Further, in the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510, the shaft cores of the respective shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512 are parallel to the front surfaces of the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520. A plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged along the front surface of the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-back right base 3520 because they are arranged on the same surface. It is possible to reduce the depth in the front-rear direction required for arranging the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510, and the back-back left base 3420 and back-back right. A plurality of back-back left-rotating decorations 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorations 3510 can be reliably arranged on the front side of the base 3520, and a plurality of back-back-left-rotating decorations in the pachinko machine 1 having a limited depth. The body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510, the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520, the swivel table 3380, and the main effect display device 1600 can be easily arranged in the front-rear direction, and the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Further, since the depth of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be reduced, the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 are relatively large. Other members (eg, game panel 1100, center accessory 2500, etc. Etc.), or a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorations 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorations 3510 may be placed in a narrow space (for example, between the game panel 1100 and the main effect display device 1600). It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, the main effect display device 1600 has a horizontally long quadrangle in the front view, and the movement direction connecting the approach position and the separation position in the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520. Since the length in the perpendicular direction is formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the main effect display device 1600, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 display the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. Since the size (length) is such that it straddles, when the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the front side of the main effect display device 1600, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are used. The area covered is widened, and the impact on the player when the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the front side of the main effect display device 1600 can be enhanced, making the player more entertaining. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, for example, when both ends in the longitudinal direction of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are movably supported between the approaching position and the separating position, the guide member (for example, movably supporting the guide member) is movably supported. The slide shaft 3462 and slide shaft 3562, slide guide 3464, slide guide 3563, etc.) are arranged outside the main effect display device 1600 in the front view, and the effect image can be less likely to be obstructed by the guide member. It is possible to entertain the production image to the player in a good state.

Further, it covers the front side of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the back rear left drive motor 3431, and the back rear right drive motor 3531. 1 Bearing cover 3426, 2nd bearing cover 3427, 3rd bearing cover 3428, 4th bearing cover 3249, 5th bearing cover 3430, 1st bearing cover 3526, 2nd bearing cover 3527, 3rd bearing cover 3528, 4th bearing Since the cover 3529 and the fifth bearing cover 3530 are attached to the front surfaces of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, and the third bearing cover 3428, 4th bearing cover 3249, 5th bearing cover 3430, 1st bearing cover 3526, 2nd bearing cover 3527, 3rd bearing cover 3528, 4th bearing cover 3529, and 5th bearing cover 3530. The shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510, the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the back rear left drive motor 3431, and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can be hidden from the player side, and the back can be hidden. The shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510, the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the back rear left drive motor 3431, and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can be seen, and the appearance in the game area 5a. It can be reduced that the bearing becomes worse. Further, the first bearing cover that hides the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510, the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the back rear left drive motor 3431, and the back rear right drive motor 3531. 3426, 2nd bearing cover 3427, 3rd bearing cover 3428, 4th bearing cover 3249, 5th bearing cover 3430, 1st bearing cover 3526, 2nd bearing cover 3527, 3rd bearing cover 3528, 4th bearing cover 3529, The fifth bearing cover 3530 can decorate the inside of the game area 5a and the front surface of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 to improve the appearance and entertain the player.

Further, when the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 are moved to the approaching positions, the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 attached to the front surfaces of the pair are moved to the approaching positions. Since the players are arranged in a ring shape, the player's attention can be strongly directed to the center of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 are moved to the separated positions, the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are aligned along the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The pachinko machines 1 can be lined up to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by decorating the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a. Further, by moving the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 to the approaching position or the separation position, the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 arranged in an arc shape The diameter of the virtual annulus formed by the back-to-right rotating ornament 3510 can be reduced or increased. Therefore, when the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 are moved from the separated positions to the approaching positions, a virtual annulus formed by the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 is formed. Since it becomes smaller, the player's attention can be directed to the center of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 are moved from the approaching position to the distant position, a virtual annulus formed by the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 is formed. Since it becomes large, the player's attention can be directed to the outer peripheral side of the game area 5a. Further, since the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table 3380, they are swiveled by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370. When the table 3380 is rotated, the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorations 3410 and the back-rear-right-rotating decorations 3510 move in the direction in which they are arranged, so that the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorations 3410 It is possible to show the player a movable effect as if the back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are running side by side on the circumference, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorations 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorations 3510 are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center side of the swivel table 3380, for example, a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorations When each of the body 3410 and the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3510 is rotated so that the ends facing the center side of the game area 5a move forward, a movable effect of flowing from the center of the game area 5a to the front is produced. It can be shown to the player, and the player can be made to feel as if a headwind is blowing. Alternatively, when each of the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 is rotated so that the ends facing the center side of the game area 5a move rearward, the center of the game area 5a is formed. It is possible to show the player a movable effect that flows from the rear to the rear, and it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is sucked into the game area 5a. At this time, by displaying the effect images corresponding to the rotation directions of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 on the main effect display device 1600, the main effect display device 1600 moves forward. It is possible to show the player an effect that is radiated, or to show an effect that is sucked into the main effect display device 1600. Therefore, by rotating the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in an arc shape, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the center of the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs provided on the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521 are appropriately made to emit light, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are light-emitting and decorated. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510, and at the same time, the player can make the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 stand out. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, to make the player think that there is something, and to raise the expectation for the game. Further, the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right while the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 are rotated by the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531. When the LED of the decorative substrate 3521 is made to emit light, the orientations of the decorative body 3411 and the decorative body 3511, which are three-dimensionally formed by rotation, change, so that the front back and rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back and rear right from the LED. The direction of refraction and reflection of the light irradiated to the rotating decoration 3510, the amount of transmission, etc. will change one after another, so that the back-rear left-rotating decoration 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decoration 3510 are blinking. It can be shown, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear are in a state where the pair of back rear left bases 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the approaching positions by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566. When the LED of the right decorative substrate 3521 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration having a brightness clearly different from that of the effect image of the main effect display device 1600, so that the player's attention is directed to the center of the game area 5a. Can be made to. Further, in a state where the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the approaching positions and the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated, the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 And when the LED of the back-rear right decorative substrate 3521 is made to emit light, a movable light-emitting effect is played in which a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 twinkle on the front surface of the main effect display device 1600. Since it can be shown to a person, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, the swivel table 3380 is rotated by the back-rear swivel drive motor 3370 to rotate the entire back-rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back-rear right rotation decoration 3510 via the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. When the LEDs of the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521 are made to emit light in the swirling state, the player can be shown the arc-shaped light locus centered on the center of the swivel table 3380. , Can entertain the player. Further, when the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right drive motor 3531 while rotating the swivel table 3380, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3510 is rotated. There is something good for the player because the arc-shaped light trajectory by the LED of the 3421 and the back right decorative board 3521 can be shown to the player as a comet-like movable light emitting effect by blinking. It is possible to make people think that there is, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, the rotary connecting mechanism 3450 is connected by a pair of arm portions 3451 protruding from the respective shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512, and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the respective arm portions 3541. Since it is configured and the rotation is transmitted via the spider 3452, the rotation due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring is compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by using the rubber and the spring. The time lag of transmission can be eliminated, and the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be rotated at the same time. Therefore, when the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decoration body 3510 are rotated by the back-back left drive motor 3431 and the back-back right drive motor 3531, the back-back left-rotating decoration body 3410 and the back side Since the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotates at the same time, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotate with a delay in order, which makes the player feel unnatural. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and to entertain the movements of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 that have a sense of unity to the player, and suppress the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, in the rotary connection mechanism 3450, the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is sandwiched between the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of one shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 and the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of the other shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. Since it is possible to assemble a rotary connection mechanism 3450 that connects the two shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 so that rotation can be transmitted to each other, a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft joint can be used as a rotary connection mechanism (universal shaft joint). As compared with the case of adopting the above, the number of parts can be reduced, the labor required for assembly can be facilitated, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in a row, the first back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3410A and the first back-back-right-rotating decorative body located every other one. Rotating gear 3437, rotating gear 3537, transmission gear member lower 3435, and transmission with respect to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the decorative body 3510A, the third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C, and the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C. Since the drive from the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 is transmitted and rotated via the gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the transmission gear member upper 3536, etc., the rotation is connected. Accumulation (effect) of rattling in the rotation direction in the mechanism 3450 can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, the second back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510B, the fourth back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3410D, and the fourth back-back-right-rotating decorative body that are rotated via the rotary connecting mechanism 3450. Since the rotation time lag of the 3510D can be reduced as much as possible, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 rotate a plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back rear right rotation decorations 3510. When the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated substantially at the same time, the movements of the plurality of back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510. It is possible to give a sense of unity to (rotation) and sufficiently exert the effect of the movable effect by the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510, and surely achieve the above-mentioned effects. It can be a pachinko machine 1.

Further, with respect to the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in a row, the second back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510B, and the first Since the three back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C are not connected by the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the rotation gear 3437 and the rotation gear 3537 are attached to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. It is sandwiched between the two first back-rear left-rotating ornaments 3410A, the first back-rear right-rotating ornament 3510A, the third back-rear left-rotating ornament 3410C, and the third back-rear right-rotating ornament 3510C. It is possible to prevent rotation from being transmitted from both sides to the second back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510B, and the second back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410B. And it is possible to prevent the rotation of the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B from being jerky. Therefore, when the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated by the back-rear left-hand drive motor 3431 and the back-rear right-hand drive motor 3531, the back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back are respectively. Since the rear right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated substantially at the same time without discomfort, the effect of rotating the plurality of back-back-left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be fully exhibited, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft of the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 extending in parallel with the surfaces (the surfaces extending vertically and horizontally) of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. A bevel gear-shaped rotary gear 3437 and a rotary gear 3537 are attached to the portion 3512, and a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3435c and a transmission gear portion 3535c, and a transmission gear portion 3436c and a transmission gear portion are attached from the rear side of the rotary gear 3437 and the rotary gear 3537. By engaging the 3536c, the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, and the transmission gear member upper 3536 can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth, and the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the transmission gear member A rod-shaped back rear left drive rack as a transmission mechanism is attached to the lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the driven gear portion 3435a and the driven gear portion 3436a at the rear end of the transmission gear member upper 3536, and the driven gear portion 3535a and the driven gear portion 3436a. After engaging the operating rack gear lower 3434b, the operating rack gear upper 3434c, the operating rack gear lower 3534b, and the operating rack gear upper 3534c of the 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 By sliding the rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534, the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, and the transmission gear member upper 3536 are reared to the rear left drive rack 3434 and the back. Since the drive from the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 is transmitted and rotated via the rear right drive rack 3534 and the like, the back rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534 The depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, even if the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-rear right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 are attached to the front surfaces of the back-rear left base 3420 and the back-rear right base 3520, it is possible to prevent them from coming into contact with other members. , In the pachinko machine 1 with limited depth, a plurality of back rear left rotating ornaments 3410 on the front side of the main effect display device 1600, the unit base 3361, the swivel table 3380, and the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. The pachinko machine 1 that exerts the above-described effects can be easily embodied by facilitating the arrangement of the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3510. Further, as described above, the depth in the front-rear direction in the back rear left drive rack 3434, the back rear right drive rack 3534, the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the transmission gear member upper 3536, and the like. Since the (thickness) can be made as thin as possible, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be relatively increased, and a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be made relatively large. The back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be made to stand out. Alternatively, a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorations 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorations 3510 can be arranged even at a narrow position in depth, and a plurality of back-back left-rotating decorations 3410 and back-back right-rotating decorations 3510 (back). It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520).

Further, the rod-shaped back rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534 drive the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 to the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, and the transmission gear member. Since the transmission is made to the 3436 side on the 3436 and the transmission gear member, by appropriately selecting the lengths of the back rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right The drive motor 3531 can be arranged at a position that is as inconspicuous as possible from the plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510, and relatively a plurality of back-rear left-rotating decorative bodies 3410. And the back-back right-handed decorative body 3510 can be made to stand out.

Further, the drive from the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 is transmitted to the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565 via the belt wound around the drive pulley and the action pulley to transmit the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 to the back rear left. Since the base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved, the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 are arranged at positions away from the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. Even so, since the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 can be moved, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 can be moved to the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive. It is not necessary to arrange the motor 3566, and it is possible to easily secure a space around the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. Therefore, the space secured around the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 makes it possible to relatively increase the moving distance of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, and the main effect display. In addition to making it easier to open and close the front side of the device 1600, it is possible to make the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 relatively large and conspicuous so as to fill the space. , The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510, and the production operation by the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be enjoyed. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when moving the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 between the approaching position and the separating position via the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3520, the back rear left A force is applied from the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 to the central portion of the base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the moving direction) to apply the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base 3420. Since the back rear right base 3520 is moved, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base 3420 are changed in the moving direction by the rotation of the swivel table 3380. Even if the right base 3520 is moved, the force for moving the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 acts near the center of gravity of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. The left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 can be smoothly moved. Therefore, regardless of the orientation of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3380 due to the rotation of the swivel table 3380, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base can be smoothly placed without rattling. Since the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved between the approaching position and the distant position together with the 3520, the back-back-left rotation without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. The decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved, and the movement of the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3510 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the back-rear central movable production unit 3350 of the back-rear movable production unit 3300, the swivel gear 3384 of the swivel table 3380 is extended in an arc shape that does not go around, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the swivel gear 3384 may be extended in an annular shape. As a result, the swivel table 3380 can be freely rotated, and it is possible to provide an effect that more entertains the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the back-rear movable effect unit 3300, the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) of the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is moved to the protruding position side from the retracted position. When the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are moved from the separation position to the approach position, the slide frame 3630 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-effect display device 3640 is in any position between the retracted position and the protruding position. And the back-right movable decorative unit 3501 may be movable between the separation position and the approach position. As a result, regardless of the position of the rotation angle of the swivel table 3380, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 can be moved to the approaching position, resulting in a more versatile effect. Can be presented to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300, between the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e. A relay pulley 3469 and a relay pulley 3569 are provided, and the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571 wound around the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, and the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 are wound around the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571. Two belts, the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570, are used to transmit rotation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e are used. A plurality of relay pulleys may be provided between them, and belts may be sequentially wound between two adjacent pulleys to transmit rotation through three or more belts.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is located within the swivelable range, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear right bases 3520 may move from the separation position to the approach position side. Although not possible, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is located at the end near the retracted position in the swivelable range, the pair of back-rear left bases 3420 and back-rear The right base 3520 may be able to move to the approaching position side.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1600 Main effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3300 Back rear movable production unit 3350 Back rear center movable production unit 3360 Fixed side unit 3361 Unit base 3361b Opening 3363 Guide pin (turning regulation means)
3364 Guide bush (guide roller)
3365 Guide roller (guide roller)
3370 Back-back swivel drive motor (swivel drive means)
3371 Drive gear 3372 Swivel shift gear 3373 Swivel pinion gear 3380 Swivel table 3382 Throughout 3384 Swivel gear 3400 Back rear left movable production unit 3401 Back rear left movable decoration unit 3410 Back rear left rotation decoration (decorative body)
3410A 1st back back left rotation decoration 3410B 2nd back back left rotation decoration 3410C 3rd back back left rotation decoration 3410D 4th back back left rotation decoration 3411 decoration body 3412 Shaft 3420 Back back left base (shutter) )
3420c slide slit (opening / closing regulation means)
3421 Back back left decorative board (decorative board)
3426 First bearing cover (decorative cover)
3427 Second bearing cover (decorative cover)
3428 Third bearing cover (decorative cover)
3249 Fourth bearing cover (decorative cover)
3430 Fifth bearing cover (decorative cover)
3431 Back rear left drive motor (rotation drive means)
3432 Drive gear (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3433 Relay gear (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3434 Back rear left drive rack (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3434b Under working rack gear (working rack gear)
3434c On working rack gear (working rack gear)
3435 Under the transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3435a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3435c Transmission gear (rotation drive mechanism)
3436 On the transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3436a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3436c Transmission gear (rotation drive mechanism)
3437 Rotating gear (Rotating drive mechanism)
3450 rotary connection mechanism (universal shaft joint)
3451 Arm 3452 Spider 3452a Transmission 3460 Back Rear Left Slide Unit 3465 Slide Arm (Rotating Action Member)
3465c Sliding pin (acting part, opening / closing regulating means)
3465d Gear part 3465e Pulley part (action pulley)
3466 Back rear left slide drive motor (open / close drive means)
3467 Drive gear 3468 Drive pulley 3469 Relay pulley 3470 First belt (drive belt, belt)
3471 Second belt (action belt, belt)
3472 1st transmission gear 3473 2nd transmission gear 3500 Back rear right movable production unit 3501 Back rear right movable decorative unit 3510 Back rear left rotating decorative body (decorative body)
3510A 1st back back left rotation decoration 3510B 2nd back back left rotation decoration 3510C 3rd back back left rotation decoration 3510D 4th back back left rotation decoration 3511 decoration body 3512 Shaft 3520 Back back left base (shutter) )
3520 Back left base (shutter)
3520c slide slit (opening / closing regulation means)
3521 Back back left decorative board (decorative board)
3526 First bearing cover (decorative cover)
3527 Second bearing cover (decorative cover)
3528 Third bearing cover (decorative cover)
3529 Fourth bearing cover (decorative cover)
3530 Fifth bearing cover (decorative cover)
3531 Back rear left drive motor (rotation drive means)
3534 Back rear left drive rack (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3534b Under working rack gear (working rack gear)
3534c On working rack gear (working rack gear)
3535 Under the transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3535a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3535c Transmission gear (rotation drive mechanism)
3536 On the transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3536a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3536c Transmission gear (rotation drive mechanism)
3537 Rotating gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3560 Back rear right slide unit 3565 Slide arm (rotating member)
3565c Sliding pin (working part, opening / closing regulation member)
3565d Gear part 3565e Pulley part (action pulley)
3566 Back rear right slide drive motor (open / close drive means)
3567 Drive gear 3568 Drive pulley 3569 Relay pulley 3570 First belt (drive belt, belt)
3571 Second belt (action belt, belt)
357 1st transmission gear 3573 2nd transmission gear 3600 Back rear upper movable production unit 3610 Slide plate 3620 Slide gear 3630 Slide frame (turning regulation means, opening / closing regulation means)
3631 Movable side rack gear (appearance rack gear)
3640 Sub-effect display device (sub-effect display means)
3650 Back rear upper slide drive unit 3652 Back rear upper drive motor (appearance drive means)

Claims (4)

A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
The main body frame on which the game board is mounted and
A door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame
A ball launcher that launches a game medium for playing a game in the game area, and a ball launcher.
A launch ball storage unit provided on the door frame and storing a game medium for driving into the game area by the ball launch device.
A reserve storage unit having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a vertical wall portion having a predetermined height, into which the game medium flows in from a predetermined supply port, and
A bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view,
With
The storage area includes a first storage area facing the front of the gaming machine and a second storage area not facing the front of the gaming machine.
It is provided with a cover portion that is provided so as to be connected to the preliminary storage portion regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame and does not allow the passage of the game ball.
The cover portion has a ceiling portion of the second storage area.
The cover portion is composed of a member separate from the preliminary storage portion, and the preliminary storage portion and the cover portion are configured to be disassembleable.
The cover portion is formed in a surface shape without a through hole so that the player cannot reach the surface of the cover portion opposite to the storage region side during the game from the second storage region side.
Even when the door frame is in the open state, the gaming medium located in the second storage area is configured so as not to flow out to the outside of the gaming machine without passing through the first storage area.
The cover portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the cover portion is blocked by the bulging portion so that the player cannot easily see the cover portion from the front of the gaming machine during the game. A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
The main body frame on which the game board is mounted and
A door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame
A ball launcher that launches a game medium for playing a game in the game area, and a ball launcher.
A launch ball storage unit provided on the door frame and storing a game medium for driving into the game area by the ball launch device.
A reserve storage unit having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a game medium flowing in from a predetermined supply port that opens in the front-rear direction.
A bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view,
With
The storage area includes a first storage area facing the front of the gaming machine and a second storage area not facing the front of the gaming machine.
It is provided with a cover portion that is provided so as to form a ceiling portion of the second storage area regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame and does not allow the passage of game balls.
The cover portion has a cover standing wall portion and has a cover vertical wall portion.
The cover standing wall portion functions as a standing wall portion forming the second storage area, and serves as a standing wall portion.
The cover portion is formed in a surface shape without a through hole so that the player cannot reach the surface of the cover portion opposite to the storage region side during the game from the second storage region side.
Even when the door frame is in the open state, the gaming medium located in the second storage area is configured so as not to flow out to the outside of the gaming machine without passing through the first storage area.
The cover portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the cover portion is blocked by the bulging portion so that the player cannot easily see the cover portion from the front of the gaming machine during the game. A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
The main body frame on which the game board is mounted and
A door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame
A ball launcher that launches a game medium for playing a game in the game area, and a ball launcher.
A launch ball storage unit provided on the door frame and storing a game medium for driving into the game area by the ball launch device.
A reserve storage unit having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a game medium flowing in from a predetermined supply port that opens in the front-rear direction.
A bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view,
With
The storage area includes a first storage area facing the front of the gaming machine and a second storage area not facing the front of the gaming machine.
It is provided with a cover portion that is provided so as to form a ceiling portion of the second storage area regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame and does not allow the passage of game balls.
A standing wall portion having a predetermined height is provided along the edge portion of the second storage region so that the game medium does not flow out from the storage region even when the cover portion is removed.
The cover portion is formed in a surface shape without a through hole so that the player cannot reach the surface of the cover portion opposite to the storage region side during the game from the second storage region side.
Even when the door frame is in the open state, the gaming medium located in the second storage area is configured so as not to flow out to the outside of the gaming machine without passing through the first storage area.
The cover portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the cover portion is blocked by the bulging portion so that the player cannot easily see the cover portion from the front of the gaming machine during the game. The gaming machine according to claim 1 to 3, wherein the first storage area and the second storage area are made of separate members.

Images